Home

User Reference Guide - MSC Fileman 22.2 Documentation

1. M Drs PICTUS mc 220 Files and TCI Sos eee vati aon D va I P ae b EA Pda 219 Cross Reference a Field or File pt Oni sand ore 262 277 CELOS TELS NEW le tic A a epa dod ae uda 266 A Pa a Pte broma pte a e ese a EA TAEA eres 263 Custom Headings and POT incite dione lcd aaa 28 Data Dictionary Utilities Menta ascii 197 212 214 Data Export PONS rad s ver pides cd is Eu P 367 Data Export to Foreign Format Menus ena io rice He ld E Md 365 D ta POPBYSIS russia daa AA od dH RUFUS De Ha ON RN Reb 328 Data Should Not be Flaten edt citet nandi a resi tani rero i importe DE ud sede teu iaa cerae tete lenis 351 Dita TYPES ssi em eo oo A pa P pde ooo ar Ra Pdl nt COMPUTE Dona he tee aba hic e ra ea EEEE EE ES 229 A usn adusta nad e ieu chs A td adn 251 DATE UME stes trato ds t OP DENT UN PA OOo IHE iaa 224 Exammle seconda oti oa teet sc Aet 245 FREE TEXT ad ci aan 227 A ned CERO o AE aT DOO eerta 247 Multiples ubtelds entente dde eR rtr estt esci m td 235 A dL 255p Numeric ubtfields Bxampleues ii eet eee ved eden pedis 297 IUUD 234 NUMERIC dia 225 POINTER TO A CPIEB o redit oe 231 Example ne o a denk 252 SET OF CODES o s ea o 226 Example tdt 246 VARIABLE POIN TER dt dis ir etn 232 Exilio 253 WORD PROCESSING Ee e toa 228 Example nenne 249 DATE REO aa S T E 352 January 2015 421 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Index DATEFORMAT Piel eie eit ot rA Gebr dien aen 360 DC
2. avais 330 Modify Destination Fleet heu cote etudes De tation 317 Utility Pun CHONG Nr romae ase eet EEN E EEVEE TEE EER ain 202 ORDERPlle aere hbri poete ai 222 243 278 ORDER File GVO tius nite ost qiu udo tis 245pp 249 251pp 255 257 Other Optons MCR is nested End publ p i vean ie borde 912 571 OUTPUT Templates oa 387 Output Ironstormr ODD isaer iste i arbo a E RE R unm 281 PACKAGE File sae av E er vede E E T e eut 213 Parentheses 1 EXPTESSIONS 2 d nod ep or Da on eec itas A ra a Heo s 133 PATIENT File 95200 iicet tout itat lop Pase R 333 400 1a aE e couple ther tri O MO A nitet Gen us ur tepd 148 Preferred ECL OB eus ww cds nace reepa ate ure iea de C UNDO tat 96 108 PREFIX Sur ads cuina pcs elas 232p PRIMARY KEY eben auteni de 237 273 376p Print File Entries Option 31 124 126 134 138p 141p 149 151 155 157 240 330 332 335 340 Print Format Documentation Option retener nnt 354 363 print gualfierS m EE 413 Print CUA DOES oe iet cube etta ud wes stadi DU norte eee 31p 141 333 377 Print Selected Entries ODDO i oor aa 316 375 PRINT TEMPLATE Plain 318 362p 377 387p PRINT TEMPLATE File Hass 334 344 358 428 January 2015 Index MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide PRINT Templates22 124pp 144 209 307 318 334 337 345 370 377 388p 391 PROCEED A CUO sci senta its Oo 302 PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE Field asa 343 359 PROVIDER led o in iia AS ion 292p Turge Extracted Entri
3. EDIT Option D Enter elete from line 5 Enter thru 3 6 OK TO REMOVE 2 LINES No Y Enter Yes 1 gt The delivery people came and left several packages 2 gt by the doorway 3 gt 4 gt Finally the order arrived EDIT Option Advanced Features Most of the features of the Line Editor are self explanatory and simple to use However a few require additional explanation as follows in this section 116 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide File Transfer Use When Uploading ASCII Text The File Transfer from Foreign CPU option from the Utility Sub Menu lets you upload text from another system into your WORD PROCESSING field text using an ASCII non error correcting transfer For example if you are connected from a personal computer PC you can use your communication software to send a text file The file to be transferred must be a text pure ASCII file Most word processing programs have a way of saving a document as text i e without special formatting information check your word processor s manual Also you need to know how to send a text file using your PC s communication software if you re not sure how check your communications software manual To use the File Transfer from Foreign CPU option perform the following procedure Make sure the file you are transferring is a pure ASCII text file While editing a WORD PROCE
4. 325 MESA A ASA AAA 312 Extract Tool Meta 312 Extract Too OPIO dida 307 311p January 2015 423 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Index FIELD DELIMITER Fieldin tt coe eter ettet ehe aie 354 Field or Record Level Execution sissies epe asd Ai bre nic E 267 Fielde akr Oo eB OD tnit AEN woo EENE EEEE ESETE TT Chango AUTIDUOS eite teta 238 Changing DATA TYPE Vales l 241 Data hig EE 221 Deleting T M 242 Making a Field MAA aan 236 Number roO osere IC 237 Number Sequence sans tio ah RE EOT ntes 236 Screen Mode Field EOI ra 222 FILE HEADER old e epist adiecta ene iE 361 FILETRAILER Held ud dete cheats aa etaed 362 FILEGRAM HISTORY Elle andate 387 394p Filegtam MIC aser EA n epe d vdd ipea 369 376 FILEGRAM ty pe Templates ee 369p 376p 388pp 393 PUNO PATS eM 369 375p 387 Archiving Relations Penes 388 Deleting aeeie i erT ooo 396 Display Filegram Template Opina yp etos aset apa ttes iS Us 391 Generate Pile erat Opin oo o cere E PATE ree 393 Install Verify Filegram ODflOnD u i iori erepto teint 396 DastalBne aus ioa ecd sete a cad ne deen ras ue o uu nius 388 Receiving Filegrams with MailMan seen 394 Sp cifiers OPU RR A os 392 cio C 389 TEMplatES avoue tene uo pb ERN D PENA bp 387 AAA O E E 388 MEW Fileeram pO tics ede los a 395 lg E Pa aac E ean Gui Sadie E URL ctp M tU tud 327 340p 345p Creating Example ara 243 DEVICES I AREN OE ERN ET AEE TEN 341 Edit File
5. 408 January 2015 Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers Sort Qualifier Reference The following table illustrates the sort qualifiers you can use at the SORT BY prompts Qualifier Action Discussion Ifield Number entries Entries having the same value for the SORT by sort value BY field are numbered sequentially starting at one field Page break Starts a new page every time the value of the when sort value sorted field changes changes field Specify a range Lets you select entries based on this field in for output the START WITH GO TO dialogue without sorting but not sort based on the field field Subtotal within You can sub subtotal by adding a prefix of a SORT BY field to two fields in the SORT BY dialogue For example SORT BY REGION WITHIN REGION SORT BY STORE This produces subtotals for each STORE within the subtotals for each REGION field Reverse sort Only effective for NUMERIC and order DATE TIME valued fields field Suppress the Normally a subheader with the value of the printing of SORT BY field name is printed if the field is subheader not also specified as a print field January 2015 409 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers fieldjCn Set column of The number n indicates the column t
6. Modes To Switch to Press Insert Replace mode lt PF3 gt Zoom editor edit long fields lt PF1 gt Z If the first key you press upon navigating to a field is a printable character the Field Editor assumes you want to replace any existing default and replaces the entire field with the character just typed To just edit the existing field value first press an editing key such as lt ArrowLeft gt or lt ArrowRight gt Long Fields and the Zoom Editor The actual contents of a field being edited can extend beyond the confines of the visible field on a Screenman form As you use the lt ArrowLeft gt and lt ArrowRight gt keys at the left and right edges of the window you can scroll left or right to display one end or the other of the field To see and edit the entire contents of a long field at once press lt PF1 gt Z to invoke the Zoom Editor This opens an area up at the bottom of the screen providing you as much space as you need to both see and edit the entire long field WORD PROCESSING Fields To edit or display a WORD PROCESSING field press the Enter key at the WORD PROCESSING field This clears the screen and passes control to your Preferred Editor to edit the field If you do not have a Preferred Editor the Screen Editor is used When you exit the editor you return to the Screenman screen 88 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide NOTE If
7. NOTE THAT THIS FIELD S DEFINITION IS NOT EDITABLE Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Using the Screen Mode version of this option after entering the field name or number e g 01 field after the Select FIELD prompt you are presented with a Screenman form screen that can be reviewed and edited like any other In this example the most important field on this screen is the DATA TYPE field in the upper right corner it is a required entry In this example required entries in Screen Mode are indicated by a caption with a different color and an underline O NOTE Screen Mode highlights the captions for required fields with an underline However depending on your terminal or terminal emulator software and your personal preferences the form of the highlight can vary e g some emulators will highlight required field captions in reverse video a different color with an underline or any combination of highlights REF For more information on Screenman forms and Screen Mode see the Screenman chapter in the MSC Fileman User Manual In this case the DATA TYPE field has been defined as NUMERIC and is not editable as indicated by the message displayed near the bottom of the screen i e NOTE THAT THIS FIELD S DEFINITION IS NOT EDITABLE this is because a programmer has previously edited the definition in a special way However unlike the DATA TYPE field the value of the HELP PROMPT field i e Enter the Order numb
8. Your system manager 94 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Screen Editor To edit the contents of DATA Type field values of WORD PROCESSING in files you need to use a word processing editor MSC Fileman provides two standard editors e Screen Editor 6 Line Editor Your system manager may provide other editors as well Examples of Alternate Editors include LetterMan and the Extensible Editor In most cases you would want your default editor to be the Screen Editor The Screen Editor provides flexibility and freedom not provided by the Line Editor The Screen Editor provides such features as the following Full screen editing e Automatic text wrapping e Search and replace Choosing a Word processing Editor You can select any of the available editors on the system as your Preferred Editor If you select a Preferred Editor that editor will be used whenever you edit a WORD PROCESSING field If you don t choose a Preferred Editor the following defaults are used When editing WORD PROCESSING fields from scrolling mode the Line Editor is used When editing WORD PROCESSING fields from a ScreenMan form the Screen Editor is used January 2015 95 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data How to Select Your Preferred Editor To select your preferred editor perform the following procedure At any menu promp
9. 260 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 4 BAD SET U not in Set 11310003 05 FIELD 2 05 NUMBER NUMERIC 5 BAD NUMBER ABCDEF fails Input Transform 11310003 06 FIELD 2 06 LOOPY OUTPUT TRANSFORM DATE If more than one discrepancy is found between the current definition and the data on file you will be asked STORE THESE ENTRY ID S IN TEMPLATE If you identify a template name at this prompt the list of those entries containing the inconsistent data will be saved in the template Later you would be able to SORT BY the entries in this template to display or edit them e REF For information on how to execute or avoid executing any part of the INPUT transform when the Verify Fields option is being run see the Input Transform section in the Advanced File Definition chapter in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual NOTE Some parts of a field s INPUT transform whose main purpose is to validate data as a user enters it may be inappropriate when being executed in the context of the Verify Fields option Cross Reference a Field or File Traditional Cross references Types of Traditional Cross references Edit a Traditional Cross reference Create a Traditional Cross reference Delete a Traditional Cross reference January 2015 261 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data New Style Cross references Edit a New Style Cross reference Create a N
10. January 2015 89 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data 7 LT LY LD LD L9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 ET Select 7 SECONDARY MENU OPTIONS 77 Want to 7 17 Want to 7SECONDARY MENU OPTIONS XU CHECKSUM REPORT LF yay SYNONYM 7 TARA LP LA LP LD EP OP LD LI ED AD PDP EPL OLED LD EDL LD ED LPL EI LED ETELE IET Close Refresh Enter a command or followed by a caption to jump to a specific field COMMAND Close Press lt PF1 gt H for help Insert Exiting a Subpage While in a subpage your only Command Line options are CLOSE and REFRESH You cannot EXIT Quit or SAVE until you return to the parent page You can return to the parent page by pressing lt PF1 gt C or issuing the CLOSE command at the Command Line From there you can select another subrecord to edit or navigate to another field Deleting an Entry in a Multiple If a default subrecord is displayed at a Multiple field you can delete that subrecord by entering an at sign at the Multiple field You can also delete a specific subrecord by selecting that subrecord and going into the subpage and entering an at sign at the 01 field NOTE Deletions of subrecords are immediate and permanent Even if you quit the form without saving deleted subrecords are not restored to the database Adding a New Entry to a Multiple You can respond to a Multiple field
11. SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL Numeric fields with no data a null value will result by default in nothing being exported for that field For fixed record length exports this should not be a problem However if your importing application uses spaces as a delimiter you may need a printable character to be exported for null valued numeric fields If you want a character or characters such as 0 or substituted for numeric nulls put them into this field Null values for DATA TYPE field values of NUMERIC in the primary file including its Multiples will have this character exported If you want quotes in your substitute string enter two quote marks for each quote you want O NOTE Do not put anything in this field when defining a fixed length format A CAUTION There will be no substitution for null values if the field being exported is not in the primary file that is if it is reached using relational navigation DATE FORMAT The native or default format for dates varies from application to application MSC Fileman uses two formats e Internal or Storage format YYYMMDD Where Y YY is the year minus 1700 360 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide External or Default display format MON DD YYYY When data from a DATA TYPE field of DATE TIME is exported it is in the external format Since the importing application may recognize a different format you can change the exported value
12. You can also specify that KWIC separates words at most punctuation marks except quotation marks e g KING LEAR KING LEAR etc will be found with LEAR A list of punctuation marks is presented for your selection MNEMONIC The field s values are cross referenced along with the NAME 01 field cross reference so that for example the MAIDEN NAME field s values are found along with NAME values in any lookup Typically the cross reference on the NAME field is searched first when doing a lookup January 2015 263 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Cross Description reference MUMPS Those with programmer access can create special cross references by putting M code into the SET and KILL logic of a cross reference You can use the M code entered to accomplish any task that must be done when the value in a field is entered changed or deleted SOUNDEX The field s value is transformed into a four character string representing its phonetic properties That string becomes the cross reference For example soundex transformation would access GONZALEZ GONZELES Gonzales and Gonsalless as equivalents entry of any one of these forms looks up all the others automatically TRIGGER Whenever the field is updated a different field can be automatically updated at the same time W REF For more details see the Trigger Cross References chapter in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual BULLETIN
13. 1 FMPATIENT 23 A 2 FMPATIENT 23 H CHOOSE 1 2 1 TRANSFER FROM SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 H WANT TO DELETE THIS ENTRY AFTER IT S TRANSFERRED NO XES EXCUSE ME LET ME THINK ABOUT THAT A MOMENT Data values are then merged such that no pre existing values are overwritten but new values are added The DATE OF BIRTH is added since the pre existing value was null Different subentries in the TOPICS Multiple are added to the pre existing list of topics The Inquire to File Entries option shows the result NAME FMPATIENT 23 A DATE OF BIRTH 1872 SSN 000 99 9999 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY TOPICS 23 S PARADOX TOPICS PRINCIPLE OF EXCLUDED MIDDLE TOPICS SET THEORY TOPICS THEORY OF TYPES TOPICS LIAR PARADOX TOPICS AXIOM OF INFINITY The entry for FMPATIENT 23 H has been deleted Transferring Entries Between Files You can use the Transfer File Entries option to move all or a group of entries from one file to an entirely separate file To do this 1 Answer the INPUT TO WHAT FILE prompt and the TRANSFER FROM FILE prompt with different file names 2 Specify whether transferred entries should be added all as new or whether they should be merged with existing entries 3 Specify whether transferred entries should be deleted in the original file 4 Specify which entries to transfer by entering sort criteria For transfer to occur the NAME fields 01 of both files must have January 2015 29
14. FILEGRAM type templates are the only kind of template allowed in the archiving process O REF For a full description of archiving in MSC Fileman see the Error Reference source not found section Using Filegrams Here is a summary of the basic steps needed to send and install a filegram 17 The filegram sender creates a FILEGRAM type template for a specified file Create Edit Filegram Template option The Display Filegram Template option can be used to review the template 18 The sender can optionally designate specifiers with the Specifiers option These are used for matching existing entries with filegrams 19 The sender then generates a filegram for a specific entry Generate Filegram option The filegram is placed into a MailMan message The filegram sender sends this message to an individual or individuals at a remote or local destination 20 The recipient receives the Filegram with MailMan reading the mail message containing the filegram and forwarding it to S DIFG SRV 388 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide HISTORY This is a special server that loads the message into the recipient s FILEGRAM HISTORY file 11 12 and sets up the interface between MSC Fileman and MailMan on the target system 21 If you want to install the filegram on a system other than the one where you received it instead of immediately forwarding to the S DIFG SRV HISTORY server forward the message to an indivi
15. Format P string delimiter n P string delimiter n1 n2 P string delimiter Parameters string is a string expression delimiter is a character or characters or an expression yielding a character or characters that divides the string into pieces n n1 and n2 are positive integers or expressions evaluating to positive integers The function returns a part of string String is divided into substrings by delimiter In the first format the n substring is returned In the second format the substrings starting with n1 and ending with n2 are returned The delimiters between those substrings are also returned In the third format the first substring i e the one preceding the first occurrence of delimiter is returned S P FMPATIENT22 2 gt 22 P PHONE 2 3 gt 943 2109 P PHONE gt 510 R ANDOM Parameters n is a positive integer or an expression evaluating to a positive integer Use This function returns a randomly generated integer from the range of 0 through n 1 RON gt 1076 S ELECT January 2015 193 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data S test value test value expression is an expression that can be evaluated as True or False not zero or zero value is any expression that can yield a value Parameters S TORAGE Each value is associated with the test from which it is separated by a colon The function returns the eval
16. REF For more detailed information about searching and sorting see the Print How to Print Reports from Files and Search chapters in the MSC Fileman User Manual Export Example Here is an example of an export using the PATIENT TO 123 EXPORT template created in the previous section You begin by identifying the file and the EXPORT template that you want to use for the export Do not enclose the template s name with brackets Again you can delete the EXPORT template after a successful export if you want Because there is a Multiple involved you are told that you will not have the opportunity to sort Then you are given the opportunity to search the file for entries to export Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION EXPORT DATA OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter Choose an EXPORT template PATIENT TO 123 Enter Do you want to delete the PATIENT TO 123 template after the data export is complete Enter Yes or No NO Enter Since you are exporting fields from multiples a sort will be done automatically You will not have the opportunity to sort the data before export Do you want to SEARCH for entries to be exported NO YES January 2015 339 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data A SEARCH FOR PATIENT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH A CONDITION lt Enter LESS THAN A LESS THAN DATE 1980 Enter B SEARCH FOR PATIENT FIELD Enter IF A Enter DA
17. Select MSC Fileman Option OTHER Options Filegrams Audit Menu Screenman Statistics MSC Fileman Management Data Export to Foreign Format Extract Data To MSC Fileman File Import Data Browser Select Other Options Option STATistics Select STATISTICAL ROUTINE HISTOGRAM DEVICE HOME lt Enter gt SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 lt Enter gt COUNT NODE NAME BY NODE NAME ISC6AL ckckckckckckckck kc kckck ISC6A2 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk ISC6A3 kkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk ISC6A4 kkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk tesa es doces T Ho aa 8 16 24 31 39 47 55 In addition to these fields accessed directly by MSC Fileman Kernel uses the NEW PERSON file to set up MSC Fileman key variables additional NEW PERSON file fields to use to define these lo follows You can define cal variables as Internal Entry Used to set DUZ for the Number user There is no defined 001 field on the NEW 36 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide MSC File Manager 3 0 4 Used to set DUZ 0 for user ACCESS CODE A FREE TEXT field from 1 to 15 characters LANGUAGE 200 07 200 7 Used to set DUZ LANG A POINTER TO A FILE field that points to the LANGUAGE file 4 85 identifying the user s language TIMED READ 4 200 1 200 10 Used to set DTIME for the OF SECONDS user ANUMERIC field with a value of 1 to 99999 When t
18. This function returns value s value In addition the value 188 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide is placed in a local variable Variable should be namespaced to avoid conflict with other local variables You can use this function only if you have programmer s access Example SET 1 COUNT gt 1 this would put 1 into the variable COUNT M Helated Functions A SCII Format SAGE Parameters string is a string of characters or an expression yielding a string nis an integer or expression yielding an integer Use The function returns the numeric ASCII value of the character in position n within string If n is not specified the value of the first character is returned Examples A NAME 4 gt 77 NAME is SHAM SAM THE A Get the value gt 71 C HAR Parameters nis an m or an expression yielding an integer This function returns the character corresponding to the ASCII value of n If more than one n is specified in the argument a string of characters will be returned Examples C 100 gt d C 99 100 101 cde SE XTRACT January 2015 189 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Format E string n1 n2 E string n E string Parameters string is a string expression n n1 and n2 are positive integers or expressions yielding positive integers Use This function returns a substring from string If
19. arg Resets page numbering so that the page number that follows it will be arg 1 BLANK arg Causes arg number of blank lines to be inserted at this point in the text January 2015 405 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques INDENT arg Causes the text that follows it to be indented arg number of spaces from the left margin SETTAB argl arg2 arg3 Sets tab positions for the text that follows it In subsequent lines the first TAB encountered will cause indentation to column position arg1 characters from the left margin The second TABI encountered will cause indentation to column position arg2 and so on If any SETTAB arg is negative the text following the corresponding TAB will be right justified so that the rightmost column of that text will fall in the column number that is the absolute value of the SETTAB arg If a SETTAB arg is the literal C i e SETTAB C I the text following the corresponding tab setting will be centered CENTER arg Causes the arg to be centered TAB Causes the text to start printing at predetermined indents The default column settings are 5 10 15 20 which can be reset with SETTAB TAB at the end of a line causes that line to be printed as is no word wrapping 406 January 2015 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide I TAB nl Overrides any SETTAB specific
20. 1 gt Enter January 2015 233 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data After entering both VARIABLE POINTERS when you enter a single question mark at the PROVIDER field prompt you will see the following help message PROVIDER Enter one of the following S EntryName to select a Staff Provider O EntryName to select a Other Provider To see the entries in any particular file type lt Prefix gt In this example if you simply enter a name at the PROVIDER prompt then the system will search each of the VARIABLE POINTER field files for the name you have entered If a match is found the system will ask you if it is the correct entry However if you know the file the entry should be in then you can speed processing by using the following syntax to select an entry PREFIX entry name MESSAGE entry name File Name entry name O NOTE You do not need to enter the entire file name or message to direct the lookup Using the first few characters will suffice O NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of VARIABLE POINTER in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section MUMPS Data Type Those with programmer access can define a field with a DATA TYPE field value of MUMPS This MUMPS valued field is desi
21. 75 COMP index 85 XR202 index 106 H index 116 AC index 141 C index Choose E Edit D Delete C Create EDIT Which Index do you wish to edit C O NOTE The numbers displayed to the left of each cross reference are the Internal Entry Number of the cross reference stored in the INDEX file You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the New Style cross reference as shown below Number 106 EDIT AN INDEX Page 1 of 2 270 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide File 16026 Root File 16026 Index Name H Root Type INDEX FILE Short Description TEST Description wp empty Type REGULAR Activity IR Execution FIELD Alternatively this field can be null blank see Figure 173 Use LOOKUP amp SORTING COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert NOTE For additional help enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt Create a New Style Cross reference To create a New Style cross reference proceed in the following manner Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional NEW MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select Subfile lt Enter gt Current Indexes on file 16026 75 COMP index 85 XR202 index 106 H index 116 AC index
22. NAME 16026 01 FREE TEXT characters in length SEX DATE OF BIRTH 1 1 1860 AND 1963 RELIGION FILE 13 DIAGNOSIS Multiple DIAGNOSIS characters in length AGE AT ONSET Decimal Digits HISTORY PROCESSING PROVIDER FILE ORDER 6 1 16 2 SSN Social Security Number Answer must be 3 30 16026 1 16026 2 16026 3 16026 4 16026 04 01 Answer must be 3 30 16026 04 1 Type a Number between 0 and 100 O 16026 04 2 16026 42 WORD 16026 5 VARIABLE POINTER PREFIX LAYGO MESSAGE S n STAFF PROVIDER O y OTHER PROVIDER 16026 6 FREE TEXT SET m FOR MALE f FOR FEMALE DATE TYPE A DATE BETWEEN POINTER TO RELIGION 16026 04 FREE TEXT NUMBER Enter 9 numbers without January 2015 199 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data dashes The information in the data dictionary reports originated in the definition of the file and its fields O REF For a detailed explanation of the source of the information displayed by the List File Attributes option see the Creating Files and Fields section This data dictionary listing tells you that for each patient the following information may be available e A NAME that is from 3 to 30 characters long Arecorded SEX of either m MALE or f FEMALE ADATE OF BIRTH ARELIGION for a list of all valid religions we would have to consult a RELIGION file Oneor more diagnoses and for
23. TODAY or MONTH DATE OF BIRTH e REF Functions are discussed in the MSC Fileman Functions section An extended pointer reference to fields in another file O REF Extended pointers and relational jumping are described in the Relational Navigation section Operators in Computed Expressions Computed expressions can consist of a single element However often several elements are joined together using operators Operators are characters that perform some action on elements Unary Operators The simplest operators are the unary operators They force a numeric interpretation of the element that follows They can also affect the sign of the resulting number The unary operators are Positive numeric interpretation sign unchanged E Negative numeric interpretation sign changed January 2015 131 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Binary Operators Another set of operators takes two elements manipulates them and returns a result These are called binary operators You can use the following binary operators in computed expressions A bmadan SSCS Integer truncated division e g 1312 6 Concatenation e g AB CDE ABCDE Boolean Operators A third set of operators makes a comparison between two elements and returns a true or false value These are known as Boolean operators If the outcome of a Boolean operation is true the value one 1 is returned if false zero 0 is
24. YEAR YEAR Gate datexp is an expression with a date time value This function returns the year from datexp YEAR DATE OF BIRTH gt 1949 Environmental Functions BREAKABLE Formar BREAKABLEGS Parameters is a number or numeric expression with a value of 1 or This function returns nothing When used within a PRINT template this function determines whether or not lt Ctrl C gt can be used to break out of a report print If n 1 lt Ctrl C gt will break out if n 0 it will not Under default conditions lt Ctrl C gt will break you out The value of n is returned BREAKABLE 0 gt 0 lt Ctrl C gt is disabled CLOSE 172 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide CLOSE Parameters device is an open device in the form of a valid argument for an M Close command This function should only be used within MSC Fileman code when Kernel is unavailable It closes the specified device SITENUMBER e argumentless function returns your site s identifying number that was entered during MSC Fileman initialization and stored in DD SITE 1 Do not use this function to retrieve a VA Institution Station Number SITENUMBER gt 99 USER USER attribute Parameters attribute is one of these codes user s DUZ value the user s number N user s name I user s initials T user s title NN user s nickname W NOTE These codes must be surrounded by quotes
25. You can use any of the following elements in constructing a computed expression Afield name within the current file e g RELIGION The field name can be partially spelled e g REL if the partial spelling is unambiguous e A field number preceded with e g 3 Aliteral number When used as part of a computed expression do not use quotes e g AGE AT ONSET 20 However you must use quotes if the number will stand alone as a constant e g 3 14159265 e A literal text string in quotes e g HELLO e A validly formatted date such as 20 JULY 1969 which is punctuated only by spaces WY NOTE Dashes in a computed expression are interpreted as minus signs For example 7 20 1969 would indicate subtraction and be evaluated as 1982 The word NUMBER or the name of the file followed by the word 130 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide NUMBER such as PATIENT NUMBER NUMBER will return the internal entry number of the entry in the file or subfile in question The name of a file followed by the name of a field in that file e g PATIENT NAME Like PATIENT NUMBER this syntax is helpful when it is unclear to which file or subfile an expression is referring However this syntax cannot obtain data from another file NAME and PATIENT NAME will return the same data To obtain data from another file the extended pointer syntax must be used A MSC Fileman function e g
26. and the entry list is long you re asked if you want to see all the entries Besides a YES or NO response you can enter a caret followed by a string of characters to see a list of all entries beginning with the one that starts with those characters The following example shows selection of an entry starting with an alpha character Select PATIENT NAME ANSWER WITH PATIENT NAME OR SSN DO YOU WANT THE ENTIRE 1890 ENTRY PATIENT LIST S CHOOSE FROM FMPATIENT 20 FMPATIENT 21 anuary 2015 77 J y MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data FMPATIENT 22 FMPATIENT 23 UR TO STOP YOU MAY ENTER A NEW PATIENT IF YOU WISH Enter patient name in Last First Middle format 3 30 characters Select PATIENT NAME If you know the list is long and still want it to be displayed you can enter two question marks to force the display of the entire list Key Fields During a data entry session MSC Fileman checks that the combination of fields that make up a key for a record is unique for all records in the file If a single field makes up a key MSC Fileman checks for uniqueness as soon as that field is edited If more than one field makes up a key compound key MSC Fileman checks that the combination of new key field values is unique only at the end of the data entry session unless otherwise instructed by the programmer If a compound key is not unique MSC
27. prompt The same string is used within the sort dialogue You can substitute a string of your choosing by adding a semicolon and text enclosed in quotation marks For example SORT BY DATE OF BIRTH Birthdate To suppress the caption in the subheader enter two double quotes after the semicolon SORT BY DATE OF BIRTH The specified caption is also used in the subsequent sort dialogue This is useful in simplifying the sort dialogue when a field label is confusing is concatenated or is an extended pointer For example SORT BY STORE REGION Location START WITH Location FIRST Enter WITHIN Location SORT BY Enter PRINT FIELD STORE THEN PRINT FIELD Location is substituted for STORE REGION Print Qualifier Reference The following table illustrates the print qualifiers you can use at the PRINT FIELD prompts Qualifier Action Discussion January 2015 413 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers field Count The number of entries with non null values in this field are counted field All statistics Use with NUMERIC fields only Six lines of statistical output are generated for the selected field Total count mean maximum minimum and standard deviation amp field Total Use for NUMERIC fields only The values of all occurrences of this field are
28. question appears if you have selected an entry already on the list Print Selected Entries The Print Selected Entries option displays each entry from a selected archiving activity in a regular print or a filegram format depending on the template you identify The archiving activity entries are printed on whatever device you indicate You can use this option for an archiving activity with any status except PURGED The example below illustrates the regular print format Select ARCHIVE OPTION PRINT Enter SELECTED ENTRIES Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMPATIENT 2 ARCHIVING Enter regular Print Template name or fields you wish to see printed on this report of entries to be archived FIRST PRINT FIELD ZZTEST TEMPLATE CHANGE ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 11 09 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER January 2015 375 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 Shown below is an example of a Filegram format produced by naming a FILEGRAM type template to print only a single entry is shown FIRST PRINT FIELD ZZTESTFILEGRAM CHANGE ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 11 09 PAGE 1 NO 330 DAT CHANGE 16000 N CHANGE 16000 L 2330 BEGIN CHANGE 1600081 SPECIFIER VERSION 1 17 09 IDENTIFIER PROGRAMMER 7 FMPROGRAMMER 30 END CHANGE 1600
29. 141 C index January 2015 271 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Choose E Edit D Delete C Create CREATE Want to create a new Index for this file No YES Type of index REGULAR Enter Want index to be used for Lookup amp Sorting or Sorting Only LOOKUP amp SORTING Enter Index Name J Enter O NOTE The numbers displayed to the left of each cross reference are the Internal Entry Number of the cross reference stored in the INDEX file You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the New Style cross reference as shown below Number 142 EDIT AN INDEX Page 1 of 2 File 16026 Root File 16026 Index Name J Root Type INDEX FILE Short Description TEST Description wp empty Type REGULAR Activity IR Execution FIELD Alternatively this field can indicate NO RE INDEXING ALLOWED see Figure 171 Use LOOKUP amp SORTI COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert o NOTE For additional help enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt 272 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Delete a New Style Cross reference The following dialogue shows you how to delete a New Style cross reference Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type
30. 1991 TYPE A DATE BETWEEN 1 1 1860 AND DEMOG 204 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 16026 3 RELIGION 0 4 POINTER TO RELIGION FILE 13 LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 16026 4 DIAGNOSIS 1 0 Multiple 716026 04 Add New Entry without Asking STANDARD DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 2 STORED IN DIZ 16026 1 ENTRY SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX DATA NAME GLOBAL DATA ELEMENT TITLE LOCATION TYPE 16026 04 01 DIAGNOSIS 0 1 FREE TEXT Multiply asked INPUT TRANSFORM K L X gt 30 SL X lt 3 X LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 HELP PROMPT Answer must be 3 30 characters in length CROSS REFERENCE 16026 04 B 1 S DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B SE X 1 30 DA 2 K DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B SE X 1 30 DA 16026 04 1 AGE AT ONSET 0 2 NUMBER INPUT TRANSFORM K X X X gt 100 X lt 0 X E1 1N N X LAST EDITED APR 29 1991 HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 0 and 100 0 Decimal Digits 16026 04 2 HISTORY 1 0 WORD PROCESSING 16026 42 16026 5 PROVIDER 2 1 VARIABLE POINTER FILE ORDER PREFIX LAYGO MESSAGE 6 1 S n STAFF PROVIDER 16 2 O y OTHER PROVIDER January 2015 205 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 16026 6 SSN 2 2 FREE TEXT Required audited Social Security Number INPUT TRANSFORM K L X gt 9 L X lt 9 X 9N X LAST EDITED MAR 22 1991 HELP PROMPT Enter 9 numbers without dashes
31. 68 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Subfiles Multiples Sometimes a single field in a record is not enough to hold all the information required For example to keep track of the appointment history for a patient a single field would not be enough An ordinary field could only hold enough information to record a single appointment But there needs to be a way to record as many appointments as a patient has had which could range from none to several hundred In addition each appointment might have its own information that needs to be stored such as date time location doctor etc This situation is handled with what are known as Subfiles also known as Multiples Within an individual record a Subfile Multiple can be used to hold this type of information Patient Record Patient Name FMPATIENT ONE JAppointments D as Subfile Multiple Dell 000 886 3215 APPOINTMENTS Date 6 1 96 Date 6 14 96 Date 7 1 96 MARITAL STATUS MARRIED Address Time 8 00am Location 7C Doctor FMDOCTOR 555 Dunstable Parkway San Francisco CA 99999 Telephone 259 555 5432 SERVICE CONNECTED YES SERVICE ENTRY DATE amp 1 71 The fields in a Subfile in this example DATE TIME LOCATION and DOCTOR are called Subfields The word Select is always the first part of the prompt when you January 2015 69 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference
32. Abrief history of who performed the various archive steps and when they were accomplished is saved in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file e You can cancel your archiving process by using the Cancel Archival Selection option at any time before the Purge Stored Entries option is used TheFind Archived Entries option can be used to verify that the archive medium contains all the information intended to be archived The Purge Stored Entries option completely deletes data from the file being archived and from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 15 You cannot purge archived entries until you have moved selected entries to permanent storage Thus you need not worry about losing entries before they are archived 16 You cannot start a second archive from a file until you purge or cancel the existing archiving activity on that file Archiving Process including Archiving Options 1 9 The order of the options on the Archiving submenu reflects the sequence of steps in which you ordinarily do archiving Access the Archiving submenu from the Other Options submenu Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS Select OTHER OPTION ARCHIVING Select ARCHIVE OPTION ANSWER WITH ARCHIVE OPTION NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM 1 SELECT ENTRIES TO ARCHIVE ADD DELETE SELECTED ENTRIES PRINT SELECTED ENTRIES CREATE FILEGRAM ARCHIVING TEMPLATE WRITE ENTRIES TO TEMPORARY STORAGE MOVE ARCHIVED DATA TO PERMANENT STORAGE PURGE STORED ENTRIES CANCEL ARCHIVAL SELECTION FIND ARCHIVE
33. DESCRIPTION An entry is required If you do not know this patient s Social Security Number enter 000000000 to indicate the number is unknown GROUP DEMOG FILES POINTED TO FIELDS PROVIDER 6 PROVIDER 5 PERSON 16 PROVIDER 5 RELIGION 13 RELIGION 3 INPUT TEMPLATE S PRINT TEMPLATE S CAPTIONED USER 0 ZZDIAGPRINT MAR 29 1991 12 18 USER 140 Used to print information from the DIAGNOSIS multiple SORT TEMPLATE S FORM S BLOCKS S Modified Standard Format Another data dictionary format is the Modified Standard format which allows you to suppress printing the M code and to restrict the listing to specified groups of fields For example the following dialogue eliminates the M code from the 206 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Standard listing and only prints those fields in the DEMOG group NAME SEX DATE OF BIRTH and SSN Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD MODified Standard WANT THE LISTING TO INCLUDE MUMPS CODE N Enter WANT TO RESTRICT LISTING TO CERTAIN GROUPS OF FIELDS NO Y Include GROUP DEMOG And include GROUP Enter O NOTE If you answer the question concerning M code YES and do not specify any groups the output from the Modified Standard format will be the same as that of the Standard format Custom Tailored Data Dictionary The Custom Tailored format allows you to select attributes of the
34. For more information on COMPUTED fields see the COMPUTED Data Type section in the MSC Fileman Advanced User Manual FIRST PRINT FIELD CAPTIONED Include COMPUTED fields N Y R B NO Enter a code from the list Select one of the following N NO No record number IEN no Computed Fields Y Computed Fields R Record Number IEN B BOTH Computed Fields and Record Number IEN Include COMPUTED fields N Y R B NO BOTH Enter Computed Fields and Record Number IEN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Heading S C NEW PERSON LIST lt Enter gt DEVICE lt Enter gt Printing Statistics Only Totals Counts etc If you precede all of the fields that you choose for printing at the PRINT FIELD prompts with a amp or the individual field values are not printed in your report Instead you only get the requested statistics which depending on the print qualifiers and fields used can be the total count mean maximum minimum and or standard deviation January 2015 25 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Other Print Features Multiple Copies of a Print To generate more than one copy of a report you must have an output device on your system such as a spool device or a sequential disk processor SDP which stores data in a linear format If you choose to send the output to such a device at the DEVICE prompt the system prompts you as follows ENTER NUMBER OF
35. January 2015 41 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data NOT Or For truth test to be true the A condition following NOT i e single quote or dash must be false If A is false A evaluates to true OR Enter on For truth test to be true only one of IF A lt Enter gt new line the conditions that are combined OR B Enter with OR needs to be true If A is true and B is false A OR B evaluates to true For example if you just want to find all entries for which search condition A is true you would enter B SEARCH FOR FIELD Enter IF A OR Enter A more complicated search might have a number of search conditions e g A B C and D Thus for example to find all entries which either 1 satisfy both truth tests A and B or 2 do not satisfy truth test C but satisfy truth test D you could combine search conditions as follows E SEARCH FOR FIELD Enter IF A amp B OR C amp D OR Enter In the example above the logic says if A and B or if not C but D Format Output The remaining steps to finish your search are to choose your sorting criteria same as with printing and to choose the fields to print for each matched entry also the same as with the printing A complete search entering search conditions combining search conditions and finishing the search is shown below 42 January 2015 Part 1 Re
36. MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data expression IN lt file gt FILE lt field gt The expression or lookup value has several possible forms One way to refer to the field is by entry name To retrieve text from the WORD PROCESSING PROGNOSIS field of the entry Angina Pectoris in a file named DIAGNOSES you could enter the following EDIT Option T Enter ransfer incoming text after line 1 From what text Select another entry in this file OR use relational syntax to pick up information from a word processing field in another file ex VALUE FILE NAME WORD PROCESSING FIELD NAME Do you want the entire TEST list Enter Yes or No From what text Angina Pectoris DIAGNOSES PROGNOSIS From line 1 Enter thru 20 ARE YOU SURE NO Y Enter YES Alternately you can use the second syntax to retrieve the same field in the same file entry EDIT Option T Enter ransfer incoming text after line 4 From what text Angina Pectoris IN DIAGNOSIS FILE PROGNOSIS From line 1 Enter thru 20 ARE YOU SURE NO Y Enter YES The requested text is identified by the value of the 01 field in quotes Angina Pectoris Thus in this example the lt expression gt is the entry s name You also specify which lines you want to transfer If you enter a single question mark at the From line prompt you can list the current numb
37. PRIMARY KEY or Specifier field One set of all the prompts makes one request The matching process is dependent on the presence or absence of an index on the archive file or tape The matching process for archive files or tapes with no index can be more time consuming since it has to read the entire archived file to determine all matches The matching process finds a match when the values of all the answered prompts match with that of an archived entry If a partial value is typed at any prompt the matching January 2015 383 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data process finds all matches that begin with the partial value for that particular prompt See the following dialogue for finding archived entries Select ARCHIVE OPTION FIND ARCHIVED ENTRIES This option will scan your archived file and will attempt to retrieve entries that match the name 01 field and or the identifier field s of the archived file Magnetic tapes should be opened with variable length records SEQUENTIAL ARCHIVE DEVICE HFS DISK FILE HOST FILE NAME TMP TMP ARC DAT You are reading archived information from the CHANGE file Do you want to continue YES Enter Multiple requests may be made One set of all prompts makes one request This archived file contains an index of all archived entries Do you want to see the index now YES Enter NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 2
38. TAOS dir m E 341 353 358 How Data is Moved Between Applications sse 327 HOW d Export Pci ETE 330 Import Dit a a AEE E AR 345 Navigate With a Variable Pointer Field sess 150 o cieie anere a E E i E SE s 274 377 January 2015 425 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Index Iclenttfier A b t pU A tint etra 274p Indportand Export Io0l8 ote mec f reto eese ascen 326 Import Data OPONE d dope tn uh 346 IMPORT Templates oce eor nep RP FOR cae 347 349 TRAP ODE TON tH m 326p 345 351 Importing Dita editora tuse da Completeness of Subfile Brie vcs it peti PnPLA Vetter 352 Field Selection PAGE IMPORT Template eee 347 POr PON aa nu dopo dit ac ut optet Agent doter ed tede 346 From VMS Pl utere eee cot EC A E voa td 353 ao gae Mr 346 A ntt oret etico su uri od esie 347 TOU M RE 345 A o 346 vieron 347 DIepuL oed abite qe nt ere ha e AERIS bd nai tM 349 VA Pile Mati Pile s ier io etre tendis fcio fed M taret b eade 347 INDEX a e teat cats ye etal ape tek tated adios tun ac aces teles qu 268 270 272 INPUT Templates iates venite vere weiner a Bratchine NN ose quo opus aids ogni tre nette Se pares Ub edu Dubai o 400 INPUT Templates dla 157pp 267 400 INPUT TEGBSFOBITIG A AAA S ADA OV ULE AN ste oe A 278 Inquire to File Entries Option 292p 311p 315
39. The following is an example of a computed expression containing several elements and operators Beds occupied NUMBER OF BEDS OCCUPANCY PERCENTAGE 100 First the part within the parentheses is evaluated NUMBER OF BEDS and OCCUPANCY PERCENTAGE are field names Their contents are January 2015 133 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data multiplied and the result is divided by 100 That result is concatenated with the literal string Beds occupied giving a result like Beds occupied 484 Data Types in Computed Expressions When you are working with file data in computed expressions you must consider the appropriateness of the DATA TYPE field value for the operation or function you are using Here are some notes regarding data types and computed expressions SET OF CODES POINTER TO A FILE and VARIABLE POINTER Data Types These data types are manipulated using the external representations not the internal ones The internal value can be accessed using the INTERNAL function DATE TIME Data Type The DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME usually yields results based on the internal value of the field when used in a computed expression For example the computed expression DATE OF BIRTH _DOB where DOB is a field with a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME yields DATE OF BIRTH 2910713 where 2910713 is the internal representation of the date Often you do not want the inte
40. USER prompt For SORT templates you can also use the first screen of the Template Edit option to associate a particular PRINT template with a SORT template Thus whenever that SORT template is invoked in the Print File Entries option the associated PRINT template will be used by default with ro FIRST PRINT FIELD prompt being displayed to the user Select Utility Functions Option TEMPLATE Edit MODIFY WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter Select TEMPLATE File SORT template Select SORT TEMPLATE XUUFAA Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the template as shown below TEMPLATE NAME XUUFAA DATE LAST MODIFIED JUL 1 2007 DATE LAST USED JAN 29 2013 READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS USER f MONA DESCRIPTION PRINT TEMPLATE XUUFAA 126 January 2015 Part 3 Templates MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Sort Fields on Next Page Exit Save Next Page Refresh LAS Enter a command or specific field followed by a caption to jump to a COMMAND N44 Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Editing SORT template fields is particularly tricky however most SORT templates have only three or so sort levels Here is an example of the second screen of a SORT template using the Template Edit option Editing Sort Template XUUFAA INSERT lt
41. Whenever a field is updated a MailMan message is sent notifying specified users that an update has occurred The Bulletin cross reference is only available when MSC Fileman is installed with MailMan Edit a Traditional Cross reference To edit a Traditional cross reference identify the field or subfield you wish to edit MSC Fileman will display the type of cross references on the field and offer you the choices of Edit Delete or Create Select Edit at this prompt and you will have the opportunity to edit or add a No Deletion message and to enter a description of the cross reference Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional 264 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select FIELD 01 Enter NAME CURRENT CROSS REFERENCE IS REGULAR B INDEX OF FILE Choose E Edit D Delete C Create E NO DELETION MESSAGE NO DON T DELETE THIS X REF This FREE TEXT message indicates that the cross reference cannot be deleted As long as a message is retained the cross reference cannot be deleted The user will see this message whenever an attempt is made to delete the cross reference DESCRIPTION 1 gt Used for look up on and sorting by name 2 gt lt Enter gt The description appears in a standard DD
42. and one as the forced default value for the BENEFICIARY input field BENEFICIARY is a Boolean true false computed expression that means The BENEFICIARY value equals null January 2015 143 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data After the previous dialogue the names of such patients would be printed out and their BENEFICIARY value would automatically be set equal to their NEXT OF KIN field value concatenated with a space followed by UNVERIFIED OUTPUT Transforms OUTPUT transforms change the way a field is displayed when printed Frequently the OUTPUT transform will contain a computed expression that alters the data stored internally in the field A simple OUTPUT transform that converts the internally stored date into MM DD YY format is DATE OF BIRTH OUTPUT TRANSFORM NUMDATE DATE OF BIRTH If an OUTPUT transform is applied to a field the result of the transform will be used if that field is used in another computed expression For example if DATE OF BIRTH is used in a PRINT template the transformed value will be output THEN PRINT FIELD NAME S BIRTHDAY DATE OF BIRTH The result of this computed expression would be similar to ONE FMPATIENT S BIRTHDAY 03 07 42 Word Processing Windows When entering text into a DATA TYPE field with a value of WORD PROCESSING you can insert a computed expression within a Window This expression will
43. option FIELD DELIMITER Many applications can import and export data if the values of fields in each record are separated by a known character or sequence of characters The application puts or expects data before the first delimiter into its first field between the first and second delimiter into the second field and so on Therefore the ability to specify and recognize these field delimiters is a crucial aspect of many data exchanges The Import and Export Tools FIELD DELIMITER fields allow you to 354 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide specify up to 15 characters to be placed between each field You can directly enter any string of characters except ones that begin with a number or consist of characters that have special meaning when editing MSC Fileman data e g or If your field delimiter begins with one of these restricted characters or consists of an unprintable control character like TAB you can enter the ASCII value of the delimiter When entering the ASCII values always use three digits Thus TAB ASCII 9 becomes 009 and ASCII 64 becomes 064 You can enter up to four ASCII values If more than one is needed separate the values with commas e g 048 094 If you want the user to be prompted for a field delimiter at the time the EXPORT template is being created enter ASK in this field CAUTION Using unprintable control characters ASCII value
44. 0 00 02 In this example six records were added and one record was not added The record that was not added was the fourth record in the source file It failed due to the misspelled value Illlinois being rejected by the STATE field in the NEW PERSON file 4200 Importing Data Into Multiples CAUTION Incoming Data Should rot be Flattened The Import Tool expects that any data bound for a Multiple be contained in the same import record line of data as the data for the top file level This is different from the output of the Export Tool which flattens exported data from Multiples into separate lines of output For example consider a comma delimited import of records each including a name plus four subentries Each subentry contains a DATE and January 2015 351 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data a TYPE The records will be imported into a file with a top level NAME field 2 01 and a Multiple with DATE field 4 01 and TYPE field 1 For this import you would choose the destination fields as follows FIELD SELECTION FOR IMPORT Page 2 Choose a field from PATIENT DATE Subfile Field Delete last field selected These are the fields selected so far NAME DATE DATE DATE TYPE DATE DATE DATE TYPE DATE DATE DATE TYPE DATE DATE DATE TYPE Q0 00 1 OY Ul i Q0 IND I Exit Save Next Page Refresh F Enter a command or specific field follo
45. 326 What Applications Can You Exchange Data With s 326 How Data is Moved between Applications sese 327 Dependency on Correct Data Communication sse 327 IB ic Boer c 328 How to Export Data Ddiatusas ibtiatati d oci us ee int 330 Export Exatple steuert A ae eas 339 Sp cial Considerations Exporting INumbets oid dido 342 Special Considerations Multiples scene ads paa 343 About EXPORT Templates iii 344 How to Import Data caray aesti entes eerta Elogia oae sueco aban eae 345 Foreign LOMAS Quero battu E E tied AN t 353 A aestatem O en daar Men Renee 369 Considerations Before Archiving essen 369 Archiving Process including Archiving Options 1 9 371 Filegrams etat tpe TO E 387 FILEGRAM type emplaleg cesa pode dc 387 Filegram and Archiving Relationship sss 388 Using Filegrams eee ee etr etes ee reris saute a ey 388 PUGS PAIN Steps MI RN 389 Appendix Advanced Edit Techniques cuire tM eene bo a 398 Field Value Stuffing ies 398 INEU adiri c 400 Text Formatting in Word Processing Fields esses 403 Appendix A Sort and Print Oualifiets eene envied cheats 409 Sort Qualifier Reference ccccccccccccsssscceesessecceesssaceccesaceeccesseececcssssseeceessnseeeesenaes 409 Print Qualitier Referetic
46. 374 385 391 404 Install Verify Ellegram ODpEOFPs eor tii 389 396 Internal Entry INUTRDOR oido 237p J in Extended P te runana re cte ed a a A e Cab re EU Relational INayIgauobi soudure eee 155 o AAA A A 156 KERM TS a 341 Key Definito seare oE iS oa eve viue oA n re EA BER Sid uli Ed Mm 284 IBI MX E 286 Edit a Rey os ein ede en a Od ee AM in a teamed 286 Verify c 287 KEY INTEGRITY ii 287 426 January 2015 Index MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Key SUP PO D Mo A dei te daten datiuo aded eto it 270 IWWAIG CrOSSSI eferetiGes ia Dio daa 263 EANCGUAGE Ple ENG Na eer E do aes 37 I vut Rp uu EUR 231 Line Editor s Transfer OPI dedos ect radars tuners beca eor inia dees 157 List File Attribute Si nest ra REP a E tua tenA treu 197 Brief Data DICUOBdPEy dd 198 Check Enc DD Structure Op HOM sass acta oerte pee RR Meine ttis 214 Condensed Data Dielobary o opea ee ati wet ebd 200 Custom Tailored Data Dicho ias 207 Global Map e Miiller t nbn denote a tee mecca ete ciel tle 210 Indexes and Cross References Only ee o eite ien pit it 211 Keys ONIY e E ach acta a Gabo id a e E 212 Map Pointer Relations OPI da in cti emet ashes etie sse 212 Standard and Modified Standard Data Dictionaries 203 Templates Only Format eese n con septo nec redet beret etse ttt eis 210 List File Attributes O Put 197 200 203 Lookup POD Pi mide rA ect apie nea tate AAA A E HOSS PE
47. 6 APR 13 1987 DESCRIPTION 11 wp January 2015 395 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data This change enables incredibly wonderful things to occur REPORTER 5 L FMPATIENT 10 BEGIN REPORTER 1001 0582 END REPORTER 1001 05 REPORTER 01 FMPATIENT 10 SEND DAT Install Verify Filegram Option The filegram recipient uses the Install Verify Filegram option to install a filegram from a MailMan message into a file on the target system Choose a filegram history by entering its date time or by using a lt Spacebar gt lt Enter gt for the last used history at the Select FILEGRAM HISTORY prompt The destination file for the filegram entry must be in place on the target system for a successful installation CAUTION The installation will more likely succeed if the destination file is a replica of the sending file The message DONE is displayed if the install was successful If not successful an UNSUCCESSFUL INSTALLATION message is returned with an error code e REF For a list of error codes identifying their meaning see the DIFG section in the Filegrams API chapter in the Other APIs section in the MSC Fileman APIs Manual Deleting a Filegram Delete a filegram by removing the filegram s entry from the FILEGRAM HISTORY file 1 12 As shown in the following dialogue use the Enter or Edit File Entries option Enter the at sign O at the DATE TIME prompt of the filegram hi
48. COPIES 4 OUTPUT COPIES TO DEVICE PRINTER In this example you are asking to print four copies to the device called PRINTER You must be using MSC Fileman with Kernel or with a device handler similar to Kernel s to produce multiple copies If you exceed the maximum spool lines allowed you as defined in the KERNEL SYSTEM PARAMETERS file 8989 3 your report will be stopped Report Headings The heading in a report is what is printed at the top of each report page Ordinarily there is a heading report title date of report time of report page number and column headers field titles for fields in the output as shown below PATIENT LIST JUL 19 1996 14 49 PAGE 1 SSN NAME You can customize the report heading when you print If you ask for help at the Heading S C prompt MSC Fileman displays the following instructions Heading S C PATIENT LIST 26 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide There are two different options 1 Accept the default heading or enter a custom heading For no heading at all type To use a Print Template for the heading type TEMPLATE NAME 2 Replace the default heading with S to Suppress the heading when there are no records to print and or C to print sort Criteria in the heading If S and or C is entered the heading prompt will re appear Heading S C PATIENT LIST CS Suppress the heading wh
49. Choose the editor to which you wish to switch Screen Editor Screen The Screen Editor display consists of a status bar at the top and a ruler at the bottom Between the two status bars is the area where you create and edit text as shown below January 2015 97 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Wrap Mode is set on WRAP INSERT Insert Mode is set on Name of WORD PROCESSING field being edited lt PF1 gt H HELP lt F1 gt H displays help on all Screen Editor commands This is the area where text can be entered Tab stops T Location of left margin lt L Tz T2 T 2 T T 2 T T T 2 T T Scr 1 of 52 The bottom line with current screen line and column numbers is ordinarily hidden lt F1 gt toggles display of this line Ln 1 of 977 If you enter lt PF1 gt H at any time in the Screen Editor you can get online help that lists all the available commands At any time while entering text using the Screen Editor you can select a command For example at any time you can change your left margin move to a different screen save your document or get online help To invoke most commands you need to enter only two keystrokes the lt PF1 gt key and a character key such as D for delete line You ll usually find the lt PF gt keys at the
50. DATA TYPE field value as FREE TEXT you are asked the following questions Select FIELD DIAGNOSIS Are you adding DIAGNOSIS as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF DIAGNOSIS FREE TEXT MINIMUM LENGTH 3 MAXIMUM LENGTH 30 OPTIONAL PATTERN MATCH IN X Enter The PATTERN MATCH is written in M code If input data violates the PATTERN MATCH or the Minimum Maximum lengths the data is not accepted and the user is shown the help prompt information WILL DIAGNOSIS FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Y IS DIAGNOSIS ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter SHOULD USER SEE AN ADDING A NEW DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE FOR NEW ENTRIES Y N N HAVING ENTERED OR EDITED ONE DIAGNOSIS SHOULD USER BE ASKED ANOTHER Y N Y With these specifications the user is not given a confirming message when new subentries are added to the Multiple The user is allowed to enter several diagnoses in a row for a given patient January 2015 227 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data HELP PROMPT Answer must be 3 30 characters in length Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter A default help prompt is automatically written for you with the DATA TYPE field value of FREE TEXT You can change this prompt using the Replace With syntax O NOTE This help information is displayed when the user inputs a single question mark when editing this field o NOTE You can review and change a file s fie
51. Do Not Ask Users to Confirm Their Entry Selection If you want users who select an entry in a file for any lookup purpose to confirm their entry selection by answering positively at the OK prompt answer YES at the ASK OK WHEN LOOKING UP AN ENTRY prompt If you do not want users to confirm their entry selection answer NO at the ASK OK WHEN LOOKING UP AN ENTRY prompt The default is NO TIP Use this feature on files containing many similar or confusingly named entries e g files for drugs Enter a File Screen A line of MUMPS code can be entered here It should set the T switch TRUE or FALSE At the time of execution Y is the number of a File entry which we want to FILTER for lookup Thus this code is a permanent DIC S for the File iB Misuse of this can disenable the file For example this is the file screen for the NEW PERSON file I 5CR200 XUSER Enter or Edit a Post Selection Action only available when you have programmer access If you have programmer access you can write M code for a Post Selection Action for entries in this file W REF Post Selection Action is explained in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual Enter a Lookup Routine only available when you have programmer access If you have programmer access you also can enter an existing lookup routine To do this enter a routine namespace from three to six characters no at the LOOK UP PROGRAM prompt The name you choose for the
52. ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Y HELP PROMPT TYPE A DATE BETWEEN 1 1 1860 AND 1963 Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter A default help prompt is automatically written for you with the DATA TYPE field of DATE TIME You can change this prompt using the Replace With syntax e NOTE This help information is displayed when the user inputs a single question mark when editing this field O NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode 224 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value as DATE TIME in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section NUMERIC Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as NUMERIC requires you to enter the lowest and highest values allowed the maximum number of decimal digits allowed and to state whether dollar values are allowed e g 33 For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as NUMERIC you are asked the following questions Select FIELD AGE AT ONSET Are you adding AGE AT ONSET as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF AGE AT ONSET NUMERIC INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND O INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND 100 IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT Y N NO Enter If you answer YES at the IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT Y N prompt MSC Fileman would allow users to precede input data with a dollar si
53. Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data instead of choosing the Edit a Line Replace With __ option and entering the line number just enter the line number instead You are taken directly to the line you specify and then given the Replace prompt to edit the line EDIT Option 5 5 gt was the time of the day that I wnet over to Building 8 and Replace wnet With went Replace Enter was the time of the day that I went over to Building 8 and Edit line Replace With Edits Be Careful When editing individual lines you make changes using the Replace With dialogue where you enter an existing string in the line and a new string to replace it with Be careful as you enter your responses to the Replace and With prompts Enter enough letters to ensure that the computer replaces the desired string of characters Here s why this issue is so important In one line you may have two identical words or you may have two identical sets of characters embedded Since the computer changes only the first occurrence of any series of letters that you enter review your line carefully before responding to the Replace prompt Then enter enough identifying characters to correct the specific word or characters you wish to change Let s look at an incorrect entry to illustrate the point In the example that follows you need to change the sentence in the second line from This example is sampl
54. GERMAN GMH 4 GERMAN OLD HIGH CA 750 1050 OLD HIGH GERMAN GOH 5 GERMAN SWISS SWISS GERMAN GSW CHOOSE 1 5 1 GERMAN DE DEU DEVICE HOME lt Enter gt TELNET LANGUAGE GERMAN FILE 84 DIALOG 820 820 LANGUAGE 77003 7003 LANGUAGE FILE 200 NEW PERSON 31 USER THIRTYONE LANGUAGE FILE 999991 ZZD TEST FILE1 22 SECOND ENTRY LANGUAGE POINTER January 2015 217 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data 218 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Creating Files and Fields Creating a File To create a new file use the Modify File Attributes option and enter the new file name from 3 to 45 characters in length when asked MODIFY WHAT FILE And respond with YES when asked Are you adding xxxxxxxx as a new FILE where xxxxxxxx represents the new file name Naming a New File File names should be chosen so that they can easily be distinguished from each other P WHAT FILE ENT CLINIC PATIENT TIP If different people are creating files it can be helpful to include their initials nicknames or other identifying phrases within the file name O NOTE The name for your new file should not contain any arithmetic or string operators like _ or punctuation like a colon An internal number must be assigned to this new file You are prompted with the next available internal file number You can either s
55. If an EXPORT template see the next step has been created based on the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template that you edit the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template will not be updated to reflect the changes You must create a new SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template to make use of the changes Create Export Template Option The next step to export data is to create an EXPORT template with the Create Export Template option The EXPORT template combines the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template created in Step 2 above with a FOREIGN FORMAT see Step 1 above Besides choosing a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template and a FOREIGN FORMAT you will be asked for any additional information that is needed to fully define the export If you do not supply the requested information the EXPORT template cannot be created Values in the FOREIGN FORMAT entry you choose determine whether or not you will be prompted for more information The following table indicates which values for which FOREIGN FORMAT fields will result in prompts Foreign Format Value Information Required Field FIELD ASK The character or characters to separate fields DELIMITER January 2015 335 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Foreign Format Value Information Required Field RECORD ASK The character or characters to separate records DELIMITER 1 or The number of characters in each field to be exported The name of each field recognized by the importi
56. Moving Data The entries will be deleted in INTERNAL NUMBER order lt lt 4 ENTRIES PURGED gt gt As you can see entering a YES response to the Are you sure you want to continue NO prompt deletes the entries immediately Cancel Extract Selection Option 8 of 9 You can cancel an extract activity any time before the entries are purged by using the Cancel Extract Selection option If the extract activity status is UPDATED DESTINATION FILE meaning the entries have already been moved to the destination file you ll see a warning notice At this point you can roll back or delete the new entries that were created while using the Update Destination File option After you have canceled an extract activity MSC Fileman deletes the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file reference to the extract activity In addition you will once again be able to gain access to all of those source entries that MSC Fileman locked during the update of your destination file If you wish to extract data without purging the source entries cancel the extract activity to unlock the selected entries in the source file You will encounter the following dialogue while canceling an extract activity Select EXTRACT OPTION CANCEL EXTRACT SELECTION Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY CHANGE Enter 3 CHANGE 08 31 92 UPDATED DESTINATION FILE SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Are you sure you want to CANCEL this EXTRACT ACTIVITY NO Enter YES to stop this activity and
57. ODEOE oodd dicte lia 214p Code to Kill the Entire Index iiio co hio Cuire ANC m 267 Mollis a RD Le CIOSSSTO OP Ne 268 Commands em TVG Mess C tae 353 Compare Merge File Entries Option see 290 296 298 301 Comparing Ente sido aeger erdt nanan sesso vin dina ld sd afar 296 Compoubtd Cross referenceS aliada laa 266 Computed 3i o Rover Rive edendo wear eo ntt eT SPE POT Expression A N 130 Compound Example tada 133 Dita PES AAA AA AAA 134 A A Tm 130 Field Value Stuffing p 143 Onhe M iz nee a aO ee A E OOTO 141 dci iseer P 131 OUTPUT Transform Si a 144 VIAN taa oed dnas AA A AO AA E 130 Using Functions as EIeGHielilss reet deesse ios e derentatiea dass 155 Vere to Usadas 136 Word Processing WIBOOWS ion betae std ene pate ie edet po 144 Values C M Sa es at crt ae A atc stu sut ud ntu tdt 268 COMPUTED EI dS vincit en iie pedir een biete atte e ne nit platte tie Relational Nvidia 149 copy and paste from Bro Wwsebliisid ida 52 Create Export Template OpHOn i sind Jani aay e ebrii ees 335 Create Extract Template Opt On se siad cebat eia er Ol ode idet n rct 318 Create Filegram Archiving Template Option sese 376 420 January 2015 Index MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Create Edit Filegram Template Option eere 388p CFE LEN C
58. ODPBOB dd tuns dragon a ns 278 FOREIGN FORMAT FAL nia E 331 354 424 January 2015 Index MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ins de 341 353 NEW PERSON 2200 Raros a 253 351 ORDER LOO iei eaen ran cedi E EA S 245pp 249 251pp 257 PRINT TEMPLATE FDA dia 344 358 PRINT TEMPLATE Pile HA ara adds 334 REETCION GA Shaina ds iii 334 A O 259 VMS NI RD 341 Find Archived Entries Opos pe bets eat ibd 371 381 383 Find Archived Records OPA 369 Fixed Length Data Fortis 329 Forced Lookups Using Numbers ii 238 FOREIGN FIELD NAMES Field 5i nte iege aida 358 FOREIGN FORMAT Plena 335 362p 366 FOREIGN FORMAT fle PAA 3 oie eret aN dei salada Field Values ienie na A EAEE EEA fn nic ec EE RUE ERN Exportiti Dalarnas orti Soter eds ndr Sidera Va Rit fait S ad Lee 335 FOREIGN FORMAT Pile 9 44 bora actae tatete os RR PORE 331p 354 FOREIGN FORMAT Pile FAO scrape Fields sm a ce gh Seite uate dos wa alt it wad A aaa 353 Foreign POLA triada 353 Formatting Text with Word Processing Windows sse luci m tik 404 FUNCTION PG ua ot tad te utate dated Une aves 135 162 230 Generate Filegram ODpLHOft rio 388 393 HES DIC VAC m tio 341 TE TIS TOR RAI oed e ptt eroe e ds det EEE a asa la e eden o e imer deas COATT OPS cae o A cra o eti os 35 siiis 35
59. PF1 gt C Available only on popup pages Closes the current page and returns you to the parent page none lt PF1 gt Q Quit the form discarding changes 86 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide NOTE On a popup page your only Command Line options are CLOSE and REFRESH Editing How to Edit Fields The following charts list the key sequences for Screenman s Field Editor the editor that allows you to edit data fields on a Screenman Form Cursor Movement To Move Press Right one character lt ArrowRight gt Left one character lt ArrowLeft gt Right one word lt Ctrl L gt or lt PF1 gt lt Spacebar gt Left one word lt Ctrl J gt Right edge of window lt PF1 gt lt ArrowRight gt Left edge of window lt PF1 gt lt ArrowLeft gt End of field lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowRight gt Beginning of field lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowLeft gt Deletion To Delete Press Character under cursor lt PF2 gt or lt Delete gt or lt Remove gt Character left of cursor lt Backspace gt From cursor to end of word lt Ctrl W gt From cursor to end of field lt PF1 gt lt PF2 gt January 2015 87 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Delete entire field Restore last edit lt PF1 gt D or lt Ctrl U gt Restore default
60. Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide You are most likely to come across COMPUTED field types when printing with the CAPTIONED PRINT template Choosing the CAPTIONED OUTPUT template automatically outputs all normal fields containing data for each entry in a report However you must choose whether you want COMPUTED fields included in the output as well STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT Yes Enter Yes Include COMPUTED fields N Y R B NO Enter a code from the list Select one of the following N NO No record number IEN no Computed Fields Y Computed Fields R Record Number IEN B BOTH Computed Fields and Record Number IEN For more information on CAPTIONED OUTPUT see the Inquire and Print chapters of this manual POINTER TO A FILE Fields A DATA TYPE field value of POINTER TO A FILE is a field that directs the computer to another file for information If you are working in the PATIENT file 4200 for example and you ve reached a field that asks for the patient s STATE the field is probably a POINTER TO A FILE field that points to the STATE file 5 Because of pointers such commonly used information as states can be stored in a single STATE file 5 Then every file e g PATIENT VENDOR INSURANCE etc that needs to record a value for STATE can use a POINTER TO A FILE field to the STATE file 5 to store that information For example If the
61. Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide and other ANSI terminals you can avoid this last problem by turning wraparound mode off CAUTION When exporting data to your terminal s screen there will be no page breaks Therefore there is no graceful way to interrupt the export once it has begun Sending Export Data to a Host File Having data printed on screen is of little use if you are using a terminal with no screen capture capabilities An alternative is to send the data to a file on the host system for example to a VMS file if you are using DSM Another advantage to sending data to a Host file is that only the exported data will be in the file Often screen captures will unavoidably contain extraneous parts of the user s dialogue prior to or after the export To export your data to a file at the DEVICE prompt send your export output to an HFS type device Your IRM should be able to help you if you are not sure how to use HFS devices The Kernel Systems Manual also describes how to send output to Host files including how to set up and use HFS type devices When a Host file is created you must move that ASCII file to the computer on which the importing application resides A file transfer protocol such as KERMIT or XMODEM can be used to move this file The export can be queued if it is not sent to the screen Queuing the export is recommended for large files and for complex sorts of the data O NOTE O
62. Qualifier Reference As well as entering fields to sort by you can also enter formatting controls in the SORT BY dialogue A complete list of sort qualifiers is included in the Appendix to this manual Saving Sort Criteria SORT Templates 18 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide You can save your sort criteria in a SORT template This lets you reuse the same sorting instructions in future prints from the current file PRINT templates are stored in the SORT TEMPLATE file 4 401 If you sort by more than three fields you are asked whether you want to store your sort criteria in a SORT template Select MSC Fileman Option PRINT Enter File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter SORT BY NAME ZIP CODE START WITH ZIP CODE FIRST Enter WITHIN ZIP CODE SORT BY CITY 1 CITY 2 CITY CIVIL 3 CITY VA CHOOSE 1 3 1 lt Enter gt CITY START WITH CITY FIRST lt Enter gt WITHIN CITY SORT BY NAME 1 NAME 2 NAME COMPONENTS 3 NAME ORDER CHOOSE 1 3 1 lt Enter gt NAME START WITH NAME FIRST lt Enter gt WITHIN NAME SORT BY lt Enter gt STORE IN SORT TEMPLATE ADDRESS LIST Are you adding ADDRESS LIST as a new SORT TEMPLATE No Y lt Enter gt Yes DESCRIPTION No existing text Edit NO YES WRAP INSERT lt DESCRIPTION gt lt PF1 gt H Help Template for address listing FIRST PRINT FIELD Forcing Creation of a S
63. Stored Entries option occurs You are warned if the archiving activity has already been moved to permanent storage When you cancel an archiving activity the entry in the ARCHIVAL 382 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ACTIVITY file is deleted Also entries that were locked after being moved to temporary storage can again be read and edited See the following dialogue for canceling an archival activity Select ARCHIVE OPTION CANCEL ARCHIVAL SELECTION Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY CHANGE Enter 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING Are you sure you want to CANCEL this ARCHIVING ACTIVITY NO YES gt gt gt DONE lt lt lt Find Archived Entries The Find Archived Entries option scans an archive file and retrieves an archive entry or entries that matches the NAME field 01 and or the PRIMARY KEY and or Identifier field s of the requested entry On the prompts for lookup values and on the resulting report PRIMARY KEY and Identifier fields are both called Identifiers The information contained in the archived entry is printed in CAPTIONED format field name field number value This option should only be used with tapes or files archived under MSC Fileman 19 0 or later NOTE The PRIMARY KEY is available as of MSC Fileman 22 0 Several requests for archived entries can be made at a time An id next to a prompt indicates an Identifier
64. TEMPLATE instead of EXTRACT TEMPLATE in the dialogue For each extract field that you identify in the source file at the MAP TO field prompt enter the destination file field name or field 318 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide number that will receive the data Only those fields defined in the EXTRACT template will appear in the destination file Keep in mind that the value of each field in an extracted record is tested against the INPUT transform of its destination field If any value fails its destination field s INPUT transform the extract for the entire record will fail Make sure the INPUT transforms on the destination fields are appropriate for the data you will be extracting O NOTE If you are extracting a Subrecord using the EXTRACT DIAXU entry point and its FILING LEVEL parameter and a value fails the INPUT transform only the extract of the Subrecord will fail When you arrive at the STORE EXTRACT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE prompt enter the name that you wish to assign to your new EXTRACT template To edit an existing EXTRACT template on the other hand simply enter its name at the FIRST EXTRACT FIELD prompt using the following format Extract templatename Here is a sample of the dialogue that you will encounter when you are ready to build an EXTRACT template Select EXTRACT OPTION CREATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE This option lets you build a template where you sp
65. TEST EMPLOYER B 2 MAR 1 1969 TEST EMPLOYER C 3 APR 1 1972 TEST EMPLOYER D 4 MAY 1 1976 TEST EMPLOYER E 5 January 2015 91 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Exit Save Next Page Refresh F Enter a command or specific field followed by a caption to jump to a COMMAND Close Press lt PF1 gt H for help Insert You can always navigate to a blank line below the end of the list At this blank line you can add a new subrecord if LAYGO is allowed or jump to an existing subrecord by entering its name Navigational Keys for Repeating Blocks To Press Scroll through the list lt ArrowUp gt and lt ArrowDown gt Page down through the list lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt or lt PageDown gt Page up through the list lt PF1 gt lt ArrowUp gt or lt PageUp gt Jump to the blank line at end of list Enter in a non blank line Jump to the Command line A lt Enter gt at the end of the list Details How to File Edits In general the database is unaffected while you edit a record in a Screenman form Changes are filed only at your request when you SAVE or EXIT Before filing Screenman checks that 92 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Required fields on all pages that can be accessed via the next and previous page links have values even if you have not accessed th
66. This data format must be set up in advance as an entry in the FOREIGN FORMAT file 1 44 The following are the major format parameters stored in a FOREIGN FORMAT file 4 44 entry 9 What delimiters are used between fields 10 Does the export use fixed length fields 11 What headers to output before the body of the data and what footers after the data 12 Any special formatting for specific DATA TYPE field values e g dates and numbers Some formats are already set up in advance in the FOREIGN FORMAT file 1 44 targeted towards specific foreign applications These include 10 Word Data File Comma 11 Excel Comma 12 Excel Tab 13 1 2 3 Import Numbers January 2015 331 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data 14 1 2 3 Data Parse 15 Oracle Delimited Keep in mind that applications are often updated A format that worked for one version may not work for a different version or a more efficient simpler format might be possible for a different version REF The full details of the export parameters that can be set up for exporting are described in the FOREIGN FORMAT File Attributes Reference section In many cases you will be able to use an existing FOREIGN FORMAT file 44 entry for your export If you need to create a new FOREIGN FORMAT file entry rather than using an existing entry set up the new entry with the Define Foreign File Format option Select Fields for Export Option I
67. a destination file that will store archived data set the 308 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ARCHIVE FILE flag to YES do this with the Modify Destination File option Setting the ARCHIVE FILE flag to YES prevents users from modifying or deleting the data in the file or the file s data dictionary while using MSC Fileman options or programmer calls Users are also prevented from deleting file entries while using MSC Fileman options or programmer calls Mapping Information Mapping information identifies the relationship between the data in the source file and the data in the destination file When you create your EXTRACT template you will enter the name of the field in the source file and identify its intended location in the destination file You will need to ensure that the DATA TYPE field value of the field in the destination file is compatible with the DATA TYPE field value of the extract field The compatibility of the DATA TYPE field values is validated when the fields are specified during template creation The following table recommends the DATA TYPE field values to use depending on the DATA TYPE field value of the extract field DATA TYPE DATA TYPE Field Value of Destination Field Field Value of Extract Field DATE TIME 1 DATE TIME internal form of data is moved 2 FREE TEXT external form of data is moved NUMERIC NUMERIC or FREE TEXT SET OF CODES 1 FREE TEXT if external fo
68. added to Multiples in the same way that it is added to files For example suppose DIAGNOSIS is the label of the 01 field of a Multiple and AGE AT ONSET is a subfield in that Multiple If Roger Recipient has a DIAGNOSIS of Angina and Sam Sender has one of Diabetes Recipient ends up with both Angina and Diabetes Further if both Recipient and Sender had Angina but Recipient had no AGE AT ONSET for that subentry and Sender did have one the Sender s AGE AT ONSET data for Angina would be transferred to Recipient The following example illustrates the transfer of data values from one entry to another in more detail These two entries will also be used in the discussion of the Compare Merge File Entries option Before the transfer the Inquire to File Entries option displays these two entries from the SCHOLAR file NAME FMPATIENT 23 A SSN 000 99 9999 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY TOPICS 23 S PARADOX TOPICS PRINCIPLE OF EXCLUDED MIDDLE TOPICS SET THEORY TOPICS THEORY OF TYPES TOPICS LIAR PARADOX SUBJECT AREA MATHEMATICS TOPICS 24 S PARADOX TOPICS SET THEORY TOPICS THEORY OF TYPES TOPICS AXIOM OF INFINITY The transfer is then initiated with the following dialogue Select TRANSFER OPTION TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE SCHOLAR 292 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide TRANSFER FROM FILE SCHOLAR TRANSFER DATA INTO WHICH SCHOLAR RU
69. and efficiently with forms You can use the following keystrokes to move the cursor to various fields located on a Screenman form To Press Move to the next field to right or below lt Tab gt Move to the previous field to left or above lt PF4 gt Move to the field above lt ArrowUp gt Move to the field below lt ArrowDown gt Move to the next field in the pre defined lt Enter gt edit sequence 84 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Edit a WORD PROCESSING field At field press lt Enter gt Select a subrecord in a Multiple At field press Enter Move to the next block on current page lt PF1 gt lt PF4 gt Jump to a specific field followed by Caption of field and lt Enter gt Jump to the Command Line A lt Enter gt How to Navigate Between Pages Many Screenman forms have more than one page i e there are additional screens besides the first one on the form with additional fields that you can edit You can use the following keystrokes to move between pages on a Screenman form To Press Move to next page lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt or lt PageDown gt Move to previous page lt PF1 gt lt ArrowUp gt or lt PageUp gt Move to a page you specify lt PF1 gt P Saving and Exiting To SAVE or EXIT the form you need to reach Screenman s command line It s
70. and fields without having to re enter it To save your field specifications as an IMPORT template answer YES to the Do you want to store the selected fields in an Import Template question which you are asked after you exit the Import form see Run the Import below Then for future imports simply enter the name of the IMPORT template on Page 1 of the Import form You can use any IMPORT template to which your MSC Fileman Access Code gives you access Run the Import Once you have set up your data format source file and destination file and matched source to destination fields exit the Import form press lt F1 gt E After you exit the form you are asked a series of questions 6 Do you want to store the selected fields in an Import Template 7 Do you want to proceed with the import 8 Device for Import Results Report Storing your file and field specifications in an IMPORT template lets you do subsequent imports without having to re enter all of the field information If you proceed with the import enter a device to which the Import Results report should print You can run the Import directly or queue it As the import proceeds if an error occurs updating a field in a particular January 2015 349 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data record the record will not be added and an error message is added to the Import Report saying what the problem was An example of the dialogue after exiting the Impo
71. are exported line by line one line after another A file of records in comma delimited format might look like FMPATIENT TWO 1 GREEN LANE Amherst NH 03012 FMPATIENT THREE 30 Plaza Court San Francisco CA 94105 FMPATIENT FOUR 90 123rd St San Francisco CA 94112 In order to use delimited data format both applications the exporting 328 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide application and the importing application must be able to recognize the format Quoted Fields in Delimited Format Now suppose in the previous example that instead of two separate fields for LASTNAME and FIRSTNAME there is only a single NAME field for both Suppose that incoming data you want to place in the single NAME field comes in the form FMPATIENT FOUR but you still want to use commas as your delimiter You can use the Fields Quoted setting in the Import form or the Quote Non Numeric Fields setting in a Foreign Format to ignore the delimiter if it is between quotes in the incoming data Thus if you set Fields Quoted to YES in your import form and you pass in a record that looks like FMPATIENT FOUR 90 123rd St San Francisco CA 94112 For quoted fields like FMPATIENT FOUR the Import Tool will ignore the comma delimiter in between the quotes and treat FMPATIENT FOUR as a single field value Fixed Length Data Format In fixed length data format a standard width is expecte
72. are the fields selected so far NAME STREET ADDRESS 1 STREET ADDRESS 2 STREET ADDRESS 3 CITY STATE ZIP CODE NTNU BWNE COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Remember that you must include the 01 field and any fields that are required identifiers for the top level of the file The same is true for any Subfiles Multiples If you specified a fixed length as opposed to delimited data format for the incoming records you must enter not only the destination MSC Fileman field but also the length for each corresponding incoming field Each time you enter a field at the Field prompt it s added to the bottom of the list of fields displayed on the form This shows you the destination fields you have selected and their order If you make a mistake you can delete fields from the bottom of the list one by one by entering YES at the 348 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Delete last field selected prompt To insert a field delete back to the insertion point enter the new field and then re enter the deleted fields e REF There are special issues when importing data into fields in Multiples see the Special Considerations Multiples section You can save the information you specify on the Field Selection page in an IMPORT template This lets you reuse the field matching criteria you have entered for subsequent imports that use the same file
73. be higher than the file number of the start with file If you are prompted Select SUB FILE this indicates that the file you are working with has Subfiles If you want information only about a Subfile specify the Subfile at this prompt If you do not choose a Subfile your listing usually will include information about all fields in the file including those in all Subfiles Next choose a format for the listing Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD ANSWER WITH LISTING FORMAT NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM 1 STANDARD 2 BRIEF 3 CUSTOM TAILORED 4 MODIFIED STANDARD 5 TEMPLATES ONLY 6 GLOBAL MAP 7 CONDENSED 8 INDEXES AND CROSS REFERENCES ONLY 9 KEYS ONLY Brief Data Dictionary When you choose Brief as the data dictionary format a brief listing will be produced the Brief format is more readable but less complete than the default of a Standard listing Next you are asked for a destination for the listing s output at the DEVICE prompt You can specify any valid printer or press the Enter key to send output to your screen as illustrated below Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD BRIEF ALPHABETICALLY BY LABEL NO Enter DEVICE Enter 198 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Here is a sample of a Brief data dictionary listing of an elementary file of patients BRIEF DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 1 SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX
74. be evaluated at the time the WORD PROCESSING type field is printed If the expression is meaningful its value will replace the Window in the printed output For example you could embed within the text of the HISTORY WORD PROCESSING type field a Window containing a COMPUTED field expression 144 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide HISTORY 1 PATIENT IS A SEX RELIGION WHO HAS NO 2 APPARENT PROBLEMS When this field is printed for a patient who has a SEX value of MALE and a RELIGION value of CATHOLIC the output would look like PATIENT IS A MALE CATHOLIC WHO HAS NO APPARENT PROBLEMS January 2015 145 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Relational Navigation Relational navigation gives you a way to reach beyond the current file to reference fields within other files Suppose for example you are doing a printout from the PATIENT file In the PATIENT file there is a pointer to the DOCTOR file This links a given patient to a given doctor But the only information about the doctor available from the point of view of the PATIENT file is the doctor s name What if in your printout you want to print the doctor s name phone number and specialty where phone number and specialty are fields in the DOCTOR file The answer is to use relational navigation By using the pointer relationship between the PATIENT and the DOCTOR f
75. but rather a field name from which to calculate the default value for each entry being edited One example of the usefulness of this kind of default is a case where you are editing two fields that usually have the same value Suppose that for a set of patients you want to enter a NEXT OF KIN field followed by a BENEFICIARY field Once you have typed a patient s NEXT OF KIN you want to see that particular answer as the default value of BENEFICIARY 398 January 2015 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide The process would look like this INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NEXT OF KIN THEN EDIT FIELD BENEFICIARY NEXT OF KIN DO YOU MEAN NEXT OF KIN AS A VARIABLE YES Enter THEN EDIT FIELD Enter Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 11 NEXT OF KIN MRS CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT BENEFICIARY MRS CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT Enter Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 14 NEXT OF KIN MR CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT BENEFICIARY MR CLOSERELATIVE FMPATIENT MISS CLOSERELATIVE 2 FMPATIENT Here Mrs Sarah FMPATIENT ends up as both the NEXT OF KIN and BENEFICIARY for 11 FMPATIENT while 14 FMPATIENT s NEXT OF KIN and BENEFICIARY are two distinct people A variable default value can be any computed expression such as LAST VISIT DATE 365 REF For more information on computed expressions see the Computed Expressions section WORD PROCESSING Field Stuffing The
76. by quotation marks e g Data for Lotus 1 2 3 or M code that when executed will write the desired output You can put M code here only if you have programmer access The local variable DDXPXTNO which equals the internal entry number in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 4 of the EXPORT template being used for data output is defined when the code is executed You can use this variable to access information about the export The data type length and foreign field name are stored in the EXPORT FIELD Multiple 100 O REF For additional information see the data dictionary for the PRINT TEMPLATE file FILE TRAILER You can use this field like the FILE HEADER field The literal or M code will be output after the exported data Variables Available for Programmer Use Some of the fields in the FOREIGN FORMAT file allow you to enter M code if you have programmer access You may want to use data stored in the EXPORT template entry at the time the export is performed You may also want to access information in the FOREIGN FORMAT file entry used for the export Two variables are available for use in the M code entered in FOREIGN FORMAT file fields DDXPXTNO T he internal entry number of the EXPORT template in the PRINT TEMPLATE file DDXPFFNO The internal entry number of the Foreign Format in the FOREIGN FORMAT file Consult the data dictionaries of the two files for fields that may contain 362 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data M
77. choice you need is not listed you can add that choice by typing it in January 2015 65 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data STATE FILE ALABAMA ALASKA ARIZONA ARKANSAS CALIFORNIA COLORADO CONNECTICUT DELAWARE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA FLORIDA GEORGIA Patient Record Patient Name FMPATIENT THREE DOB 3 3 53 SON 000 86 3215 ADDRESS M ADO INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT lt RET gt 1890 entries EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL STATE THEN EDIT FIELD lt RET gt Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT THREE STATE CHOOSE FROM Enter two question marks ALABAMA t inter field s ALASKA at any pointer field promp ARIZONA to list available choices STATE COLORADO provided you have LAYGO access to add the entry If the entry you enter is not matched you are asked if you want to add a new entry If you answer YES MSC Fileman adds the new entry For example if there was a state that did not have an entry in the STATE file 5 you could add it by entering it at the STATE field prompt VARIABLE POINTER Fields A DATA TYPE field value of VARIABLE POINTER is like the regular 66 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide POINTER TO A FILE field type with one difference the VARIABLE POINTER DATA TYPE can point to a single record in one of several files whereas the regular POINTER TO A FILE DATA TYP
78. device s row and column dimensions Occurrences of more than nine points in a single print position are marked by an asterisk Initial Print Select MSC Fileman Option PRINT File Entries Subtotal by two fields OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter XXXXXXXX SORT BY NAME WARD LOCATION START WITH WARD LOCATION FIRST lt Enter gt WITHIN WARD LOCATION SORT BY ROOM BED START WITH ROOM BED FIRST lt Enter gt WITHIN ROOM BED SORT BY lt Er FIRST PRINT FIELD WARD LOCZ THEN PRINT FIELD ROOM BED THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT STATISTICS Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter Use print qualifiers for these two fields xxxxxxxx which will be used for the scattergram e SORRY JUST A MOMENT PLEASE Output is generated here January 2015 33 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Generating the Scattergram Select MSC Fileman Option OTHER Options Filegrams Audit Menu Screenman Statistics MSC Fileman Management Data Export to Foreign Format Extract Data To MSC Fileman File Import Data Browser Select Other Options Option STATistics Select STATISTICAL ROUTINE SCATTERGRAM DEVICE HOME Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter PATIENT STATISTICST TOTAL 47 0 2 4 a os ee Pee e eee THERE PM
79. edit a field s INPUT transform or syntax checker e REF For a detailed description of the INPUT transform see the Input Transforms section in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual Edit File The Edit File option available on the MSC Fileman Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY displays the various attributes of a file you specify in Screen Mode i e invokes a Screenman form Here is an example using the Edit File option with the ORDER file 100 in Screen Mode Select MSC Fileman Option UTILITY Functions Verify Fields Cross Reference A Field Identifier Re Index File Input Transform Syntax Edit File Output Transform Template Edit Uneditable Data Mandatory Required Field Check Key Definition Select Utility Functions Option EDIT File MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the file as shown below 278 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide FILE NAME ORDER DESCRIPTION File 100 Select APPLICATION GROUP DEVELOPER DATA DICTIONARY ACCESS READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS DELETE ACCESS i LAYGO ACCESS AUDIT ACCESS Z DD AUDIT NO ASK OK WHEN LOOKING UP AN ENTRY NO FILE SCREEN POST SELECTION ACTION LOOK UP PROGRAM CROSS REFERENCE ROUTINE ORD2 COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert You
80. effect of stuffing values in a DATA TYPE field of WORD PROCESSING is similar to defaults for other fields the default value becomes the first line of the word processing text Also you can stuff many lines of text into a DATA TYPE field of WORD PROCESSING by use of a computed expression that has a Multiline value e g another WORD PROCESSING type field Alternatively you can automatically append data to a DATA TYPE field of WORD PROCESSING by following the or with a sign This means add on the following text to whatever may already be on file Let s January 2015 399 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques take the example of our WORD PROCESSING type HISTORY field data in the PATIENT file 200 EDIT WHICH FIELD DIAGNOSIS EDIT WHICH DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD HISTORY This case is essentially normal The text string following the is appended automatically to any HISTORY field text that already exists for the chosen patient and diagnosis If no HISTORY field text existed the string would become Line 1 of the HISTORY field text When editing the entry you see the text with the addition and can edit it in the usual way If you use three slashes instead of two the addition is made and you are not presented with the text to edit INPUT Templates Branching Within INPUT Templates Sometimes you want to dynamically control editing based on the responses
81. extract entries from a file Identify the files and fields from which to extract data by using information in the data dictionary listings Build a destination file by creating a new field for each field in the source file Select the source file entries from which data will be extracted by creating a SEARCH SORT template Select the fields from which data will be extracted by creating an EXTRACT template Move the extracted data to the destination file by using the Update Destination File option Purge the selected entries from the active database Important Items to Note Before beginning the extract process consider each of the following important facts about the Extract Tool 3 An extract activity is file specific not user specific Anyone with 306 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 9 access to the file and the Extract Tool options can complete or change an existing extract activity When the extracted data is moved to the destination file the source entries in the primary file are blocked from selection A Subfile cannot be extracted by itself At least one field from every Multiple level above the Subfile must also be extracted If no field is extracted at the next higher level the 01 field at that level will automatically be extracted You may want to extract Identifiers and or KEY fields from the source file to the destination file so that reco
82. file This choice will also find entries in other files that point to a non existent entry in your file dangling pointers to your file Find all entries in other files that point to a non existent entry in your file dangling pointers to your file You can send the output of this option to the device of your choosing The following sample dialogue shows how you can use the Find Pointers into a File Option to identify all entries in other files that point to the 216 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide German entry in the Language file The resulting output identifies the three files that have pointers to the German entry in the Language file For each entry it lists the IEN value of the 01 field and the Field Name in the pointing file If you asked for either all the pointers into the file or only the non existent pointers similar reports would be created Select OPTION DATA DICTIONARY UTILITIES Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION FIND POINTERS INTO A FILE THIS UTILITY TRIES TO FIND ALL ENTRIES IN ALL FILES POINTING TO A CERTAIN FILE Select FILE LANGUAGE Select one of the following 1 One particular LANGUAGE Entry 2 All LANGUAGE Entries 3 Non existent LANGUAGE Entries Find pointers to All LANGUAGE Entries 1 One particular LANGUAGE Entry Find pointers to LANGUAGE Entry GERMAN 1 GERMAN DE DEU 2 GERMAN LOW LOW GERMAN NDS 3 GERMAN MIDDLE HIGH CA 1050 MIDDLE HIGH
83. how small or large a number is allowed and how many decimal places are allowed Entering a question mark retrieves help that tells you what responses are acceptable For example a NUMERIC field type would probably be used to store the height of a patient HEIGHT cm 196 SET OF CODES Fields DATA TYPE field values of SET OF CODES sometimes referred to as a SET are preset to accept coded information The codes are usually only one or two characters long Each code in a SET represents a word or a series of words For example the codes Y and N often represent the words YES and NO You can enter the code at this prompt instead of the entire word It however you enter anything other than an acceptable code or the word it represents the computer will reject your response To see a list of acceptable codes simply enter a question mark in response to the prompt The following example shows how a SET OF CODES field type is used to store whether or not a patient is a smoker Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT NINE SMOKER January 2015 61 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Choose from S SMOKER N NON SMOKER SMOKER N Enter NON SMOKER Internal vs External Values for SET OF CODES Fields In the previous example the value of the SMOKER field is set to N which is the code for NON SMOKER In this case N is the internal value
84. in one of two ways 90 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Accept the field s default answer Entera new item an employee s second address for example or another admission date for the same patient Sometimes you may need to enter a new entry in a Multiple To do this enter the new value for the new entry in the Multiple s 01 field If you have LAYGO access permission to add new entries you ll be asked if you want to add the entry to the Multiple To change your mind about adding the item enter NO If you enter YES though Screenman opens either a popup page or a new window allowing you to enter additional information for the new Multiple entry Multiples in Repeating Blocks Subrecords in a Multiple can be displayed in another way Rather than just the name of single entry in the Multiple being displayed on the current page you may also see Multiples where several subrecords are displayed simultaneously on the page Each subrecord occupies one line on the screen in a scrolling list This is called a repeating block Instead of leading to a popup page you are able to edit all visible fields in the Multiple as they are displayed For example Employee Profile NAME FMUSER ONE Page 1 of 2 NAME FMUSER ONE NICK NAME ONE TITLE ARTIFICAIL INTELLIGENCE THEORETICIAN POSITION DESCRIPTION WP DATE OF EMPLOYMENT EMPLOYER YEARS WORKED FEB 1 1967
85. in the Language File 85 to change lowercase characters to uppercase this function will change the characters according to the language specific instructions UPPERCASE VISTA gt VISTA Temporary Data Storage Functions PARAM Format PARAM parameter Parameters parameter has been assigned a value by the SETPARAM function Use This function works with the SETPARAM function It returns the value that has been given to parameter by use 187 January 2015 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data p of the SETPARAM function PARAM AGE gt 45 SETPARAM SETPARAM value parameter Parameters value is an expression to be evaluated parameter is a string 1 to 30 characters long identifying a storage location to hold value Use This function works with the PARAM function It returns nothing Value is stored in parameter for later reference Example SETPARAM TODAY DATE OF BIRTH 365 AGE gt no output result of the expression put into AGE VAR VAR variable variable is a variable in the local symbol table Use This function returns the value of variable The variable can be one that you set using the SET function Examples VAR COUNT gt 1 1 is the current value of COUNT VAR DUZ gt 160 SET SET value variable Parameters value is an expression to be evaluated variable is a local variable name used to hold the value of value
86. in the Print File Entries option A NO answer to this prompt means that the COMPUTED field s expression will be evaluated for each entry and those results will be added A YES answer means that values of each of the fields in the COMPUTED field s expression will be added first and then the COMPUTED field s expression will be applied to those totals For example suppose A and B are the names of two fields and A B is a computed expression The table below shows the results of printing A B and A B with different answers to the WHEN TOTALLING THIS FIELD question 138 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide A A B A B YES Total from NO Total from totals of component results for each entry Total e 112 5612 2 2 2 6 To summarize if you want your total to be the ratio or product of the total of the component fields then answer this question YES Otherwise a NO answer is appropriate O NOTE The answer to this prompt only affects the Total produced by the Print File Entries option When defining a COMPUTED field you will also be asked LENGTH OF FIELD 8 Enter Here you can enter the maximum number of character positions that the field should occupy in output The default value is eight even if the COMPUTED field involves FREE TEXT type fields Be sure to allocate enough space to accommodate the results If the COMPUTED field s value is numeric the entire result
87. indexing a file DO YOU WISH TO RE CROSS REFERENCE ONE PARTICULAR INDEX NO Enter January 2015 275 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data OK ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO KILL OFF THE EXISTING INDEX NO Y DO YOU THEN WANT TO RE CROSS REFERENCE YES Enter All the cross references for the file will be fired except for bulletins This dialogue will execute triggers and MUMPS cross references If a file contains more than one cross reference you can get a list of them by entering a single question mark in response to the DO YOU WISH TO RE CROSS REFERENCE ONE PARTICULAR INDEX prompt You can then re index a single cross reference or all of the file s cross references Limits on Re indexing Files There are some files that should rot be re indexed When those files are inadvertently re indexed it can cause major problems and necessitate restores from backups Currently there is no way to prevent such files from being re indexed except for putting DO NOT RE INDEX in the file description which is ineffective The Re Index File option DIRDEX is a powerful useful tool but it can cause a lot of damage when one is not paying attention Patch DI 22 167 allows individual cross references to be marked Do Not Re Index and the Re Index File option DIRDEX will respect that APIs that perform re indexing will also respect that with the following exceptions APIs that
88. is a requirement for a successful fixed length export In a regular MSC Fileman print the amount of data printed before a carriage return is dependent on the type of device being used for output a CRT screen would normally have 80 characters on a line a printer 80 or 132 For data export however the physical characteristics of the output device is not controlling Rather the capabilities of the application importing data is overriding Therefore you can use the MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH field to specify how long a physical record will be For January 2015 357 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data field delimited as opposed to fixed length exports this record length can be larger than the traditional M data limit of 255 characters Put a number from 0 through 9999 into this field The default record length is 80 If you want the user to be prompted for a record length at the time that an EXPORT template is being created put 0 zero into this field Regardless of the length of the maximum record a carriage return will be written after each record is output o NOTE The length of a record cannot exceed 255 characters when using a fixed length format CAUTION When sending exports to a Host file on a DSM for OpenVMS e g VAX system you must add a parameter to the OPEN command if any of your exported records are longer than 512 characters See the Export Data section for details NEED FOREIGN FIELD
89. is defined it can be used to retrieve the NAME field from the New Person file of entries that point to an entry in the ZZD Test Filel file Following is an example of its use in the Inquiry to File Entries option 160 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Select OPTION INQUIRE TO FILE ENTRIES Output from what File NEW PERSON ZZD TEST FILE1 6 entries Select ZZD TEST FILE1 NAME SECOND ENTRY Another one Enter Standard Captioned Output Yes NO No First Print FIELD NAME Then Print FIELD TESTERS Then Print FIELD Heading S C ZZD TEST FILE1 List Enter DEVICE HOME Enter TELNET ZZD TEST FILE1 List MAR 25 2013 12 57 PAGE 1 NAME TESTERS SECOND ENTRY USER SEVENTEEN USER THIRTY USER THIRTYONE Example Use of Computed Multiple Pointer field In this case three Testers are associated with the selected entry January 2015 161 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman Functions How to Use MSC Fileman Functions This chapter lists each MSC Fileman Function including syntax and simple examples of their use You can use them in any computed expression O REF For more information on computed expressions see the Computed Expressions section A function performs an operation that returns a value Many functions are included with MSC Fileman you can also add functions by making entries in the FUNCTION file 4
90. is displayed regardless of the requested length Another type of result of a Computed Field is Multiple Pointer A Computed Multiple Pointer occurs when your computed expression relies on a backwards relational jump to another file to retrieve data from that file Because more than one entry in the pointing file might point to your file the computed expression can return more than one piece of data Hence its result type multiple pointer Following is an example of the creation of a Computed Multiple Pointer In January 2015 139 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data this example the home file is pointed to by a field in the New Person file called ZZD TEST FILE POINTER That pointing field must be cross referenced for the backwards relational navigation to be possible The NAME field is retrieved form the New Person file Select OPTION MODIFY FILE ATTRIBUTES Do you want to use the screen mode version YES NO Modify what File ZZD TEST FILE1 6 entries Select FIELD TESTERS Are you adding TESTERS as a new FIELD the 13TH No Y FIELD NUMBER 12 Enter DATA TYPE OF TESTERS COMPUTED COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION NEW PERSON NAME By NEW PERSON do you mean the NEW PERSON File pointing via its ZZD TEST FILE POINTER field ZZD Cross reference Yes Enter Yes TRANSLATES TO THE FOLLOWING CODE S Y 999991 12 80 G DO X DD 999991 12 9 4 S X S D0 Y 999991 12 80 FIELD IS M
91. listing TIP It is important to describe cross references that are unusual or especially critical Consider describing all MUMPS trigger and bulletin cross references Create a Traditional Cross reference If you d like to create a Traditional cross reference for a field proceed in the following manner Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select FIELD 1 Enter DATE January 2015 265 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data NO CURRENT CROSS REFERENCE WANT TO CREATE A NEW CROSS REFERENCE FOR THIS FIELD NO YES CROSS REFERENCE NUMBER 1 Enter Select TYPE OF INDEXING REGULAR Enter WANT CROSS REFERENCE TO BE USED FOR LOOKUP AS WELL AS FOR SORTING YES Enter NO DELETION MESSAGE Enter DESCRIPTION 1 gt Lookup and sorting can be done by date using this Regular 2 gt cross reference 3 gt lt Enter gt Delete a Traditional Cross reference The following dialogue shows how to delete a Traditional cross reference Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional lt Enter gt MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select FIELD 1 lt Enter gt DATE CURRENT CROSS REFERENCE IS REGUL
92. lookup routine must be a routine currently on the system This special lookup routine will be executed instead of the standard MSC Fileman lookup logic whenever a call is made to DIC Specify that Cross references on a File Should be Compiled only available when you have programmer access If you have January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide programmer access you also can specify that cross references on a file should be compiled To do this enter a routine namespace from three to six characters no at the CROSS REFERENCE ROUTINE prompt This will become the namespace of the compiled routine s If a new routine name is entered but the cross references are not compiled at this time the routine name will be automatically deleted To stop the use of the compiled cross references enter an at sign E at the CROSS REFERENCE ROUTINE prompt At this point the cross references are considered uncompiled and MSC Fileman will not use the routine for re indexing If you decide later to recompile the cross references you will be shown the routine name previously used so that you can easily reuse the same routine name Stopping the use of the compiled cross reference does not delete the compiled routines If you want you can delete those routines manually OUTPUT Transform Sometimes you might want to display a field differently from the way in which it is stored For example a Social Secu
93. number Example NUMYEAR DATE OF BIRTH gt 49 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 NUMYEAR4 NUMYEARA datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value This function returns the four digit year in datexp as a number 170 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Example NUMYEARA DATE OF BIRTH gt 1949 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 RANGEDATE RANGEDATE datexp1 datexp2 datexp3 datexp4 Parameters datexpl is a date valued expression beginning the first range of dates datexp2 is a date valued expression ending the first range of dates datexp3 is a date valued expression beginning the second range of dates datexp4 is a date valued expression ending the second range of dates Use This function returns the number of days that the two ranges of dates overlap Example RANGEDATE DATE OF BIRTH NOW 20 JUL 1981 20 JUL 1982 366 TIME TIME datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns time from datexp in 12 hour format with AM PM TIME NOW 1 15 PM TODAY January 2015 171 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Use This argumentless function returns today s date TODAY gt AUG 26 1991 W REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section
94. of a WORD PROCESSINC type field when that WORD PROCESSING type field is printed A Field Name A Computed Expression Text Formatting Expression W REF For details of how to compose and use computed expressions see the Computed Expressions section 404 January 2015 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Text Formatting Expressions in Word Processing Windows The following is the list of recognized special text formatting functions that you can use within word processing windows Most of these functions can be used in other contexts for example at the PRINT FIELD prompt RIGHT JUSTIFY Causes the text that follows it to be padded with spaces between words so the right margin is even DOUBLE SPACE Causes the text that follows it to be printed with blank lines inserted every other line SINGLE SPACE Turns off double spacing for the text that follows it TOP Causes a page break to occur at this point NOBLANKLINE If nothing will be printed on the line this causes the line to be suppressed so that a blank line is not output It is useful if the line contains only a computed expression that might evaluate to null PAGEFEED arg Causes page breaks to occur in the text that follows it whenever fewer than arg number lines remain on the current page PAGESTART arg Causes the text on the following pages to begin at line arg of the page SETPAGE
95. of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional NEW MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select Subfile Enter Current Indexes on file 16026 75 COMP index 85 XR202 index 106 H index 116 AC index 141 C index Choose E Edit D Delete C Create DELETE Which Index do you wish to delete 141 Enter C Are you sure you want to delete the Index No YES Index definition deleted Removing old index DONE Press RETURN to continue Enter Identifier e NOTE If you want to uniquely identify an entry in your file by a combination of fields and to force that uniqueness then you will most likely want to create a KEY on your file rather than using Identifier fields which do not force the uniqueness If a field is part of the PRIMARY KEY for a file then it should not be marked as an Identifier as well REF For more information on creating a KEY see the Key Definition section January 2015 273 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data An identifier is a designation you can give to a field that you want permanently associated with the 01 field NAME of a file The SSN field of our PATIENT file example has been defined as an identifier field Each time a patient s entry is referenced the SSN will be displayed to help positively identify the entry When a new entry is added to the file the user will be asked to provide the SSN A field that is not multiple valued can be sp
96. option you may wish to familiarize yourself with the file s and fields involved The following dialogue illustrates how to create a FILEGRAM type template OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE FIRST SEND CHANGE FIELD You can enter ALL at this prompt if you want to include all fields in the file in your filegram ALL can also be used in existing file navigation paths Enter at this prompt to get a listing of existing FILEGRAM type templates for the selected file Here two question marks requests a list of the fields in the file CHOOSE FROM 01 NAME VERSION TAG ROUTINE CHANGE REPORTER multiple DATE CHANGED PROGRAMMER BUG OR FEATURE PURPOSE DESCRIPTION word processing PROV DOS C NJ H hi In the example that follows the PROGRAMMER field is a pointer to the NEW PERSON file 200 FIRST SEND CHANGE FIELD 1 Enter VERSION THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 3 Enter ROUTINE THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 4 Enter CHANGE THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 5 Enter REPORTER multiple FIRST SEND REPORTER SUB FIELD 01 THEN SEND REPORTER SUB FIELD Enter THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 6 Enter DATE CHANGED THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 7 Enter PROGRAMMER 390 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD 11 Enter DESCRIPTION word processing THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD Enter STORE FILEGRAM LOGIC IN TEMPLATE ZZTEST FILEG
97. parameters A user with programmer access can also enter M code at this prompt The M code must set the variable X to the sort value 142 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Thus if you want to print a list of the names of all patients who are Baptists you could enter Select OPTION PRINT FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SORT BY RELIGION BAPTIST WITHIN RELIGION BAPTIST SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME This is a common way to select certain records for printing Field Value Stuffing In the Enter or Edit File Entries option you can follow the or specifiers with computed expressions The expression is evaluated for the entry you are inputting and used as a variable stuff value Suppose you want to put the current contents of a patient s NEXT OF KIN field into the BENEFICIARY field with a notation that this value is UNVERIFIED for all patients who do not have a value in the BENEFICIARY field The dialogue would look like this Select OPTION ENTER OR EDIT FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD BENEFICIARY NEXT OF KIN UNVERIFIED THEN EDIT FIELD Enter Select PATIENT NAME LOOP EDIT ENTRIES BY BENEFICIARY WITHIN BENEFICIARY EDIT ENTRIES BY Enter This example uses two on the fly expressions one in answer to the EDIT ENTRIES BY prompt which is essentially a SORT BY for looping
98. pointed to entry by using the following syntax pfield element Pfield is the name or number preceded by of a pointer field in the current file and element is an element that exists in the field to which pfield points This is called the short form of extended pointer syntax For example since ATTENDING PHYSICIAN is a pointer field in the current file to the fictitious DOCTOR file the short form of extended pointer syntax to reference the PHONE NUMBER field in the fictitious DOCTOR file would be ATTENDING PHYSICIAN PHONE NUMBER Simple Extended Pointer Syntax Long Form The most complete or general form of extended pointer syntax also called long form is shown below expr file element OR expr IN file FILE element 148 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Expr is any expression that applies to the file that is your current context File is the name of any file Element is any element field in the file named by File For example since ATTENDING PHYSICIAN is a pointer field in the current file to the DOCTOR file the long form of extended pointer syntax to reference the PHONE NUMBER field in the DOCTOR file would be ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DOCTOR PHONE NUMBER OR ATTENDING PHYSICIAN IN file DOCTOR PHONE NUMBER Relational Query Example You can use simple extended pointers to make rela
99. return to the field in this option you are able to change a field s Label Name Title long form of its name Auditand Audit Conditions to indicate which fields should be audited e Read Delete Write e Source Destination Group Description of the field a WORD PROCESSING field what the user sees after entering two question marks Technical Description After you are presented with these attributes of the field you can change the attributes defined during the initial definition of the field as illustrated in the Creating Fields topic above For example let s say you have created an SSN field Social Security Number in the PATIENT file and would now like to edit the field Select FIELD SSN LABEL SSN Enter TITLE Social Security Number AUDIT YES ALWAYS AUDIT CONDITION Enter O REF Auditing is described in the section READ ACCESS OPTIONAL lt Enter gt DELETE ACCESS OPTIONAL lt Enter gt WRITE ACCESS OPTIONAL lt Enter gt REF Control of various kinds of access to files is described in the section SOURCE lt Enter gt Select DESTINATION lt Enter gt January 2015 239 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Select GROUP DEMOG A GROUP is a shorthand way for the user to refer to several fields at once when using the Print File Entries or the Enter or Edit File Entries options Here SSN is
100. returned You can use these Boolean operators in computed expressions E mma SSS Contains e g AB A is true A AB is false Jos either elementis rue leg GAO iie 132 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide An apostrophe means negation or NOT It can precede any of the Boolean operators Thus 6 gt 8 is read six is not greater than eight which is true a one is returned Parentheses in Expressions In the absence of parentheses the expression is evaluated strictly left to right One operator is not given precedence over another Use parentheses to control the order in which the operations of a computed expression are performed Expressions within parentheses are evaluated first Thus 34 2 is 3 5 whereas 3 4 2 is 5 You can also use parentheses to ensure that the enclosed material is treated as an expression when there might be some ambiguity For example suppose you want to force a numeric interpretation of the SSN field You need to use the unary operator However the following will not yield the desired result SORT BY SSN Is the the unary operator or the sort specifier meaning that you want to subtotal results by SSN In this case it will be interpreted as the sort specifier However if you put the expression in parentheses the will definitely be interpreted as an operator SORT BY SSN Example of Compound Expression
101. right hand side of your terminal 98 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide keyboard along with the numeric keypad If you re using a personal computer rather than a computer terminal the lt PF gt keys are mostly likely re mapped to another set of keys consult your IRM to find out to what keys the lt PF1 gt through lt PF4 gt are re mapped Entering Text When using the Screen Editor you type your text as you normally would As you type the Screen Editor automatically wraps lines of text to fit within the left and right margins There is no need to press the Enter key at the end of each line The Screen Editor accepts any printable characters as keyboard input However it cannot be used to edit text that contains control characters Entering Commands Editor commands are invoked using keyboard command sequences The Screen Editor makes use of the lt PF gt keys the cursor keypad and if available on the keyboard the edit keypad to perform its editing functions January 2015 99 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Cursor Movement Navigation Keystrokes Action Key Sequence Move one column left or right lt ArrowLeft gt or lt ArrowRight gt Move one line up or down lt ArrowUp gt or lt ArrowDown gt Move one word left or right lt Ctrl J gt or lt Ctrl L gt Move to next t
102. session Your template could be defined like this Select OPTION ENTER OR EDIT FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE ADMISSIONS EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NAME THEN EDIT FIELD DIAGNOSIS THEN EDIT FIELD ADMITTING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD DATE OF DISCHARGE THEN EDIT FIELD S X Y 1 THEN EDIT FIELD DISCHARGING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD FOLLOW UP DATE THEN EDIT FIELD Q1 THEN EDIT FIELD BILLING METHOD THEN EDIT FIELD Enter STORE THESE FIELDS IN TEMPLATE EDIT ADMISSION Are you adding EDIT ADMISSION as a new INPUT TEMPLATE Y Enter YES This template will branch around the discharge related questions if the DATE OF DISCHARGE is null If you wanted to further enhance the template to ask for MEDICARE NUMBER only if BILLING METHOD is M for Medicare you could change the template like this INPUT TO WHAT FILE ADMISSIONS Enter EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL EDIT ADMISSION USER Z2 FILE 716155 WANT TO EDIT EDIT ADMISSION INPUT TEMPLATE NO Y NAME EDIT ADMISSION Enter READ ACCESS Enter January 2015 401 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques WRITE ACCESS Enter EDIT WHICH FIELD 01 Enter NAME THEN EDIT FIELD 1 Enter DIAGNOSIS THEN EDIT FIELD 2 Enter ADMITTING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD 3 Enter DATE OF DISCHARGE THEN EDIT FIELD S X Y 01 Enter THEN EDIT FIELD 4 Enter DI
103. specific field COMMAND Press lt PF1 gt H for help Insert Fields are usually composed of a data element and a caption Screenman displays data elements in high intensity boldface and other text in regular intensity Text that identifies a data element is called a caption and is January 2015 83 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data usually followed by a colon A caption and its associated data element are together called a field Captions of required fields are underlined to save any changes you make on the form required fields must contain data NOTE Screenman highlights captions for required fields with an underline However on some terminals or depending on your terminal emulator software and your personal preferences the form of the highlight can vary e g some emulators will highlight required fields in a different color with an underline or both Specifically on Qume 102 and Wyse 75 terminals captions for required fields display in boldface not underlined Also the edit window is displayed with an underline extending from the last character of the existing data to the right edge of the edit window Cursor Movement Navigation Keystrokes How to Navigate Between Fields There are a number of ways you can move the cursor from field to field on a form i e navigate This is to provide you with as much flexibility as possible so that you can work quickly
104. start again from the beginning Are you sure you want to CANCEL this EXTRACT ACTIVITY NO YES This extract activity has already updated the destination file Delete the destination file entries created by this extract activity NO 324 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Enter YES to rollback the destination file to its state before the update Delete the destination file entries created by this extract activity NO Enter gt gt gt DONE lt lt lt If you wish to cancel an extract selection so that you can start over enter YES at the Delete the destination file entries prompt Entering YES prevents you from sending a duplicate set of entries to the destination file If on the other hand you simply want to cancel the extract selection pressing the Enter key at the prompt unlocks the source entries and retains the destination file entries Validate Extract Template Option 9 of 9 After you have corrected any discrepancies that MSC Fileman might have pointed out while you were creating an EXTRACT template you can use the Validate Extract Template option to quickly check your EXTRACT template s mapping information The Validate Extract Template option will not alter anything in your template Here is a sample dialogue Select EXTRACT OPTION VALIDATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE Select EXTRACT TEMPLATE CHANGE lt Enter gt EXTRACT EXTRACT AUG 30
105. syntax Simple short form ATTENDING PHYSICIAN Simple long form PROVIDER IN PERSON FILE PAYSCALE IN FACTOR FILE Within the Enter or Edit File Entries option for example you can respond to the prompts as depicted in the dialogue that follows INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NAME THEN EDIT FIELD ATTENDING PH AN EDIT WHICH DOCTOR FIELD ALL NAME PHYSICIAN NAME THEN EDIT DOCTOR FIELD NICKNAME THEN EDIT DOCTOR FIELD Enter THEN EDIT FIELD Enter Because of a pointer linkage between the ATTENDING PHYSICIAN field in the PATIENT file and the DOCTOR file you can use the simple short form of the extended pointer to navigate to the DOCTOR file Then during an interactive editing session you can specify the fields you want to edit for each patient In this case after you edit the patient s name you can edit that patient s physician s name and nickname Backward Extended Pointer Simple extended pointers let you retrieve information from an entry in another file that the current entry explicitly points to through a POINTER TO A FILE field What if you wanted to go the other way retrieve 152 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide information from an entry in another file that points to not from the current entry Radiology Exam File 53993 FMPATIENT 11 53994 LTMDATTITNT 19 53995 Examinee FMPATIENT 10 Exam Da
106. the PERSON file Thus only his phone number is displayed Relational Jumps Across Files In interactive MSC Fileman mode you can use the following syntax file Doing this changes your context to the file you specify you jump to the specified file You can then select fields from the file to which you have jumped You can only do this in four places in MSC Fileman EDIT WHICH FIELD prompt Enter or Edit File Entries option SEARCH FOR FIELD prompt Search File Entries option SORT BY prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option PRINT FIELD prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option BON Re Relational jumping is mainly a convenience to make it easier to select more than one field from another file by letting you temporarily jump to the other file it s easier to pick all the fields you want directly rather than having to use extended pointer syntax to specify each field O NOTE When sorting printing searching or editing if you want to reference several fields from another file it is more efficient to jump to the file and specify the needed fields than it is to use the extended pointer January 2015 151 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data syntax to reference the fields one at a time Multiple uses of the extended pointer cause multiple relational jumps There are three types of relational jumps that correspond to the three extended pointer
107. the Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage option If you choose an archiving activity that has not yet been written to temporary storage a warning is issued This option will do several things not necessarily in the order listed here 13 It will print an Archive Activity report which prints information from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 21 11 such as the archiver i e the person who selected this option the archival activity number an index of all archived entries and the search criteria used during the Select Entries to Archive process etc 14 It will build an index of all archived entries and write this index at the beginning of the archived file An item in the index contains the 01 value of the entry along with all PRIMARY KEY and Identifier values for that entry W9 NOTE The PRIMARY KEY is available as of Version 22 0 15 It will prompt for Archive Device Label information This information will usually represent some naming convention that Systems Managers use as physical label for devices such as tape If using a disk file the full disk file name will be presented as a default This device label information along with the index printed on the Archive Activity report should be useful in locating an archived entry and the device to which it was archived 16 Lastly this option will move archive data to permanent storage Permanent storage is considered any sequential storage media like SDP VMS file magnetic tape or disk d
108. this 402 January 2015 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Select ADMISSIONS NAME FMPATIENT 19 OK YES Enter NAME FMPATIENT 19 DATE OF DISCHARGE DATE OF DISCHARGE 5 9 90 DISCHARGING PHYSICIAN FMPROVIDER 4 FOLLOW UP DATE 6 1 90 BILLING METHOD MEDICARE Enter MEDICARE NUMBER 3093 0393 Enter There is a potential hazard in using branching In this example suppose the BILLING METHOD were changed to P for private insurance The simple branching logic used would not show you the MEDICARE NUMBER field to edit or delete You must ensure that your template can handle this kind of situation In this example if you have programmer access to do so you might add M code to delete the MEDICARE NUMBER if BILLING METHOD were not equal to M Text Formatting in Word Processing Fields Word Wrapping Word wrapping is performed when a WORD PROCESSING type field is printed Two functions occur as part of word wrapping during prints lines are filled to the right margin and lines are broken only at word breaks If word wrap is on a data dictionary setting for the WORD PROCESSING type field in question you can override the word wrapping function and force a line to be printed as it appears in the editor by doing one of the following with the line Starting the line with a space Pressing the Tab key at the end of the line while using the Line Editor or
109. this option because the merge from entry can be deleted and data could be lost SUMMARIZE To review the changes that will be made to the merge to entry enter an S or SUMMARIZE at the ACTION prompt before proceeding to merge The following will be shown ACTION SUMMARIZE the modifications before proceeding SUMMARY OF MODIFICATIONS TO FMPATIENT 23 A FIELD OLD VALUE NEW VALUE 2 SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 4 DATE OF BIRTH 1872 NOTE Multiples will be merged into the target record Enter RETURN to continue lt Enter gt 302 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide EDIT Enter an E or EDIT at the ACTION prompt to change the decisions made earlier If you choose this action you will again be shown the values in both entries with your current selections in brackets and will have the opportunity to switch the data going into the merge to entry Namespace Compare Option The Namespace Compare option allows you to compare data dictionary and file contents across VISTA instances You select the UCI that you want to compare to your UCI Then you select the file or range of files you want to compare Finally you specify whether you want the data dictionary the file contents or both to be compared The following example shows the comparison of both Data Dictionary and File Entries for the Language file The current UCI is identified You select the file to be compared the tar
110. to a JOIN operation because you can specify at any time a new relationship between two formerly unrelated files Therefore we call this type of pointing the Join Extended Pointer Limitations If the join expression matches more than one entry in the file being joined the first matching entry by internal entry number is returned as the result of the join Thus if your join expression is likely to match more than one entry be aware that only the first matching entry is returned Example You could find out if any entries in the PERSONNEL file could be matched against the NAME field in the PATIENT file just by specifying the following sort OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SORT BY NAME IN PERSONNEL FILE The expression at the SORT BY prompt selects entries in the PERSONNEL file where the value of the NAME field in the PATIENT file matches the PERSONNEL file s 01 field The PATIENT file s NAME field is being used as a lookup in the PERSONNEL file Since we are evaluating the 01 field of the PERSONNEL file the element part of the extended pointer syntax is unnecessary Multiline Return Values When you use extended pointer syntax a lookup is performed in the navigated to file This lookup usually evaluates to a single value However in some situations extended pointer syntax can end up returning a Multiple valued or Multiline result Multiline responses can be generated by 156 January 2015 Part 4 Comp
111. type Tabl at the end of the line while using the Screen Editor Turning wrap off by using the NOWRAP function described below Lines that contain only punctuation are always printed as is Thus if you January 2015 403 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques put a single space on a line the previous line will not be filled and the subsequent line will begin in column one O NOTE The editor s line numbers are meaningful only when editing Since word processing data is usually printed in a wraparound mode what is internally line three might be printed as lines five and six Tabs Tabs can be meaningful wherever they occur in a line e NOTE If you insert a tab by typing the special Tab key on the keyboard or lt Ctrl I gt on terminals without a Tab key a Tabl will be inserted in the text instead When editing a tab is recognized as Tabl not as five blank spaces Formatting Text with Word Processing Windows Frames Expressions framed by vertical bars are known as word processing windows or frames and are evaluated as computed expression at print time and will be printed as evaluated MailMan does not typically evaluate expressions within vertical bars neither does the Inquire to File Entries option or the CAPTIONED PRINT template For example TODAY 1 will print out tomorrow s date You can use word processing windows to insert one of the following into the text
112. user inputs a single question mark when editing this field 258 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide File Utilities Various file utilities are provided as options on MSC Fileman s Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY e NOTE Some additional functionality for modifying files is contained in the separate Modify File Attributes option which is on the main MSC Fileman menu Verify Fields Located on the Utility Functions menu the Verify Fields option uses a field s definition to verify the data stored in a file After invoking this option you identify the file you want to examine Then at the VERIFY WHICH FIELD prompt you can ask for values of a specific field to be checked or you can ask that all fields be verified by entering ALL at the prompt The Verify Fields option will report if the value stored in the file is not a valid value based on the field s data type and input transform For example Adate field must contain a valid MSC Fileman date The code of a set of codes field must be one of the specified codes Anumber must be a number within the specified range A pointer or variable pointer value must point to an existing entry in the pointed to file Ifthe field has an input transform the value will be checked against that transform and if necessary it will be passed through an existing output transform and checked again against the input transform Cross referenc
113. value for the field identified by field in the next entry The next entry is determined by internal entry number No analysis of the value of entries is done If there are no more entries the function returns null Example NEXT AGE AT ONSET gt 56 the value of AGE AT ONSET for the next entry in the Subfile PREVIOUS PREVIOUS field field is a field s number preceded by a or a field s label 180 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide e from the current file or Multiple This function returns the value for the field identified by field in the previous entry The previous entry is determined by internal entry number No analysis of the value of entries is done If there is no prior entry the function returns null Example PREVIOUS AGE AT ONSET 29 the value of AGE AT ONSET for the prior entry in the Subfile TOTAL Format TOTAL fname TOTAL fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple valued field in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname With the first format this function totals the values of the 01 field of a Multiple or file identified by fname The second format totals the values in field The field being totaled must have numeric values Example TOTAL VISIT COST gt 569 3
114. 0 NO 01 330 VERSION 1 17 09 SEND DAT Create Filegram Archiving Template The Create Filegram Archiving Template option creates a FILEGRAM type template which is the template used in the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option A filegram is the tool used for extracting and transporting archived data to temporary storage O REF For further explanation see the Write Entries to Temporary Storage section You can create a new FILEGRAM type template with this option or edit an existing one created using the Filegram or Archiving options O NOTE Only those fields defined in the FILEGRAM type template the 01 field and any PRIMARY KEY or Identifier fields will be archived to 376 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide permanent storage The PRIMARY KEY is available as of Version 22 0 You create a FILEGRAM type template just as you create a PRINT template except only valid field numbers or names can be entered You cannot include print qualifiers You always get the STORE FILEGRAM LOGIC IN TEMPLATE prompt no matter how many fields you identify FILEGRAM type templates are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 so the FILEGRAM type template is referred to as a PRINT template in the dialogue However MSC Fileman can distinguish between PRINT and FILEGRAM type templates If you want to edit an existing FILEGRAM type template identify it at the FIRST SEND FIELD prompt by enteri
115. 16026 12 24 98 PAGE 1 File 16026 Traditional Cross References B REGULAR Field NAME 16026 01 Description Automatically created regular x ref used to look up and sort entries based on the value in the 01 NAME field 1 S DIZ 16026 B SE X 1 30 DA 2 K DIZ 16026 B SE X 1 30 DA New Style Indexes KEYA 6 RECORD REGULAR IR LOOKUP amp SORTING Unique for Key A 5 File 16026 January 2015 211 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Short Descr Uniqueness Index for Key A of File 16026 Set Logic S DIZ 16026 KEYA X 1 X 2 DA 2 Kill Logic K DIZ 16026 KEYA X 1 X 2 DA Whole Kill K DIZ 16026 KEYA X 1 NAME 16026 01 Subscr 1 X 2 SSN 16026 6 Subscr 2 Subfile 16026 04 Traditional Cross References B REGULAR Field DIAGNOSIS 16026 04 01 1 S DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B SE X 1 30 DA 2 K DIZ 16026 DA 1 1 B E X 1 30 DA Keys Only The Keys Only format shows the keys that are defined on a file Here is a sample Keys Only data dictionary listing KEY LIST FILE 16026 12 24 98 PAGE 1 PRIMARY KEY A 5 Uniqueness Index KEYA 6 File Field 1 NAME 16026 01 2 SSN 16026 6 Map Pointer Relations Option The Map Pointer Relations option on the Data Dictionary Utilities submenu creates a graphic representation of the pointer relationships between files Files are linked by POINTER TO A FILE a
116. 1992 USER 2 FILE 16000 Excuse me this will take a few moments Checking the destination file Template looks OK January 2015 325 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Import and Export Tools If you want to use an application like Microsoft Excel to manipulate data stored in a MSC Fileman file you need some way to exchange that data between MSC Fileman and your application MSC Fileman provides the Import and Export Tools for this purpose Suppose for example that you want to use Microsoft Word s Print Merge utility to print a form letter to a list of recipients that is maintained in a MSC Fileman file You can use MSC Fileman s Export Tool to export the list of recipients from the MSC Fileman file to Microsoft Word Once you have done this you can use Word to generate your form letters based on the exported list What Applications Can You Exchange Data With In theory you can exchange data with any application that supports delimited or fixed length ASCII data exchange Many applications do using a variety of formats Typically you can expect the ability to import and export data with the following types of applications Databases Spreadsheets Statistical and Analysis Programs SAS SPSS etc Vertical Applications Word Processor data records not word processing text WY NOTE You can export data records to a word processor which often uses data records for functio
117. 2 VISIT COST is a Multiple Mathematical Functions ABS ABS Parameters nis a number or an expression with a numeric value January 2015 181 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Use This mathematical function will return the value of n without a sign it gives the absolute value of n ABS 23 87 23 87 BEIWEEN BETWEEN n1 n2 n3 Parameters n1 n2 and n3 are numbers or numeric expressions n1 is the number being tested n2 is one limit for the test n3 is the other limit for the test This Boolean function determines if n1 is within the limits defined by n2 and n3 If n1 is within this range a value of 1 true is returned otherwise 0 false is returned If n1 equals n2 or n3 1 true is returned BETWEEN OCCURRENCES 5 10 gt 0 OCCURRENCES is a field with value 3 BETWEEN 3 10 0 gt 1 MAX MAXI nl and n2 are numbers or numeric expressions This function returns the larger of n1 and n2 Date time field values can be used resulting in the most recent date time being returned Examples MAX 54 23 gt 54 MAX DATE OF BIRTH TODAY gt AUG 23 1991 182 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide MINGTA nl and n2 are numbers or numeric expressions This function returns the smaller of n1 and n2 Date time field values can be used resulting in the earliest date time being returned Examples MIN 54 23 gt 2
118. 22 2 User Reference Guide transfer To use Kermit it must be installed as an Alternate Editor at your site January 2015 107 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Line Editor The Line Editor is a scrolling mode editor It is the second of two standard editors MSC Fileman provides for editing WORD PROCESSING type fields The distinguishing characteristic of a Scrolling Mode editor is that you enter your text one line at a time and that you can only edit lines one at a time Because word processing in a scrolling mode interface can be cumbersome you may want to set your Preferred Editor to the Screen Editor MSC Fileman continues to provide the Scrolling Mode Line Editor however for those who prefer it Choosing a Word processing Editor You can select any of the available editors on the system as your Preferred Editor If you select a Preferred Editor that editor will be used whenever you edit a WORD PROCESSING field If you don t choose a Preferred Editor the following defaults are used e When editing WORD PROCESSING fields from scrolling mode the Line Editor is used When editing WORD PROCESSING fields from a ScreenMan form the Screen Editor is used How to Select Your Preferred Editor To select your preferred editor perform the following procedure e Atany menu prompt enter TBOX to go to the User s Toolbox menu Choose the Edit User Characteristics option from the
119. 3 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data matching LABEL fields and DATA TYPE fields In this way MSC Fileman can identify corresponding entries Values of the fields can then be transferred Only those fields where the LABEL and DATA TYPE fields match will be transferred Before the transfer is done you are told which fields will have their data transferred The dialogue presented when transferring entries to another file is presented below In this instance you are transferring the contents of the SCHOLAR file to the NEW SCHOLAR file The NEW SCHOLAR file already exists and it does have some entries whose NAME field matches those in the SCHOLAR file Select OPTION TRANSFER ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE NEW SCHOLAR TRANSFER FROM FILE NEW SCHOLAR SCHOLAR NAME FIELDS SSN FIELDS DATE OF BIRTH FIELDS SUBJECT AREA FIELDS TOPICS FIELDS WILL BE TRANSFERRED WANT TO MERGE TRANSFERRED ENTRIES WITH ONES ALREADY THERE NO YES WANT EACH ENTRY TO BE DELETED AS IT S TRANSFERRED NO TRANSFER ENTRIES BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME FIRST Enter DEVICE HOME Enter You can specify whether you want entries with the same NAME field to be merged when the transfers are made or whether each transferred entry and subentry should become a distinct new entry in the target file In this case the answer was YES to merge You can also spe
120. 3 MIN DATE OF BIRTH TODAY gt NOV 1 1938 MODULO Format MODULO n1 n2 Parameters n1 n2 are numbers or numeric expressions nl is the dividend n2 is the divisor This mathematical function returns the remainder when n2 is divided into n1 it performs modulo division MODULO 54 5 gt 4 SQUAREROOT SQUAREROOTUN nis a numeric expression greater than 0 This mathematical function returns the square root of n SQUAREROOT 9 gt 3 Printing Related Functions IOM Format OM January 2015 183 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Use This argumentless function returns the number of columns for the present output device PAGE Use This argumentless function returns the current page number when output is being printed Page PAGE Page 23 the 23rd page of output String Functions DUP Formar Purega Parameters string is any string of characters or an expression yielding a string of characters n is a positive integer or a numeric expression This function returns a string of characters n characters long If string is less than n characters long the characters in string will be repeated until the output string is n characters in length DUP DIAGNOSIS 3 gt Ang value of DIAGNOSIS Angina Pectoris DUP _ IOM gt ____ line drawn will have a length equal to the value of IOM LOWERCASE 184 January 2015 Part 4 Computing D
121. 5 O REF For a description on how to add functions see the MSC Fileman Functions Creating section in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual Some functions require an argument or arguments others are argumentless The arguments of the function can be any element including field name field number preceded with the 4 quoted literal or even other functions The SOUAREROOT function for example would take an argument of 64 and return 8 Thus if the AGE field of a patient has the value 64 the expression SQUAREROOT AGE would return 8 O NOTE If there is an output transform on a field the function code is applied to the field after it has been transformed In most cases if a field has an output transform you should therefore use the syntax FUNCTION NAME INTERNAL FIELD NAME rather than FUNCTION NAME FIELD NAME 162 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Documentation Conventions for MSC Fileman Functions While studying this chapter s functions syntax and examples you will encounter the following conventions Convention Description In the format arguments Indicates mandatory quotation marks W NOTE If you enter a literal string as an argument quotation marks are also necessary In examples Indicates the output of the function In examples Indicates information about the outcome of the function boldface type Indicates specific reference to an argument FUNCTIO
122. 6 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 Enter NO lt Enter gt Enter VERSION id lt Enter gt Enter PROGRAMMER id FMPATIENT 30 Enter NO lt Enter gt Enter VERSION id lt Enter gt Enter PROGRAMMER id lt Enter gt Enter NO lt Enter gt PRINT FOUND ENTRIES TO DEVICE Enter DECSERVER Searching archived file Formatting found entries Press RETURN to continue or LAST to exit lt Enter gt 384 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ARCHIVE RETRIEVAL LIST AUG 30 1992 PAGE 1 REQUEST 1 PROGRAMMER FMPROGRAMMER 2 ARCHIVE FILE CHANGE 16000 LOOKUP VALUE 01 330 IDENTIFIERS VERSION 1 17 09 PROGRAMMER 7 FMPROGARMMER 30 FIELDS FIELD NAME NO 01 330 FIELD NAME VERSION 1 17 09 MATCHES FOUND 1 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY File The status of an archiving activity is displayed in the listing of activities when a question mark is entered at most of the Archiving options You can also use the Inquire to File Entries option on the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 1 11 to obtain information about past or pending archiving activities The amount of information you receive depends on the status of the archiving activity In summary the information contained in this file describes who archived status of the archive when entries were archived the number of items archived name of the file archived ar
123. 7 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of FREE TEXT Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD REASON FOR FLAG You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 67 in File 100 FIELD LABEL REASON FOR FLAG DATA TYPE FREE TEXT MINIMUM LENGTH MAXIMUM LENGTH 80 AUDIT C PATTERN MATCH IN X X 1P E January 2015 247 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Enter the reason for the flag XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value FREE TEXT type fields require input for the MINIMUM and MAXIMUM lengths of the field In this example users must enter from 1 to 80 characters for this field If included the PATTERN MATCH must be written in M For example you can insure that the data value will not start with a punctuation character by entering a PATTERN MATCH of X 1P E This is a good check to make on a field that is allowed to be just one character in len
124. 920 1920 and not PATIENT SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS CONTAINS case insensitive ANGINA DO YOU WANT THIS SEARCH SPECIFICATION TO BE CONSIDERED TRUE FOR CONDITION B 1 WHEN AT LEAST ONE OF THE SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS MULTIPLES SATISFIES IT 2 WHEN ALL OF THE SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS MULTIPLES SATISFY IT 3 WHEN ALL OF THE SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS MULTIPLES SATISFY IT OR WHEN THERE ARE NO SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS MULTIPLES CHOOSE 1 3 1 3 OR STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE Another ambiguity about searches of multiple fields is how to interpret two separate truth tests on the same subfield For example if you are searching for DIAGNOSIS containing ANGINA and also for DIAGNOSIS containing PECTORIS do you want to find Only those patients who have ANGINA and PECTORIS in the same diagnosis name Patients who might have one diagnosis containing ANGINA and a different diagnosis containing PECTORIS Whenever you combine two truth tests e g A and B pertaining to the same multiple valued field you are prompted CONDITION A WILL APPLY TO THE SAME MULTIPLE AS CONDITION B OK YES In our example Figure 47 and Figure 48 a YES answer means that 48 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ANGINA and PECTORIS must be found in the same DIAGNOSIS If you answer NO you can specify how A and B will apply DO YOU WAN
125. A 107 Choosing a Word processing Editor eee tete thtnntns 107 Switching to Another Editor While Editing sss 108 Recognizing tlie LING Editor dal 109 How to Enter Text inthe Line EGO uico sitet aedes dina esca P dnbie 109 Revising Existing Texto rra 110 Replace With Edits Be ate Fl iie ennt erre oes one uade 111 CommandS eoa Cotes etas eon adusta stes d et DotA eu tud trei etis 113 Advanced Features ise bt ot ada REO eta 115 Parto Templates oto orae etti du EM asi eA CR Qd nai 121 Temp lates Revisited nisim sirai sud ei o adt ite alse aust end darte 122 Part4 Computing Dalarnas ers toda 128 Computed EXPUESTOS ro cord 129 Ia oO 129 A Nt epis MIU Cs i e ennt 135 Relational Navigation oo ne Pe oe enis ire t O tdi ee bti etes 145 Simple Extended Poltica 147 How to Navigate With a Variable Pointer Field s 150 Relational Jumps Across Ple 151 Backward Extended PO as 152 Joiti Extended Potes ts 155 Mu ltiline Return Vales dad 156 backward POr 158 Computed field with Multiple Pointer return type sss 160 MSC Hleman FUNCHONS salda 162 How to Use MSC Fileman PUncuons anos 162 Documentation Conventions for MSC Fileman Functions 163 MS EPleman PU RCH ONS a tc 163 Part 5 Defining Dalai oco isti O a bodie Eei hasty 196 Data Dictionary Utilities cede etot tie torsion pad ep RA tae 197 Tist File Attributes OO s enc
126. A FORMAT INTERNAL or EXTERNAL Specify if the incoming data is in external form the way MSC Fileman would display it or internal form the way MSC Fileman would store it Unless you are knowledgeable about how MSC Fileman stores data you should choose EXTERNAL Also the incoming data is only validated by MSC Fileman if you choose EXTERNAL validation prevents you from putting invalid data into the file FOREIGN FORMAT Choose a Foreign Format entry whose settings match the ASCII format for the incoming records The only settings used from the Foreign Format entry are Record Delimiter Record Length Fixed and Quote Non numeric Fields Make sure the settings in the Foreign Format match the format of your incoming data Because some foreign applications export data in a different format than they import it a Foreign Format that works for export may not have the appropriate settings for import As an alternative to specifying a Foreign Format entry you can manually specify the settings for your incoming data in the three provided fields 1 Isthe data fixed length 2 If not what is the field delimiter 3 Are fields quoted 346 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide SOURCE FILE Enter the path and name of your source file the file containing the records to import MSC Fileman FILE Specify the destination file for the imported records FIELD SELECTION PAGE IMPORT TEMPLATE This is where y
127. A NEW FILE ENTRY LAYGO BE ALLPOWED NO WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 252 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Enter the name of the person who entered this order XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With POINTER TO A FILE type fields MSC Fileman asks you to enter the pointed to file name in the popup window The file that is pointed to in this case the NEW PERSON file 200 must already exist on your system If you enter a single question mark at this prompt you will be presented with a list of the available files from which you can choose By answering NO to the LAYGO question you insure that users who are editing the WHO ENTERED data are not able to add a new entry on the fly to the NEW PERSON file VARIABLE POINTER Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the ITEM ORDERED field 7 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of VARIABLE POINTER Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD ITEM ORDERED You will then be taken i
128. AME GROUP Select GROUP DEMOG DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter DATA TYPE OF NAME FREE TEXT DATE OF BIRTH and SEX can be added to the GROUP in the same way Now when using the Enter or Edit File Entries option you could say EDIT WHICH FIELD DEMOG 1 DEMOG NAME 2 DEMOG SEX 3 DEMOG DATE OF BIRTH EDIT WHICH FIELD lt Enter gt Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 55 NAME FMPATIENT ONE lt Enter gt SEX MALE lt Enter gt DATE OF BIRTH JAN 3 1955 lt Enter gt Changing a Field s DATA TYPE Value Within the Modify File Attributes option you can change the DATA TYPE field value itself There are limitations on the sort of changes you can make These are listed below You must be very careful in making such changes if you already have file data entered because there is no guarantee that the old data will match the newly specified criteria e g field length However if you do change a field definition you are asked if you want existing data checked for inconsistencies A list of any discrepancies is printed If more than one discrepancy is found you can save the list of discrepant entries in a template To generate this list later use the Verify Fields option on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY The following restrictions apply to changing the definitions of existing DATA TYPE field values in a file anuary 2015 241 J y MSC Fileman 22 2 Us
129. AR C INDEX OF FILE Choose E Edit D Delete C Create D Are you sure that you want to delete the CROSS REFERENCE NO YES New Style Cross references Two types of New Style cross references are available Regular and MUMPS They are like their Traditional cross reference counterparts but New Style cross references offer some unique advantages Compound Cross references You can create not only simple cross 266 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide references that are based on a single field but compound cross references cross references that are based on more than one field in a file For example in a regular New Style C index you can store both the Name and ID Number of a record as subscripts in a single index DIZ 1000 C FMPATIENT 25 A56789 14 DIZ 1000 C FMPATIENT 10 D1234 5 In order to create this kind of index with a Traditional cross reference you would have to create two MUMPS type cross references one on the NAME field and one on the ID Number field New Style cross references allow you to define this compound cross reference once as a regular index that MSC Fileman can use for lookup and sorting Field or Record Level Execution Since a Traditional cross reference is defined on a particular field the action associated with that cross reference is performed whenever the field is edited With New Style cross references you can spec
130. C Commands ieri uir eses 353 DOXPEE NO Field tau 362 DPDXPXTNO Ei toe Peeters e tette Be pu bb een 362 Define Foreign File Format DHOP neret eee tite 332 354 365 DELETE ACS Sinnen a 323 Dependency on Correct Data Communication see 327 Descriptive Sas ici enfe kt ek P dati re PRU er Elo bis n a ra add 31 OO AUC TS RN UM S 32 DEVICE Pl ia 341 DM A Oo A A O ee neal ala eta 341 DIRDE OPI ride 268 DTRDEX PO id 275p Display Filegram Template Op ono ust teret tete to passes e 388 391 DIU TILEEY Menta 123 202 241 259 262 268 274 277p 345 DIXREF ODLUOTL ini on 202 277 D ocutjentalloBsere i AS ted eh vit NEP du aed CONVENIOS iaa illa prr no RO AA Lilelviati FUnet OH att 163 BG c LC 353 IDE Z seca teeth e id aea de Mo WO Mab 36p 123 311 393 EDITA CHO TH aurea 303 Edit File Op HOR sacri eet uenis Pe haul ne toes A Edu A DA RET 278p A ete nett oe eg PO RAP VER PR MUR SITE ORTU Computed Ex pressiGns oeste tite eet ntt bitis eid 130 Enter or Edit File Entries Option 124 143 151p 155 157 236 240p 275 282 396 Examples f amuanie Fileand Held Creator 243 Join Extended ON Sita Relational Navigati n uoces tedio na ede a retis eese 156 Relational Navigation api rep 149 Exchange ID atas iceodi vau depuis pin HG E CP eA Di o o eruca ap IE What Applications Can You Exchange Data With 326 Export D
131. CHIVAL ACTIVITY File rire ettet nia 385 Atchivits Proces S AN CIP ONS isos nce hte beo A dt 371 Cancel Archival Selection Option eere 382 Considerations Before Archiving eee tetetntntatetan 369 Create Filegram Archiving Template Option sss 376 Find Archived Entries ODEHOER eese nomeo nennt er eee Ebr e edes 383 Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage Option 979 Print selected Entries ODDO ecce aao etr case a nter tenent 375 Purse Stored Entries Opos cd beet pen on 381 Select Entries to Archive ODEHORL icu oue dio il ee 371 Write Entries to Temporary Storage Optlon n esee benedi 377 Acha MBs tuii esate otis a ia Da SUN 369 371 376 385 ze M Nui c A e e N ENEE heh 327 340p 345p Backward Extended Pointers eee 153 311 333 backward Extended BOIWters cod iones aita amne e aD b ferae Relational NayigatiOn seio de 152 Binary Oper tor S eine eeen i dt 132 Boolean Operators EN 132 DIOWSOPIQVISdHDD e unter sette AAA A A AA 52 January 2015 419 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Index BUBLEELINACTOSSS eferenges c essetque erase pertenece pie pr tapa 264 Cancel Archival Selection Option eee erit nonostante 371 382 Cancel Extract Selection Op n edat deconed a uv eillcks busta esta Heure 324 CAPTIONED PRINT Lempira 24 CAPTIONED PRINT Temi plates dea 404 Cheek Fix DD Str ct re
132. Compare Merge File Entries option allows you to compare the data value of two entries before merging them into one entry Furthermore this option provides you with an opportunity to identify the data values from either entry that will be used to create the final merged entry Both of the entries involved must be in the same file to use this option Comparing Entries You can use the Compare Merge File Entries option as a simple tool to compare entries To do this 1 Identify a file 2 Identify the two entries to be compared 296 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 3 Answer NO to the MERGE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM prompt In this example below two similar entries in the SCHOLAR file are used Select TRANSFER OPTION COMPARE MERGE FILE ENTRIES COMPARE ENTRIES IN WHAT FILE SCHOLAR COMPARE SCHOLAR RU MSC Fileman responds to this abbreviated response with the matching entries in the list that follows 1 FMPATIENT 23 A 2 FMPATIENT 23 H CHOOSE 1 2 1 WITH SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 H NOTE Use this option ONLY DURING NON PEAK HOURS if merging entries in a file that is pointed to either by many files or by large files MERGE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM No Enter Here you choose whether to simply compare entries or to actually merge them If you are merging the process of repointing entries in other files from the merged from entry to the
133. D ENTRIES WOANHDUBWN Select Entries to Archive The Select Entries to Archive option creates the archiving activity It is used January 2015 371 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data similarly to the Search File Entries option The Select Entries to Archive option is the first step in developing an archiving activity and is very important since there cannot be any archiving without the SEARCH template created in this option TIP It s important to know which entries you want archived and where you want them stored before you start the archiving process This mandatory archiving option really performs three important functions 11 A search for file entries that meet your specified search criteria or condition truth test occurs first The results of this search are then stored in a template you specify You must store these results in a template REF For guidance on how to use the search option procedures see the Search chapter in the MSC Fileman User Manual 12 After storing the results of the search in a template a sort of the file by any field must occur This sort is as important as the search portion of this option Do not use any sort criteria that contains M code Be careful if you limit the sort range you will limit the entries selected for archiving You can delete unwanted entries later by using the Add Delete Selected Entries option 13 Finally a print of the fields to be archiv
134. DATE OF BIRTH field in the PATIENT file Select MSC Fileman Option PRINT lt Enter gt File Entries January 2015 13 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter SORT BY NAME DATE OF BIRTH START WITH DATE OF BIRTH FIRST Enter WITHIN DATE OF BIRTH SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME 1 NAME 2 NAME COMPONENTS 3 NAME ORDER CHOOSE 1 3 1 Enter NAME THEN PRINT FIELD SEX THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT LIST Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter The output then prints in the following order by DATE OF BIRTH PATIENT LIST FEB 12 2013 19 11 PAGE 1 NAME SEX DATE OF BIRTH OCT 14 1877 FMPATIENT 12 FEMALE DATE OF BIRTH NOV 3 1922 FMPATIENT 13 MALE DATE OF BIRTH APR 4 1933 FMPATIENT NINE MALE In the previous example the sort criterion DATE OF BIRTH is printed with every change in sort value MSC Fileman does this when a sort field is not specified as a print field To suppress the printing of sort values subheaders in the body of your report you can either Add the field you are sorting by to the print field list Place an at sign 0 in front of the field label at the SORT BY prompt In the previous example you would sort by DATE OF BIRTH instead of DATE OF BIRTH 14 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 U
135. DITION 2 OUTPUT TRANSFORM 3 HELP PROMPT 4 XECUTABLE HELP 8 READ ACCESS OPTIONAL 8 5 DELETE ACCESS OPTIONAL 9 WRITE ACCESS OPTIONAL 9 01 COMPUTED FIELDS USED 10 SOURCE 11 DESTINATION multiple 12 POINTER SCREEN 12 1 CODE TO SET POINTER SCREEN 12 2 EXPRESSION FOR POINTER SCREEN 20 GROUP multiple 50 DATE FIELD LAST EDITED 999 TRIGGERED BY POINTER multiple TYPE IN FRONT OF NUMERIC VALUED FIELD TO SORT FROM HI TO LO TYPE IN FRONT OF FIELD NAME TO GET SUBTOTALS BY THAT FIELD TO PAGE FEED ON EACH FIELD VALUE TO GET RANKING NUMBER TO SUPPRESS SUB HEADER TO FORCE SAVING SORT TEMPLATE TYPE TEMPLATE NAME IN BRACKETS TO SORT BY PREVIOUS SEARCH RESULTS SORT BY LABEL Enter START WITH LABEL FIRST Enter 208 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide FIRST PRINT ATTRIBUTE ANSWER WITH ATTRIBUTE NUMBER OR LABEL DO YOU WANT THE ENTIRE 36 ENTRY ATTRIBUTE LIST N Enter At this point you indicate the specific attributes of the fields that you want displayed Here help regarding the print formatting options will be displayed TYPE amp IN FRONT OF FIELD NAME TO GET TOTAL FOR THAT FIELD TO GET COUNT TO GET TOTAL amp COUNT TO GET MAX amp MIN TO FORCE SAVING PRINT TEMPLATE TYPE TEMPLATE NAME IN BRACKETS TO USE AN EXISTING PRINT TEMPLATE YOU CAN FOLLOW FIELD NAME WITH AND FO
136. E 10 394 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide BEGIN REPORTER 1001 0582 END REPORTER 1001 05 REPORTER 01 FMEMPLOYEE 10 SEND DAT Enter message action in IN basket IGNORE F Forward mail to S DIFG SRV HISTORY SENDING A MESSAGE View Filegram Option Entries are made into the FILEGRAM HISTORY file 41 12 at the sending site when the filegram is generated and at the receiving site by the S DIFG SRV HISTORY server The View Filegram option allows the filegram sender or recipient to inspect the filegram Select this option and answer the Select FILEGRAM HISTORY prompt with a question mark to get a listing of available filegram histories You can see the filegram history just created by using the lt Spacebar gt lt Enter gt or another filegram history by entering its internal entry number or date time The following example shows you what a simple without pointers filegram looks like The View Filegram option will show this information to a filegram s sender The receiver sees additional information about the transmission of the mail message including the network mail path taken to the target system FILEGRAM for entry 334 in CHANGE FILE 1001 Sent on 25 AUG 1989 09 00 by FMUSER FOUR SDAT CHANGE 1001 N CHANGE 1001 L 334 BEGIN CHANGE 1001 1 SPECIFIER VERSION 1 17 4 END CHANGE 1001 VERSION 1 17 4 ROUTINE 3 DICATT5 CHANGE 4 Changed DIED to DIEO DATE CHANGED
137. E A ee 4 12 12 2 3 2 8 2 8 2 3 3 4 3 4 2 2 5 3 0 0 34 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide posto uo o deme eee eec is o TEMP 1 3 X AXIS WARD LOCATION Y AXIS ROOM BED Histogram If you subtotal by one or more fields in a sort you can get Histograms for the fields that are preceded by amp or qualifiers in the corresponding print The Histograms that you can produce depend on which print qualifier is used AOS Produces a Count Histogram Produces a Sum Histogram Produces Count Sum and Mean Histograms Produces Count Sum and Mean Histograms Here is an example of a using a subtotal in a print and then producing a Count Histogram Select MSC Fileman Option PRINT File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SIGN ON LOG SORT BY DATE TIME NODE NAW START WITH NODE NAME FIRST lt Enter Subtotal on a field in WITHIN NODE NAME SORT BY lt Enter gt the sort FIRST PRINT FIELD DATE TIM THEN PRINT FIELD NOD THEN PRINT FIELD lt Enter M Use the print qualifier so you can create a Count Histogram on the NODE NAME field Heading S C SIGN ON LOG STATISTICS Replace Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter HMMM JUST A MOMENT PLEASE January 2015 35 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data i Output is generated here
138. E can point to a single record in only one file The PATIENT file 200 for example might use a VARIABLE POINTER field type to identify a provider the provider might be a Staff Provider stored in the PROVIDER file 6 or an Outside Provider stored in another file For example if you are working in a PATIENT file 200 entry and you need information that explains how to look up a name listed in one of several files To get help simply enter a single question mark at the PROVIDER prompt Now on your screen you will see instructions that explain how to choose a provider from either of the two files being pointed to PROVIDER Enter one of the following S EntryName to select a Staff Provider O EntryName to select an Outside Provider To see the entries in any particular file type lt Prefix gt With VARIABLE POINTER fields you need to use a PREFIX in addition to an entry name to select an entry In this example the online help tells you that to select a Staff Provider prefix the provider s name with S To select an Outside Provider prefix the provider s name with O You can enter a PREFIX and a question mark to get a list of entries in a particular pointed to file For example if you enter S you can get a list of all Staff Providers Likewise you can enter 5S FMPROVIDER to get a list of all Staff Providers whose last names are FMPROVIDER You can also enter S FMPROVIDER ONE to select a
139. ELDS NO Enter DEVICE Enter Press the Enter key at the DEVICE prompt so that you can continue to control how the merge is to proceed Since the merge is interactive it is not appropriate to release control to a printer or other output device While working at a keyboard printer is possible it is not recommended because you will not be able to monitor the selection of data values that is described below MSC Fileman will display the data from the entries being merged Brackets indicate the values that will be used to create the final merged entry If the data values in both entries are the same no brackets are shown To start the values for FMPATIENT23 A are bracketed because that entry was chosen as the default entry To switch the value that will go into the merged entry enter that field s number The following example shows the initial defaults in brackets and the response to switching the value for the SSN field COMPARISON OF SCHOLAR FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 1 January 2015 299 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 1 NAME FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 2 SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 3 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY 4 DATE OF BIRTH 1872 Default is enclosed in brackets e g FMPATIENT 23 A Enter 1 4 to change a default value to exit report RETURN to continue 2 COMPAR
140. FMPATIENT NINE MALE FMPATIENT 10 FEMALE This simple example of a report is generated by the dialogue that follows It 12 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide prints information from all the entries in the PATIENT file ordered by NAME the 01 field in the file Only data from the NAME and SEX fields are printed as requested at the PRINT FIELD prompts Select MSC Fileman Option PRINT Enter File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter SORT BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME FIRST Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME 1 NAME 2 NAME COMPONENTS 3 NAME ORDER CHOOSE 1 3 1 Enter NAME THEN PRINT FIELD SEX THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT LIST Enter DEVICE NOTE You would have received information about every patient in the file not just these four You could have asked for several more fields to be printed They would appear as columns of output left to right in the order specified Sorting Specifying SORT BY Fields Sorting determines the order that records are printed in your reports You can accept the default order by the 01 field or you can specify your own sorting order The sort can be a simple sort based on only one field or you can sort based on the values of several fields For example if you want to print the entries in order from oldest to youngest patient you could sort the report by date of birth the
141. File 200 gt lt F1 gt H Help SORT BY DATE TIME OF ATTEMPT From JAN 1 1999 To T_ WITHIN DATE TIME OF ATTEMPT SORT BY USER From To WITHIN USER SORT BY TYPE OF FAILED ATTEMPT From To lt T T T T T T T The specifications for each successive level of sorting are indented further to the right You can add or insert sort levels however each sort group of lines must be indented further to the right than the sort group above it For each level of sorting except when the sorting is on a Boolean value there should be a From line and a To line You can also have a fourth line that says ASK or DON T ASK for sort ranges other than first to last Remember to indent each line in a sort group by the same number of spaces January 2015 127 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 3 Templates 128 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Computed Expressions You can use computed expressions in several places within MSC Fileman to obtain manipulate modify and format data Computed expressions consist of one or more elements linked together with operators Most computed expressions return a value after performing the actions you have requested The way this result is used or displayed depends on where you have used the computed expression Syntax Elements of Computed Expressions
142. File Entries option see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the MSC Fileman User Manual The Export Tool creates a specially formatted print output Some limitations apply to data exports that do not apply to setting up a regular print e g WORD PROCESSING type fields cannot be exported Some capabilities are available when exporting that are not when you are printing e g the records you export can be longer than 245 characters if you are using a delimited format see the description of the Maximum Output Length FOREIGN FORMAT attribute below These differences are discussed below 330 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide The steps to export data are 7 Make sure there is a FOREIGN FORMAT file 4 44 entry available to export your data in the format expected by the receiving application 8 Select the fields you want to export Select Fields for Export option This creates a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template 9 Create an EXPORT Template This is where you combine the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template with a desired FOREIGN FORMAT 10 Export Data option This is where you select which entries to export and perform the export Make Sure a FOREIGN FORMAT File Entry is Available First you need to determine an ASCII data format some form of delimited or fixed length that your foreign application will recognize This is the format you will need the Export Tool to generate
143. Fileman EDIT WHICH FIELD prompt Enter or Edit File Entries option SEARCH FOR FIELD prompt Search File Entries option SORT BY prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option PRINT FIELD prompt Print File Entries and Search File Entries option Join Extended Pointer You can establish an extended pointer link even if there is no pre existing pointer relationship between the two files You use a value from one file to do a lookup in a second file Suppose you store in the PAY FACTOR file a list of factors for calculating taxes Each entry in this file corresponds to a different pay scale In the PERSONNEL file you have a field called PAYSCALE You want to retrieve the value of a field DEDUCTION in the PAY FACTOR entry that equals the PAYSCALE field for each entry in the PERSONNEL file You can create a COMPUTED field expression in the PERSONNEL file COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION PAYSCALE IN PAY FACTOR FILE DEDUCTION O NOTE PAYSCALE was not defined as pointing to the PAY FACTOR file The link to that file is made by the COMPUTED field definition PAYSCALE could itself be a COMPUTED field In this situation the value of the PAYSCALE field in the PERSONNEL file is used to do a normal lookup in the PAY FACTOR file using all lookup type cross references January 2015 155 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data In database terminology this extended pointer capability is similar
144. Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Import Data DDMP IMPORT The Import Tool lets you import records stored in an ASCII data file into a MSC Fileman file The Import Tool imports records from an ASCII data file by adding them as new records to the MSC Fileman file in question Existing records in the destination MSC Fileman file are never edited or updated and the Import Tool does not prevent duplicate records from being added Importing data records from an ASCII file is a four step process as described below Generate ASCII Source File Generate your source file from your non MSC Fileman application containing the records to be imported Generate the file with one record per line with the fields in each record being set off using either the delimited or January 2015 345 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data fixed length method The last record in the file must be terminated with the appropriate EOL end of line character s for your operating system Once you generate your ASCII source file you need to move it to a disk that is accessible from the computer system running MSC Fileman Your IRM should be able to assist you with this Specify Data Format Source File and Destination File Invoke MSC Fileman s Import Data option It loads a two page Screenman form On page one of the form you need to specify the data format source file and destination file for your import DAT
145. Fileman restores the fields that make up the key to their pre edited values and prints a message For example Select ZZTEST NAME 16 lt Enter gt FMPATIENT THREE 9900 SEP 03 1932 ID NUMBER 9900 9800 DATE SEP 3 1932 1 21 1932 lt Enter gt JAN 21 1932 NOTE x Some of the previous edits are not valid because they create one or more duplicate keys Some fields have been restored to their pre edited values 78 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Do you want to see a list of those fields YES Enter The following field s have been restored to their pre edited values File ZZTEST File 16999 Key A Record FMPATIENT THREE 16 Field ID NUMBER 1 Invalid value 9800 Restored to 9900 Field DATE 2 Invalid value JAN 21 1932 Restored to SEP 03 1932 Special Responses to Field Prompts Deleting a Field s Value When you want to delete an answer previously entered without substituting any other answer enter an at sign as a response to that prompt DATE OF BIRTH May 21 1946 SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE YES In this example the date on file would be erased there is no answer to the DATE OF BIRTH question its value is now null You are asked to confirm the deletion this gives you a chance to change your mind before deleting the field Jumping to Another Field wi
146. Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data encounter a Multiple to indicate that you are choosing among one of several possible values on file Select APPOINTMENTS It for a given Multiple more than one entry has already been entered the most recently created entry is displayed as a default To see the list of entries already in the Multiple enter two question marks at the Select prompt Because they are so useful Subfiles Multiples are widely used throughout VistA They are usually straightforward to use because their structure as Subfiles mirrors the real world structure of the information For example for a purchase order the top level record would be the purchase order Because a single purchase order needs a place to store as few or as many items as are requested the purchase order record has a Multiple to record the order items for the purchase order Subfiles can themselves contain Subfiles creating additional levels in files 70 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Fileman Prompts Many VISTA application packages have a scrolling mode interface Scrolling mode works as follows The computer puts a prompt on your screen Youenter a response to the prompt e The computer places another prompt on the screen scrolling down one line Previous prompts move up and eventually off of your screen In scrolling mode promp
147. INE FIELD ORDER 4 FIELD NUMBER 4 CAPTION c CHANGE FIELD ORDER 5 FIELD NUMBER 6 CAPTION c DATE CHANGED FIELD ORDER 6 FIELD NUMBER 7 CAPTION c PROGRAMMER FIELD ORDER 7 FIELD NUMBER 11 CAPTION c DESCRIPTION ORDER 2 FILEGRAM FILE 1001 05 LEVEL 2 PARENT 1001 CROSS REFERENCE MULTIPLE USER RESPONSE TO GET HERE REPORTER DATE LAST STORED AUG 24 1989 FIELD ORDER 1 FIELD NUMBER 01 CAPTION c REPORTER FIRST PRINT FIELD S DIFGT 315 D FG DIFGB X COMPILED c N The code in the FIRST PRINT FIELD has special meaning to MSC Fileman Specifiers Option The filegram sender uses the Specifiers option to identify a particular field in the file as a reference point to use when installing the filegram The value of this field in the filegram is compared to values in the entries at the target site The values must match for a filegram to be installed If the specifier has a unique value for every entry in the file and is cross referenced that cross reference is used to locate an entry This reduces the search time and increases accuracy Specifiers can be compared to identifiers unlike identifiers which are used for user interaction purposes specifiers are used for transaction purposes Specifiers are optional The dialogue that follows creates a specifier in a sample PATIENT file Select FILEGRAM OPTION 5 Enter SPECIFIERS 392 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User R
148. ISON OF SCHOLAR FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 1 SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 1 NAME FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H 2 SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 34 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY 4 DATE OF BIRTH 1872 Default is enclosed in brackets e g FMPATIENT 23 A Enter 1 4 to change a default value to exit report RETURN to continue Enter o NOTE The DATE OF BIRTH field from FMPATIENT 23 H is bracketed because the default entry has no value for that field it is null When the default merged to entry has no data in a field data will always be brought over from the merged from entry You have no control over this aspect of the merging Even if you attempt to switch the data value to the null value and remove the brackets the data will still be brought into the merged to field 300 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide If there is more than one screen of field information MSC Fileman will display additional screens In this case there is one field that is a Multiple The Compare Merge File Entries option neither displays data from WORD PROCESSING or Multiple fields nor allows the selection of data for the final merge to entry The number of subentries in the Multiples of the two fields is displayed COMPARISON OF PATIENT FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 2 SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H NOTE Multipl
149. January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide HISTORY 1 gt Owing to poverty in early youth patient seems not to lt Enter gt 2 gt have had proper diet Since achieving economic success lt Enter gt 3 gt his diet has been adequate but traces of original lt Enter gt 4 gt deficiency remain lt Enter gt 5 gt lt Enter gt EDIT Option lt Enter gt Select DIAGNOSIS Revising Existing Text To revise the contents of the WORD PROCESSING field you need to call up each individual line that you want to edit and then edit each line To revise existing text perform the following procedure Atthe EDIT Option prompt enter the letter E for Edit a Line Replace With e At the Edit line prompt enter the number of the line you need to revise Beneath the EDIT Option and Edit line prompts you see the line of text that you identified by number and you see the Replace prompt Enter a string in the current line to be replaced Ifthe string you enter is found in the current line you set the With prompt Enter a string to replace the original string Theline is now updated and you are prompted for another string to replace If you are done editing the line simply press the Enter key Shortcut Enter Line Number to Edit at EDIT Option Prompt There s a shortcut to edit a particular line At the EDIT Option prompt January 2015 111 MSC
150. LD PROVIDER THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT LIST Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter PATIENT LIST FEB 12 2013 18 41 PAGE 1 8 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide NAME DATE OF BIRTH PROVIDER FMPATIENT ONE 11 20 1950 For more information on customizing output print fields see the Print chapter of this manual It provides detailed information about the different choices you can make at the PRINT FIELD prompt to display your information in different ways Choose Your Own Device CAUTION Do not use STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT If you enter YES at the STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT prompt output is sent to the HOME device which ordinarily is the terminal you are using To send output to a printer you need to answer NO at the STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT prompt This means you must choose your own print fields as described above Doing this allows you to select the output device however If you answer NO to the STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT prompt you can still get CAPTIONED output however To do this choose the CAPTIONED PRINT template at the first PRINT FIELD prompt as shown below Enter a left bracket and the word CAPTIONED CAPTIONED OUTPUT from the template works exactly as if you had answered YES at the STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT to request CAPTIONED OUTPUT STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPU
151. LL TERMINAL USER BE ALLOWED TO SELECT PROPER ENTRY IN RADIOLOGY EXAM FILE YES Enter YES DO YOU WANT TO PERMIT ADDING A NEW RADIOLOGY EXAM ENTRY NO Enter 158 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide EDIT WHICH RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD DATE OF EXAM THEN EDIT WHICH RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD RESULTS THEN EDIT WHICH RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD Enter THEN EDIT FIELD ATTENDING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD Enter STORE THESE FIELDS IN TEMPLATE PATIENT EXAM To use this template you Specify the patient s name to edit Select one of the RADIOLOGY EXAM file s entries that point back to that patient Edit data within that selected entry in the RADIOLOGY EXAM file Return to edit another field in the PATIENT file A sample editing session using this INPUT template looks like this INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL PATIENT EXAM Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 11 NAME FMPATIENT 11 Enter Select RADIOLOGY EXAM CHOOSE FROM ls DEC 4 1984 2 OCT 1 1985 CHOOSE 1 2 2 DATE OF EXAM OCT 1 1985 Enter RESULTS NORMAL ATTENDING PHYSICIAN FMPATIENT Enter As indicated by this example the only RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries you were allowed to choose were the two that pointed back to the selected patient FMPATIENT 11 Each file for the purpose of this editing sequence is considered a subfile of the original so that whe
152. Line s to Paste Buffer gt If you would like to copy all of the text in your report you can enter an asterisk Otherwise you can enter the first and last line you would like to copy separated by a colon like this Copy Text Line s to Paste Buffer 23 10 If you would like to append your text to what s already in the clipboard rather than replacing what s in the clipboard use the letter A with your command like this Copy Text Line s to Paste Buffer gt 3 10A You can use the A with specific line numbers or with the asterisk If at any time you would like to see what s already in the clipboard press F1 V The Browser will switch from your report to the clipboard so you can see what s there To return to your report press lt F1 gt E You can paste the text from your clipboard into any word processing field using the Screen Editor Place the cursor where you want the copied text to appear and press F1 V Search While in the Browser you can search for a specific string To use this feature press lt F1 gt F for Find At the prompt enter the string you would like to search for You can specify the direction of the search by ending your string with lt ArrowUp gt or ArrowDown If you just press the Return key after the string the default search direction is down To find the same string again you can press lt F1 gt N for the Next occurrence of the string Janu
153. M PM hour minute AM PM or hour minute second AM PM If you do omit an AM PM notation the following assumptions are made e f you enter a single digit for the hour a time between 6AM and 6PM is used Thus T 330 or T 3 30 means today at 3 30 PM and T 945 or T99 45 means today at 9 45 AM e f you enter two digits for the hour the actual hour entered is used as if military time were being used Thus T 0330 or T 03 30 means today at 3 30 AM As with dates there are supported abbreviations you can use when entering times in DATE TIME fields For example to enter the present moment you can enter the word NOW To enter an hour from the present moment enter NOW 1H To enter an hour ago from the present moment enter NOW 1H You can also combine NOW with D for day and M for month and apostrophe for minute You can also enter MID for 12 a m and NOON for 12 p m Abbreviations for Times Abbreviation Meaning NOW 3 Present time plus three minutes NOW 1H Present time plus one hour NOW 3D Present time plus three days NOW 4M Present time plus four months 60 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide NOON Today at 12 00 noon MID Today at 24 00 midnight NUMERIC Fields DATA TYPE field values of NUMERIC work very much like FREE TEXT fields except that input is restricted to valid numbers There can also be restrictions as to
154. MATCHES FOUND Press RETURN to continue The search found two entries that matched the search conditions i e DATE ACCESS CODE LAST CHANGED greater than 2 2 99 and ACCESS CODE not null Details and Features Sorting and Searching As you may recall you can print a subset of entries from a file by sorting i e printing only those entries that fall between a sort from value and a sort to value Searches also select a subset of entries from a file although with more flexibility than with sorting When you print your output from a search you are also given a chance to sort the output This means that while searching selects a subset of entries to print through sorting you can further restrict that subset of entries that is going to print How does sorting affect the output of the searches The answer is that MSC Fileman uses both your search and sort order to select entries You enter the search criteria before you enter the sort order However the selection of entries indicated in the sort START WITH GO TO dialogue sorting is done first after which the search conditions are applied to all remaining entries to determine the final set of matching entries 44 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide SEARCH Templates You can save the results of your search in a SEARCH template Doing this allows you to 3 Reuse your search criteria to perform another search 4 Reuse
155. MSC File Manager 22 2 User Reference Guide January 2015 OSEHRA AA E Project Open Source Electronic Health Record Alliance OCopyright 2015 by VISTA Expertise Network Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 4 0 Details are available at http creativecommons org licenses by sa 4 0 The developers of MSC Fileman 22 2 and the authors of this manual would like to extend their thanks to Medsphere Systems Corporation for their generous contribution of the MSC Fileman 1051 codebase to the OSEHRA community on 21 November 2014 and for their decade of support for Fileman guru George Timson Revision History Date Description Language Authors January 2015 Manual English US Kathy Ice and Frederick D S created for Marshall compiled from MSC 22 2 work by Tami Winn Michael update Ogi Thom Blom Susan Strack Jack Schram and Gary Beuschel Cy Medsphere E OSEHRA Transforming Healthcare Through Open Source Open Source Electronic Health Record Alliance y va NE vista Expertise Network Fourth Watch Software AN amp Fourth Watch T Ti ge rTec h Business Continuity Services Trusted Talented Tireless ASTUTE SEMANTICS Contents Dio enses iut O at s drca ud re teen 1 TIPO HCH OM E RR MM RET 2 Wbhatis MSC PIHletriatt oos eerte oi es 2 Before Yo Stata 2 Part t Reading Data i trier ne pter an hos nm teas 4 JERO EMi NE ccs vaste EEE O EU 5 Ingu
156. MSC Fileman and the foreign application A glitch in the communication of data can cause data exchange to fail For example suppose the foreign application expects the fields in records January 2015 327 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data you are exporting to be separated or delimited by the Tab character TAB The Export Tool can output a TAB between each field s data value However if you use a communication program s screen capture facility to create a file of the exported data and if that communication program automatically changes lt TAB gt s into a certain number of spaces to align text the exported data will be corrupted and the import will fail You should be familiar with your importing or exporting application and with any communications programs that you are using Knowledge of all the applications involved starting with MSC Fileman and its Import and Export Tools increases the likelihood of a successful transfer of data Data Formats Delimited Data Format Suppose you have a record with LASTNAME FMPATIENT FIRSTNAME ONE AGE 36 In delimited data format you choose a delimiter character to place between field values Let s use a comma as the delimiter character A comma is then inserted between each of a record s fields to delimit them The resulting record exported in comma delimited format would look like FMPATIENT ONE 36 Groups of records
157. MSC Fileman s inquiry capabilities Anoption that has been set up already to allow you to inquire to entries from a particular file e MSC Fileman s Inquire to File Entries option which lets you inquire to any file to which you have access In either case use of MSC Fileman s inquire feature is very similar In most cases the only difference is that with the Inquire to File Entries option you have to choose which file to inquire to Inquire to File Entries Option The quickest way to display the data for one file entry or for a small number of entries is to use the Inquire to File Entries option This option lets you choose a set of entries to display and choose the fields that you want to see for each entry For example Select MSC Fileman Option INQ Enter uire to File Entries January 2015 5 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT ONE ANOTHER ONE FMPATIENT TWO ANOTHER ONE FMPATIENT THREE ANOTHER ONE Enter STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT Yes Enter Include COMPUTED fields N Y R B NO Enter a code from the list Select one of the following Computed Fields and Record Number IEN DISPLAY AUDIT TRAIL No Enter NO NUMBER 180 SEX MALE 04 04 1944 NUMBER 229 SEX MALE 01 01 1962 NUMBER 229 SEX FEMALE 01 25 1952 Xes N NO No record number IEN no Compu
158. Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For examples of entering a field attributes in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section January 2015 221 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Screen Mode Field Editing When using the Modify File Attributes option you can make your field entries in the traditional Scrolling Mode or choose to create modify or review a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode To make your entries in Screen Mode simply press the Enter key to accept the default response at the Do you want to use the screen mode version YES prompt The following example illustrates using Screen Mode when editing the 01 field of the ORDER file 100 Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Select FIELD 01 Enter ORDER You will then be taken into Screen Mode where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 01 in File 100 FIELD LABEL 993 DATA TYPE NUMERIC TITLE AUDIT AUDIT CONDITION READ ACCESS DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY YES HELP PROMPT Enter the order number XECUTABLE HELP 222 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide
159. N SORRY You cannot jump to another file when selecting fields for export THEN EXPORT FIELD SE RELIGION CLASSIFICATION 1 5 THEN EXPORT FIELD DIAGNOSIS lt Enter gt multiple THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD DIAGNOSIS THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD HISTORY Enter word processing SORRY You cannot choose a word processing field for export THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD AGE AT ONSET THEN EXPORT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD lt Enter gt THEN EXPORT FIELD lt Enter gt STORE EXPORT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE PATIENT TEST Are you adding PATIENT TEST as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No Y Enter Yes Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS templates are sometimes referred to as PRINT templates in the user dialogue This is because they are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 4 O NOTE Even though you cannot jump to the RELIGION file 13 using the RELIGION field which is a pointer to the RELIGION file you can retrieve data from that file by using extended pointer syntax 334 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide REF For more information on pointer syntax see the Relational Navigation section You can edit a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template The editing must occur in the Export Data option not in the standard Print File Entries option To edit one enter the template name at the FIRST EXPORT FIELD prompt preceded by a left bracket
160. N DATE MULTIPLE POINTER p MULTIPLE POINTER H oHUOuUZU TYPE OF RESULT STRING NUMERIC For numeric results you have other questions to answer First you are asked to how many decimal places to round the result In this case you want the result rounded to a whole number NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT ONLY ANSWER IF NUMBER VALUED O January 2015 137 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Then you must indicate when you want the rounding to occur SHOULD VALUE ALWAYS BE INTERNALLY ROUNDED TO 0 DECIMAL PLACES No Enter No Since the value of a COMPUTED field can be used in other calculations you need to indicate when rounding should occur If you accept the default i e No rounding will not be done when the COMPUTED field is used in other calculations A YES answer to this prompt means that you do want the rounded value used in calculations Usually you do not want values rounded at interim steps in a series of calculations Thus usually you will accept the No default When a COMPUTED field is printed the value will always be rounded to the number of decimal places you specify WHEN TOTALLING THIS FIELD SHOULD THE SUM BE COMPUTED FROM THE SUMS OF THE COMPONENT FIELDS No Enter If your computed expression involves division or multiplication you will be asked how the field should be totaled You can total the values of a field
161. N Ol The Merge process is described in detail via an example below MERGE THESE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM NO YES 1 FMPATIENT 23 A 2 FMPATIENT 23 H After choosing a file and two entries to compare enter YES at the MERGE THESE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM NO prompt to merge the entries as well as compare them You now specify which of the two entries will be used to supply the default values The entry you choose will be the merge to entry that will contain the merged data 298 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide NOTE Records will be merged into the entry selected for the default WHICH ENTRY SHOULD BE USED FOR DEFAULT VALUES 1 OR 2 1 Records will be merged into FMPATIENT 23 A You next indicate the disposition of the merge from entry You can choose to delete it or retain it unmodified You can also redirect pointers that point to the merged from entry to point to the merge to entry Free text pointers will not be redirected DO YOU WANT TO DELETE THE MERGED FROM ENTRY AFTER MERGING YES DO YOU WANT TO REPOINT ENTRIES POINTING TO THIS ENTRY YES ENTER FILE TO EXCLUDE FROM REPOINT MERGE lt Enter gt NOTE You can also choose to exclude pointers from specified files in the repointing process In this example Error Reference source not found all pointers will be repointed DO YOU WANT TO DISPLAY ONLY THE DISCREPANT FI
162. N argument is the general format You must enter the function s name in uppercase the case of the arguments depends on the circumstances Arguments are always surrounded by parentheses p MSC Fileman Functions o REF For a description of each function see the MSC Fileman Functions chapter in the HTML version of the MSC Fileman Advanced Programmer Manual located on the MSC Fileman Home Page at http VISTA med va gov MSC Fileman index asp January 2015 163 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Date Time Environmental File and File Data 164 Part 4 Computing Data BETWEEN DATE DAYOFWEEK MID MINUTES MONTH MONTHNAME NOON NOW NUMDATE NUMDATE4 NUMDAY NUMMONTH NUMYEAR NUMYEAR4 RANGEDATE TIME TODAY YEAR BREAKABLE CLOSE SITENUMBER USER COUNT DUPLICATED FILE INTERNAL LAST MAXIMUM MINIMUM nTH NEXT PREVIOUS TOTAL January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data Categor Mathematical MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Function ABS BETWEEN MAX MIN MODULO SQUAREROOT Printing Related Functions IOM PAGE String DUP LOWERCASE PADRIGHT REPLACE REVERSE STRIPBLANKS TRANSLATE UPPERCASE Temporary Data Storage PARAM and SETPARAM VAR and SET M Related Functions January 2015 SA SCII C HAR SE XTRACT F IND H OROLOG I O J OB J USTIFY L ENGTH P IECE R ANDOM S ELECT S TORAGE X 165 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Refe
163. NAME FIRST FMPATIENT A GO TO NAME LAST FMPATIENT Z Selecting All Entries with the Same Value for One Field A simple kind of selecting can be done to choose only those entries that have a particular value for a field For example to list only those patients 16 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide who have a DIAGNOSIS equal to CANCER you can sort as in the example below START WITH DIAGNOSIS FIRST CANCER GO TO DIAGNOSIS LAST CANCER Other Ways of Selecting Entries The START WITH GO TO dialogue can be used to do sophisticated selecting from a file Computed expressions can be entered at the prompts to filter the entries to be printed These powerful techniques are discussed in the Computed Expressions chapter of the MSC Fileman Advanced User Manual You can also use MSC Fileman s search functions to select entries for printing For more information on MSC Fileman s search functions see the Search chapter of this manual Including Entries with Null Fields in Your Sort Start With O When you sort a report on a particular field if any record in the file has no value in that field that record will be skipped and not printed if you accept the default sort start value FIRST In other words in a print from the PATIENT file if you sort on the PROVIDER field start sorting from the default of FIRST and there are some patients with nothing in their P
164. NAMES If this field is answered YES the user is prompted for a field name for each exported field when the EXPORT template is created The field names are stored in the NAME OF FOREIGN FIELD field in the EXPORT FIELD Multiple in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 1 4 e REF For one way to use this information see the discussion in the FILE HEADER section QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS When importing data MSC Fileman will ignore the field delimiter in a quoted string when this field is set to YES When exporting data if you want all values that do not belong to a DATA TYPE field of NUMERIC to be surrounded by quotation marks answer YES to this field 358 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Many importing applications treat data within quotation marks in a special way Sometimes such data is automatically considered to be text as opposed to numbers Also the importer may ignore the field delimiter character if it falls within a quoted string Quoting a null value from a non numeric field will result in two double quotes being exported During export the DATA TYPE field value is automatically determined for fields in the primary file and its Multiples DATA TYPE fields of NUMERIC are considered NUMERIC There may be other fields that you want treated as NUMERIC For example COMPUTED type fields with numeric results Fields referenced by the extended pointer syntax Replies to t
165. NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS 0 SOURCE January 2015 257 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE YES MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 1 and 9999999 0 Decimal Digits XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode while editing a sub field of a Multiple you will notice that the heading at the top of the screen reminds you that you are now editing a field within a Multiple e g Field 01 in Sub File 100 045 of File 100 Also whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With NUMERIC type fields MSC Fileman asks you to enter the INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND e g set to 1 and the INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND e g set to 9999999 In addition you are asked if the numeric value is a dollar amount and if decimal digits will be allowed i e the MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS A default help prompt is automatically written for you with the DATA TYPE field of NUMERIC In this case the English message Type a Number between 1 and 9999999 0 Decimal Digits has been built automatically from the specifications As always you can accept the default help prompt or change it using the Replace With syntax NOTE This help information is displayed when the
166. ORT Template Ordinarily you are only asked whether to save your sort criteria in a SORT template if you enter three or more fields at the SORT BY prompts January 2015 19 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data However to force this question to be asked enter a right bracket by itself at one SORT BY prompt No matter how few fields you sort by you ll still be prompted to save your sort criteria in a SORT template SORT BY NAME SORT BY NAME Reusing Sort Criteria in New Reports The reason to save sort criteria in a SORT template is so that you can reuse your sort criteria in a new report from the same file To reuse a SORT template as the sort criteria in a new report at the SORT BY prompt in the new report enter a left bracket plus the template name OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter SORT BY NAME ADDRESS LIST Enter Dec 08 1995 07 53 User 34 File 200 WANT TO EDIT ADDRESS LIST TEMPLATE NO Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD Choosing Print Fields Specifying Fields to Print After you have specified the order in which the output should occur you are asked to list the fields you want displayed for each file entry In the simplest case fields are identified by their label If you enter a single question mark at the prompt a list of all the fields in the file is displayed If you enter the name of a multiple you are asked for the su
167. ORY is associated with it the value of this extended pointer expression would be null January 2015 157 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Multiples You can use the simple pointer syntax to get data from Multiples of files pointed to by other files The RADIOLOGY EXAM file described above points to the PATIENT file by way of the EXAMINEE field In the PATIENT file there is a DIAGNOSIS Multiple You could obtain a list of diagnoses associated with RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries by doing the following Select OPTION PRINT FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE RADIOLOGY EXAM Enter SORT BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME FIRST Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD TEST NUMBER THEN PRINT FIELD EXAMINEE DIAGNOSIS THEN PRINT FIELD Enter HEADING RADIOLOGY EXAM LIST Enter STORE PRINT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE Exam Diagnoses For each entry in the RADIOLOGY EXAM file EXAMINEE points to an entry in the PATIENT file The diagnoses associated with that patient are returned as the Multiline output of the expression EXAMINEE DIAGNOSIS Backward Pointer The following example shows how you can use the cross referenced Backward Pointer that yields a Multiline response in an INPUT template INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL NAME THEN EDIT FIELD RADIOLOGY EXAM By RADIOLOGY EXAM do you mean the RADIOLOGY EXAM File pointing via its EXAMINEE Field YES Enter WI
168. OUTPUT LENGTH 100 Export Template created The Export Tool checks to make sure that your SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template does not contain fields from Subfiles Multiples that are not descendent from each other If you have not followed that restriction you will receive an error message The SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template would have to be modified Choose Entries Export Data In the final step to export data use the Export Data option to select which entries from the file to export and then perform the export First choose which entries to export with a SEARCH dialogue then choose the order of the exported entries with a SORT BY dialogue you are not given the SORT BY dialogue if you are exporting fields from Subfiles Finally specify the device to send the exported data to During either the Search or Sort process you can use previously created SEARCH and SORT templates Those templates need not have been originally made during a data export however SORT templates that contain unacceptable qualifiers should not be used At the SORT BY prompt you can only use the following subset of sort qualifiers AAA To not sort Used when you want to use the FROM TO 338 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide EE dialogue to restrict the entries to be exported E jmsminmveseoder To sort on the first n characters only To sort following strict ASCII sorting sequence
169. RAM Are you adding ZZTEST FILEGRAM as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No Y The template for your filegram is now set up Edit this template just like you would any other PRINT template O NOTE You do not have to include the 01 field because it is automatically included for use as a lookup value To send logical records in a filegram simply use file navigation to and from existing files at the SEND FIELD prompts O REF For a discussion of relational navigation using forward and backward pointers see the Relational Navigation section Display Filegram Template Option The Display Filegram Template option displays the FILEGRAM type template in a two column format like the Inquire to File Entries option Multiple type fields are shown last in the display no matter what their field number Here is an example of the output produced by the Display Filegram Template option Select FILEGRAM OPTION DISPLAY FILEGRAM TEMPLATE SELECT FILEGRAM TEMPLATE ZZTEST FILEGRAM NAME ZZTEST FILEGRAM DATE CREATED AUG 24 1989 READ ACCESS FILE 1001 USER 29 WRITE ACCESS DATE LAST USED AUG 24 1989 ORDER 1 FILEGRAM FILE 1001 LEVEL 1 DATE LAST STORED AUG 24 1989 FIELD ORDER 1 FIELD NUMBER 01 January 2015 391 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data CAPTION c NAME FIELD ORDER 2 FIELD NUMBER 1 CAPTION c VERSION FIELD ORDER 3 FIELD NUMBER 3 CAPTION c ROUT
170. RDEX located on MSC Fileman s Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY to re index all cross references only those New Style cross references that contain an R in Activity will be fired If you explicitly select a cross reference in an EN DIK EN1 DIK or ENALL DIK call or in the Re Index File option DIRDEX on MSC Fileman s Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY that cross reference is fired regardless of its Activity Also when a field is edited MSC Fileman ignores Activity and fires all cross references on that field though you can control whether a cross reference is fired by entering Set and Kill Conditions O REF For more information on the Re Index File option and limiting re indexing on some files see the Re Index File and Limits on Re indexing Files sections Collation You can specify forwards or backwards collation the direction in which MSC Fileman s lookup utilities loop through a subscript in an index when entries are returned or displayed to the user This is especially useful for dates Developers can store dates in their natural internal MSC Fileman date format and still display entries in the date index in reverse date order Lookup Prompt Each subscript on an index in the new INDEX file can be assigned a LOOKUP PROMPT This prompt will be used as the prompt for entry of the lookup value during classic MSC Fileman lookup DIC calls If not filled in MSC Fileman will default to use the name of the field for that subs
171. RMAT SPECIFICATION S Now by using either the label or the corresponding number of the attribute you want you select the information you want in your customized data dictionary listing FIRST PRINT ATTRIBUTE LABEL THEN PRINT ATTRIBUTE TYPE THEN PRINT ATTRIBUTE DATE FIELD LAST EDITED THEN PRINT ATTRIBUTE Enter HEADING FIELD SEARCH CUSTOM TAILORED OUTPUT DEVICE Enter You can save the selected attributes in a PRINT template e REF For details see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter in the MSC Fileman User Manual The output will look like this PATIENT FILE CUSTOM TAILORED OUTPUT MAY 31 1991 11 10 PAGE 1 DATE FIELD LABEL TYPE LAST EDITED January 2015 209 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data DATE OF BIRTH DATE TIME MAR 22 1991 DIAGNOSIS FREE TEXT NAME FREE TEXT MAR 29 1991 PROVIDER VARIABLE POINTER MAR 22 1991 RELIGION POINTER MAR 22 1991 SEX SET MAR 22 1991 SSN FREE TEXT MAR 22 1991 e NOTE With the Custom Tailored format in order to get information about fields in a Multiple you must specifically ask for that Multiple by entering its name at the Select SUB FILE prompt Templates Only Format The Templates Only format displays information about the templates including forms and blocks associated with a file The output resembles the last part of the Standard data dictionary output Global Map The Global Ma
172. ROVIDER field those patients will be left off of the report entirely If you want to include records in your report even if they have no value in the field you are sorting on sort from instead of accepting the default of FIRST As in the example below enter an at sign at the START WITH prompt Select MSC Fileman Option PRINT Enter File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter SORT BY NAME PROVIDER START WITH PROVIDER FIRST GO TO PROVIDER LAST Enter January 2015 17 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data WITHIN PROVIDER SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME 1 NAME 2 NAME COMPONENTS 3 NAME ORDER CHOOSE 1 3 1 Enter NAME THEN PRINT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT LIST Enter START AT PAGE 1 Enter e SORRY THIS MAY TAKE A FEW MOMENTS The output of this sort would then include all records even those with no value in their PROVIDER fields PATIENT LIST FEB 13 2013 16 22 PAGE 1 NAME DATE OF BIRTH PROVIDER EMPTY FMPATIENT ONE 03 01 1940 PROVIDER FMPROVIDER 2 FMPATIENT TWO 03 04 1933 PROVIDER FMPROVIDER 2 FMPATIENT THREE 09 25 1949 PROVIDER FMPROVIDER 2 FMPATIENT FOUR 01 31 1921 PROVIDER FMPROVIDER 3 FMPATIENT FIVE 05 24 1931 PROVIDER FMPROVIDER 3 FMPATIENT SIX 04 03 1935 PROVIDER FMPROVIDER 3 FMPATIENT SEVEN 10 22 1925 Sort
173. RY MESSAGE NO HAVING ENTERED OR EDITED ONE MULTIPLE HSOULD USER BE ASKED ANOTEHR L January 2015 255 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert A Multiple field is created just as any other except that the I5 THIS FIELD MULTIPLE question is answered YES In Screen Mode after answering YES to this question a popup window appears containing editable attributes pertinent to a Multiple field With Multiple type fields MSC Fileman asks if you want users to be notified when they are adding new entries and if users should be asked if they want to make another entry In this case we answered NO to both questions Subfields To create or edit Subfields of a Multiple field select a Multiple valued field e g the RESPONSES Multiple field previously created Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD RESPONSES You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Multiple Field 4 5 in File 100 MULTIPLE FIELD LABEL MoRPes READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert 256 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide In Screen Mode after entering a Multiple field a special screen a
174. S IN THIS TEXT BE TREATED LIKE ANY OTHER CHARACTERS If you answer NO to this question the vertical bar 1 character will be ignored No is the default TIP When it is important that lines of text be printed exactly as they were entered answer NO to the prompt SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE question and 250 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide YES to the prompt SHALL I CHARACTERS IN THIS TEXT BE TREATED LIKE ANY OTHER CHARACTERS COMPUTED Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the JUST RELEASED field 41000 in the ORDER file 2100 has a value of COMPUTED Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD JUST RELEASED You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 1000 in File 100 FIELD LABEL JUST RELEASED DATA TYPE COMPUTED gear a UT EU a a a a an IE 1 COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION 68 2 gt TODAY A TYPE OF RESULT BOOLEAN NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT SHOULD VALUE ALWAYS BE ROUNDED WHEN TOTALLING SHOULD SUMS BE SUMS OF COMPONENT FIELDS LENGTH OF FIELD IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE fi
175. SC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide useful information about either the format or the specific export itself The EXPORT FIELD Multiple in the PRINT TEMPLATE file might be of particular interest This Multiple contains information about each field being exported Print Format Documentation Option MSC Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Data Export to Foreign Format DDXP EXPORT MENU Print Format Documentation DDXP FORMAT DOCUMENTATION You can list the available FOREIGN FORMAT file entries on the system using the Print Format Documentation option When you use this option you are given the choice of specifying individual formats or of printing all of the formats on your system Since your system can contain many formats try to select individual ones A typical dialogue for choosing formats and the resulting output looks like this Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION PRINT FORMAT DOCUMENTATION Select one of the following 1 Only print selected foreign formats 2 Print all foreign formats Enter response 1 Enter Only print selected foreign formats Select FOREIGN FORMAT 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Select FOREIGN FORMAT EXCEL COMMA Select FOREIGN FORMAT Enter DEVICE Enter AVAILABLE FOREIGN FORMATS NOV 2 1992 15 34 Page 1 NAME 123 IMPORT NUMBERS January 2015 363 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data DESCRIPTION This format exports data for u
176. SC Fileman enforces KEY INTEGRITY whenever records are added or edited Exactly one key in a file must be designated the PRIMARY KEY All other keys are SECONDARY KEYs While MSC Fileman enforces the integrity of both primary and SECONDARY KEYs the PRIMARY KEY is MSC Fileman s principal means of looking up entries in the file MSC Fileman will prompt for lookup values for each of the PRIMARY KEY fields and will consider a record a match only if it matches all of the lookup values The 01 field should be a part of the PRIMARY KEY Keys are also useful when transporting data to another system using the Kernel Installation and Distribution KIDS system Since the key fields uniquely identify a record it is easy to decide whether a record being brought in to the target system needs to be merged to a record that already exists or whether it is a new record Associated with each key is a Uniqueness Index a regular New Style cross reference The Uniqueness Index helps MSC Fileman enforce KEY January 2015 283 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data INTEGRITY and is used during lookup When you create a new key you can have MSC Fileman create a new Uniqueness Index automatically for you or you can select an existing index to be the Uniqueness Index of the key The index you select though must meet the following criteria t must be a regular New Style cross reference e t must be used for lookup and sorting t
177. SCHARGING PHYSICIAN THEN EDIT FIELD 5 Enter FOLLOW UP DATE THEN EDIT FIELD 1 Enter THEN EDIT FIELD 6 Enter BILLING METHOD THEN EDIT FIELD 7 S X M Y MEDICARE NUMBER THEN EDIT FIELD S Y 0 THEN EDIT FIELD MEDICARE NUMBER THEN EDIT FIELD Enter STORE THESE FIELDS IN TEMPLATE lt Spacebar gt lt Enter gt EDIT ADMISSION OCT 31 1991 14 17 USER Z2 FILE 716155 EDIT ADMISSION TEMPLATE ALREADY EXISTS OK TO REPLACE Y After the BILLING METHOD field is edited a test is made of its contents It is a DATA TYPE field of SET OF CODES thus the test is for the letter M alone the internal value of the field If it is equal to M the template branches to the MEDICARE NUMBER field If it is not equal to M the template proceeds to the next prompt where Y is set unconditionally to zero The template is exited here so that the MEDICARE NUMBER prompt is not shown when it is not needed An editing session using this template to add a new admission might look like this Select ADMISSIONS NAME FMPATIENT 19 Are you adding FMPATIENT 19 as a new ADMISSIONS the ATH No X lt Enter gt Yes DIAGNOSIS MEASLES ADMITTING PHYSICIAN FMPROVIDER 4 DATE OF DISCHARGE Enter BILLING METHOD MEDICARE MEDICARE NUMBER 3093 0393 The discharge related questions were skipped and the MEDICARE NUMBER prompt was given A future editing of this record upon patient discharge could look like
178. SSING field in the Line Editor choose the Utility Sub Menu option at the EDIT Option prompt Then choose the File Transfer from Foreign CPU option from the Utility Sub Menu Atthe MAXIMUM string length 3 245 prompt enter maximum string length for lines you are uploading TheLine Editor now waits up to 30 seconds for you to initiate an ASCII transfer of the file Use your communications software to perform an ASCII upload of the file All uploaded text is appended to the WORD PROCESSING field that you are editing Once you have finished uploading it takes 30 seconds of inactivity January 2015 117 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data until the transfer can complete When done and after 30 seconds of inactivity the computer responds FILE TRANSFER COMPLETE and you are returned to the EDIT Option prompt The same precautions apply for uploading large quantities of text to the Line Editor as apply with the Screen Editor In particular if you need to upload large quantities of text quickly consider switching to an Alternate Editor such as Kermit if installed as an Alternate Editor by your site which provides error correcting communications protocol Unlike an ASCII transfer used with the File Transfer option an error correcting protocol such as Kermit can transfer text and automatically compensate for any communications overflows without losing characters T
179. Staff Provider named One Fmprovider For example PROVIDER S January 2015 67 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data CHOOSE FROM FMPROVIDER ONE J FMPROVIDER TWO J You can also select an entry in a VARIABLE POINTER field by just entering a name without the PREFIX In this case MSC Fileman searches each pointed to file in succession until a match is found For example to choose a provider without specifying in which file the provider can be found enter the provider name only PROVIDER FMPROVIDER EIGHT M Searching for a Staff Provider Searching for a Outside Provider FMPROVIDER EIGHT M OK YES Enter YES You can add an entry to one of the files that is being pointed to by a VARIABLE POINTER field To do this enter the appropriate PREFIX and the new name to add at the field prompt For example to add FMPROVIDER EIGHT M as an Outside Provider not a Staff Provider use the appropriate PREFIX when adding the new entry in this case O When the requested name is not found you are asked if you want to add the provider as a new entry To add the entry enter YES PROVIDER O FMPROVIDER EIGHT M Are you adding FMPROVIDER EIGHT M as a new OUTSIDE PROVIDER No YES Enter Yes OUTSIDE PROVIDER SEX MALE OUTSIDE PROVIDER DATE OF BIRTH 020235 Enter FEB 02 1935 OUTSIDE PROVIDER SSN 000987321
180. T Yes N lt Enter gt No FIRST PRINT FIELD CAPTIONED January 2015 9 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Include COMPUTED fields N Y R B NO Enter No record number IEN no Computed Fields DISPLAY AUDIT TRAIL No Enter NO Heading S C PATIENT LIST Enter DEVICE 10 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Print How to Print Reports from Files With the Inquire to File Entries option you can select entries from a file one by one choose a format for displaying the selected entries and then output the selected entries MSC Fileman s print capabilities on the other hand allow you to select entries not one by one but instead by choosing a range of entries based on the sorting order You can choose all entries in a file for example and sort them in alphabetical order for the printout Alternatively you can choose all entries sorting between E and F and sort them in alphabetical order for the printout MSC Fileman s Print Capabilities There are two ways in which you ll have an opportunity to use MSC Fileman s print capabilities Anoption that has been set up already to allow you to print from a particular file MSC Fileman s Print File Entries option which lets you print from any file to which you have access In either case use of MSC Fileman s print features is very similar In most cases the
181. T Option prompt After briefly reviewing your text you have decided that Lines 2 and 3 2 gt and 3 are too short You can use the Join command i e Join Line to the One Following option to join Line 2 to the next line EDIT Option L Enter ist line 2 Enter to 3 Enter 2 gt left by 3 gt the doorway EDIT Option J lt Enter gt oin line 2 2 gt left by the doorway EDIT Option anuary 2015 115 J y MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data INSERT Insert New Line s of Text Between Existing Ones Suppose that you want to insert new lines of text in the middle of existing text in a WORD PROCESSING field Using the Add Lines to End of Text won t work because that appends new text lines at the end of the existing lines Instead you can use the Insert command i e Insert Line s after an Existing Line option to do this EDIT Option L Enter ist line 1 Enter to 5 Enter 1 gt The delivery people came and left several packages 2 gt by the doorway 3 gt We ve got some work ahead of us now EDIT Option I lt Enter gt nsert after line 2 3 gt lt Enter gt 4 gt Finally the order arrived lt Enter gt 5 gt lt Enter gt DELETE Delete a Line or Lines Occasionally you may need to delete lines of text in a WORD PROCESSING field Use the Delete command i e Delete Line s option at the EDIT Option prompt to do this
182. T THIS SEARCH SPECIFICATION TO BE CONSIDERED TRUE FOR CONDITION A 1 WHEN AT LEAST ONE OF THE DIAGNOSIS MULTIPLES SATISFIES IT 2 WHEN ALL OF THE DIAGNOSIS MULTIPLES SATISFY IT CHOOSE 1 2 1 2 DO YOU WANT THIS SEARCH SPECIFICATION TO BE CONSIDERED TRUE FOR CONDITION B 1 WHEN AT LEAST ONE OF THE DIAGNOSIS MULTIPLES SATISFIES IT 2 WHEN ALL OF THE DIAGNOSIS MULTIPLES SATISFY IT CHOOSE 1 2 1 Enter In this case all the diagnoses would need to satisfy the A condition but only one or more would need to satisfy the B condition NOTE Applying search tests to fields in a multiple selects entries at the top level of the file MSC Fileman s searching features cannot be used to select specific subentries January 2015 49 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data The Browser If your site is using Kernel if you are running VISTA you are using Kernel you may have the option of sending your reports from the Inquire Print or Search options to a device called the Browser The Browser is an alternate method for viewing reports on your screen it has more viewing options available than the basic print to screen You can find out whether the Browser is available to you by typing two question marks at the device prompt to get a list of available devices If you do not have the Browser available and would like to try it ask your IT department about getting it enabled 50 Jan
183. T template has already been defined for a file you can answer the FIRST PRINT FIELD prompt with the template name enclosed within brackets For example FIRST PRINT FIELD PATIENT DATA WANT TO EDIT PATIENT DATA TEMPLATE NO Y Enter YES NAME PATIENT DATA Enter READ ACCESS Enter WRITE ACCESS Enter After you retrieve a template you are asked if you want to edit the template If you answer YES as shown above you are allowed to edit the template name To delete the template enter an at sign After the NAME prompt you can edit the template security codes for READ ACCESS and WRITE ACCESS Next you are prompted to edit each PRINT FIELD value containing each print field stored in the template You can leave each print field as is edit it or delete it with the at sign character To insert a new print field ahead of the print field being displayed in your template precede the print field you want to insert with a caret See January 2015 23 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data the following example of adding to a PRINT template INPUT and SORT templates have this feature also FIRST PRINT FIELD FIELD1 Enter THEN PRINT FIELD FIELD2 Enter THEN PRINT FIELD FIELD4 FIELD3 THEN PRINT FIELD FIELD4 Enter To insert a Multiple field and its subfields ahead of the field currently displayed in the template do the f
184. TE OF BIRTH LESS THAN 1980 STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE Enter If Multiples had not been involved you would now be able to respond to the SORT BY dialogue You can do the same things with sort here that you can do when using the Print File Entries option What Device to Send Export Data To After you complete the sort dialogue you are immediately given the DEVICE prompt Choose what device the exported data should be sent to DEVICE Enter If you press the Enter key at the DEVICE prompt the export output will be displayed on your screen Sending the formatted export data to the screen allows you to use a PC based screen capture to put the data into a file This file would be a readable ASCII file on that computer This method of transferring the data into a file is a simple one that will often be successful and convenient especially if the importing application is on the same PC When using a screen capture to create a file from the exported data you must consider the peculiarities of your communication and terminal emulation software Your communication application for example may intercept certain control characters like the TAB ASCII 9 and convert them into something else This may cause the import to fail Also your terminal emulation may automatically break lines at 80 characters by inserting an unwanted carriage return or line feed When emulating VT 100 340 January 2015
185. TER CCS MN Pm 268 Mandatory Required Field Check Option ees 282 Map Pointer Relations ODUOfPL cce diee Ie oe an Ap vae 212 MAXIMUM OUTPUT BENGLELDBI aient pere eet eaves 357 Mersine Entries esas idea A A est Add 298 MESSAGE Fielder iriiri n rtt dito iode 232 MNEMONIC Gross reter ene rai ld 263 Modify Destination File Opt Onis sisi sene Mastetuces tue th teint ten Eva Es e ruep un 308p Modify File Attributes Option136 202 219pp 224 226pp 234 238 241pp 259 274 308 317 Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage Option cesses 379 Multiline Return ValueSauen teo iem ete ove en erri et n Ue Hv ap res Relational Navi OR tidad iaa 156 MUMIES Crossroads 264 NAME Ped er oet Oed b Men 220 383 NAME Held DE rer ieee e A NA ER EA TENA 352 NAME OF FOREIGN FIELD Peld iaa 358 January 2015 427 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Index Namespace Compare ODLEOTL s iievras ete qied rov ba 290 Naming a ING WP i Caesar r ri staal Guan duse ossa ud aet Oa 219 NEW PERSON EG ies etatis tas deed o eU ua tetera e tede kk 36p 253 390 NEW PERSON File 200 ueteri eee 253 351 iNewsbbyle Crosssrelefeni eB lis Crest ordeo o ert 271 Deleng citer AA Dre here ob vA teen 273 En 270 OPEN PARAMETER Pela ia aaa 341 OPEL Sidra a AA Fo a e b e vts o ve Computed Express etas 131 OPTION Ele FII eiai ta npn Du dca unten EE 235 A E E A E E erp cetur gerere a DN COR pl oca biol Data Export M
186. TY File To learn about the status of an extract activity you can enter a question mark at most of the prompts in the Extract Tool options Using the Inquire to File Entries option on the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 1 11 will yield information about past or pending activities Those activities created by the Extract Tool are referred to as extract activities The amount of information displayed depends on the status of the extract activity The ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains the following information 4 The DUZ of the individual performing the extract activity 5 The status of the extract activity e g EDITED or UPDATED 6 The dates on which the activities were performed January 2015 311 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data 7 The number of entries extracted The source file number 9 The SEARCH SORT and PRINT templates used in the extract activity QO For MSC Fileman 20 0 and later the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains data about both archiving and extract activities A file can have only one active activity at a time either an archiving activity or an extract activity You can only select an extract activity from the Extract Tool options When you use the Inquire to File Entries option the word EXTRACT will appear for all extract activities Extract Steps The order of the options on the Extract Tool submenu reflects the sequence of steps in which you ordinarily perform your extract activity To
187. ULTIPLE VALUED TYPE OF RESULT MULTIPLE POINTER Enter POINT TO WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter You can also use the screen mode version of Modify File Attributes to define Computed Multiple Pointers Now you can use the TESTERS field in Print Templates ScreenMan form definitions or any other place where multiple lines of results are appropriate The COMPUTED type field can be a very useful tool Having set up such a field you can then search or sort by it and also include it in the definition of other COMPUTED type fields In the latter case independence is preserved Thus for example if you define COMPUTED Field 2 in terms of COMPUTED Field 1 and then decide to redefine Field 1 Field 2 will 140 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide automatically use the new Field 1 calculation If you try to delete a field that is referenced by a COMPUTED type field you will be warned Where to Use Computed Expressions On the Fly On the Fly Computed Expressions In addition to permanently storing a computed expression in a data dictionary there are several places within MSC Fileman s dialogue where you can use a computed expression on the fly PRINT FIELD Prompt SEARCH FOR FIELD Prompt SORT BY Prompt Field Value Stuffing OUTPUT Transforms Word Processing Windows PRINT FIELD Prompt Whenever you are within the Print or Search File Entries option
188. User s Toolbox menu 108 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Atthe Select TERMINAL TYPE NAME prompt you can usually just accept the default by pressing the Enter key lt Enter gt Youare now placed in a ScreenMan form where you can edit your user characteristics Press lt ArrowDown gt until your cursor arrives at the PREFERRED EDITOR prompt e Atthe PREFERRED EDITOR prompt you can choose your Preferred Editor Enter two question marks to get a list of the available editors on your system Choose one as your Preferred Editor and then press the Enter key Enter The Screen Editor is usually a good choice e Press PFI E to exit the ScreenMan form If you are asked whether to save changes before leaving the form answer YES Your Preferred Editor should now be set to the editor you ve chosen This is the editor that will be used whenever you edit the contents of a WORD PROCESSING field Switching to Another Editor While Editing Selecting your default editor determines which editor is used whenever you edit a WORD PROCESSING field However if you want to temporarily switch to another editor once you have started editing both the Screen Editor and the Line Editor allow you to do this In the Line Editor Choose the Utilities in Word processing option Atthe Edit Option prompt choose Editor Change Choose the editor to which you
189. Y OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT Enter Select Subfile Enter Keys defined on file 716026 A PRIMARY KEY Uniqueness Index C Field s 1 NAME 2 01 2 SSN 02 Choose V Verify E Edit D Delete C Create EDIT Which Key do you wish to edit A Enter You will then be taken into Screen Mode i e Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the key Enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt for additional help Delete a Key The following dialogue shows how to delete a key NOTE You are also given the option of deleting the Uniqueness Index of the key 286 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILITY OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT Enter Select Subfile Enter Keys defined on file 716026 A PRIMARY KEY Uniqueness Index C Field s 1 NAME 2 01 2 SSN 4 02 Choose V Verify E Edit D Delete C Create DELETE Which Key do you wish to delete A Enter Are you sure you want to delete the Key No Y Key A of File 16026 deleted Do you want to delete the C Uniqueness Index 6 on File 16026 previously used by Key A of File 716026 YES Index definition deleted Removing old index DONE Verify a Key When you verify the integrity of a key MSC Fileman checks that all fiel
190. YPE field value as COMPUTED you are asked the following questions Select FIELD AGE Are you adding AGE as a new FIELD No X DATA TYPE OF AGE COMPUTED COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION TODAY DATE OF BIRTH 365 25 NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT ONLY ANSWER IF NUMBER VALUED 2 For this example we assume the DATE OF BIRTH field was previously created Thus we can reference it in the COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION Also the NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS TO OUTPUT question is asking whether you should enter the number of digits that should normally appear to the right of the decimal point when this field is displayed SHOULD VALUE ALWAYS BE INTERNALLY ROUNDED TO 2 DECIMAL PLACES No X WHEN TOTALLING THIS FIELD SHOULD THE SUM BE COMPUTED FROM THE SUMS OF THE COMPONENT FIELDS No Enter LENGTH OF FIELD 8 Enter NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of COMPUTED in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section 230 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide POINTER TO A FILE Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as a POINTER TO A FILE requires you to enter the name or number of the pointed to file and that file must already exist defined previously For example when defining a DATA T
191. YPE field value as POINTER TO A FILE you are asked the following questions Select FIELD RELIGION Are you adding RELIGION as a new FIELD No X DATA TYPE OF RELIGION POINTER TO A FILE POINT TO WHICH FILE RELIGION The file that is pointed to must already exist on your system If you enter a single question mark at the POINT TO WHICH FILE prompt you will be presented with a list of the available files SHOULD ADDING A NEW RELIGION FILE ENTRY LAYGO BE ALLOWED WHEN ANSWERING THE RELIGION QUESTION No Enter By answering NO to this prompt users who are editing patient data are not able to add a new entry on the fly to the RELIGION file This prompt depends on whether you have LAYGO access to the file or not WILL RELIGION FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS RELIGION ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter HELP PROMPT Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter o NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of POINTER TO A FILE in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section January 2015 231 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data VARIABLE POINTER Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as a VARIABLE POINTER as with the POINTER TO A FILE DATA TYPE requires you to enter the names or numbers o
192. ab stop to the right lt Tab gt Move cursor left or right one screen lt PF1 gt lt ArrowLeft gt or lt PF1 gt lt ArrowRight gt Move cursor to beginning or end of line lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowLeft gt or lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowRight gt OR lt Find gt or lt Select gt OR Home or End Move cursor one screen up or down lt PF1 gt lt ArrowUp gt or lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt OR lt PrevScreen gt or lt NextScreen gt OR lt Page Up gt or lt Page Down gt or column Move to top or bottom of lt PF1 gt T or lt PF1 gt B document Go to a specific screen line lt PF1 gt G You can move forward quickly across a line by pressing the lt Tab gt key The Tab key in the Screen Editor does not insert anything into the text The Tab key is for navigation only and simply moves the cursor to the next tab stop to the right Another way to move across a line either forward or backward is to move a word at a time using lt Ctrl J gt or lt Ctrl L gt 100 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Saving and Exiting Action Key Sequence Exit and save text lt PF1 gt E Quit without saving lt PF1 gt Q Exit save and switch editors lt PF1 gt A Save without exiting lt PF1 gt S If your editing session ends unexpectedly because of hardware failure or another reason that prev
193. abilities you have much more control over what entries you select from a file for printing How to Search As with MSC Fileman s print capabilities there are two methods in which you can use MSC Fileman s search features Anoption that has been set up already to allow you to search a particular file MSC Fileman s Search File Entries option which lets you perform a search on any file to which you have access In either case use of MSC Fileman s search features is very similar In most cases the only difference is that with the Search File Entries option you have to choose which file to search The steps in searching are 38 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 3 Enter the search conditions truth tests to perform on each entry 4 Specify how the search conditions should be combined link them together with logical ANDs amp ORs to select records 5 Format your output i e choose the sort order and print fields Search Steps Enter Conditions First you must enter one or more search conditions to test each entry For each condition you choose a field in the entry and a condition to compare the field against For example you could check if an entry s DATE field is NULL GREATER THAN 10 1 96 or EQUALS 10 1 96 Search Condition Tests Condition Symbol For Field Types Description Arguments NULL none All except WORD NULL returns true if th
194. access to the Extract Tool options start at the Other Options submenu Here s a sample of the dialogue that you will encounter Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS Select OTHER OPTION EXTRACT DATA TO MSC Fileman FILE Select EXTRACT OPTION ANSWER WITH EXTRACT OPTION NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM SELECT ENTRIES TO EXTRACT ADD DELETE SELECTED ENTRIES PRINT SELECTED ENTRIES MODIFY DESTINATION FILE CREATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE UPDATE DESTINATION FILE PURGE EXTRACTED ENTRIES CANCEL EXTRACT SELECTION VALIDATE EXTRACT TEMPLATE WO 10Y UH UN S Select Entries to Extract Option 1 of 9 The Select Entries to Extract option initiates the extract activity In this option the entries are selected and stored in a template and an entry in the 312 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file is created Entries are selected in the same manner as the Search File Entries option O REF For guidance on selecting entries see the Search chapter of the MSC Fileman User Manual The Select Entries to Extract option performs the following functions 8 During the search phase the search criteria for selecting entries is specified and must be stored in a template NOTE If you want to extract a subentry contained in a Multiple field you must extract the entire entry 9 During the sort phase which is indicated by the SORT BY prompt you can enter additional restrictions on the en
195. aders which are created as PRINT templates It is one method to print sort criteria in the report header If you need to sort on two or more fields you need to use a different string for a and b at each level or else the values will overwrite each other No value is saved in the PARAM array if the user accepts FIRST or LAST as the START WITH or GO TO sort values the 411 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers field Sn Skip lines when sort value changes The S suffix skips one line between sort field sort value values if no number is added If you specify changes a number n n lines are skipped For example here we sort by patients but we ask that each time the patient value changes we add 3 lines Output from what File VISIT Sort by VISIT ADMIT DATE amp TIME PATIENT NAME S3 Start with PATIENT NAME FIRST Within PATIENT NAME Sort by field TXT Sort numbers as text The TXT sort qualifier forces digits to be sorted as alphanumeric strings not as numbers 22 sorts before 3 Use this to correctly sort mixed canonic and non canonic numbers 412 January 2015 Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide field xxx Replace caption in subheader and sort dialogue The default subheader is the field label or expression entered at the SORT BY
196. ading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Select MSC Fileman Option SEARCH Enter File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT NEW PERSON Enter 88362 entries A SEARCH FOR NEW PERSON FIELD DATE ACCESS Enter CODE LAST CHANGED A CONDITION Enter GREATER THAN A GREATER THAN DATE T 50 Enter DEC 25 2012 B SEARCH FOR NEW PERSON FIELD ACCESS CODE 1 ACCESS CODE 2 ACCESS CODE Want to edit ACCESS CODE Y N CHOOSE 1 2 1 lt Enter gt ACCESS CODE B CONDITION NULL C SEARCH FOR NEW PERSON FIELD Enter IF AB DATE ACCESS CODE LAST CHANGED GREATER THAN the entire day DEC 25 2012 T 50 and ACCESS CODE NOT NULL OR Enter STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE ACCESS CODE SEARCH Are you adding ACCESS CODE SEARCH as a new SORT TEMPLATE No Y Enter Yes DESCRIPTION No existing text Edit NO Enter SORT BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME FIRST Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME 1 NAME 2 NAME COMPONENTS CHOOSE 1 2 1 Enter NAME THEN PRINT FIELD DATE ACCESS CODE Enter LAST CHANGED THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C NEW PERSON SEARCH Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter NEW PERSON SEARCH FEB 13 2013 17 17 PAGE 1 DATE ACCESS CODE LAST NAME CHANGED January 2015 43 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data FMPERWSON ONE FEB 13 2013 FMPERSON TWO JAN 16 2013 2
197. alues are then transferred from the FROM entry to the TO entry The following example shows the simple dialogue Select OPTION TRANSFER ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION ANSWER WITH TRANSFER OPTION NUMBER OR NAME CHOOSE FROM 1 TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES 2 COMPARE MERGE FILE ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION 1 Enter TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES INPUT TO WHAT FILE PATIENT TRANSFER FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT TRANSFER DATA INTO WHICH PATIENT RECIPIENT ROGER TRANSFER DATA FROM PATIENT FMUSER FIVE WANT TO DELETE THIS ENTRY AFTER IT S BEEN TRANSFERRED NO If the TO entry Roger Recipient in our example already has a value on file for a given field that value will be preserved i e it will not be overwritten by the corresponding field value in the FROM entry This rule applies to word processing data fields also If the recipient has any text on file corresponding text from the sender s entry is not merged with it Thus if you decide to delete the FROM entry Sam Sender here you may lose some data In the case of distinct Multiple valued subfields merging will take place The subentries in the FROM entry would be added to the Multiple in the anuary 2015 291 J y MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data TO entry Further if two subentries have the same 01 value and if any of the subfields are blank in the TO entry the FROM subentry s data will be placed in the blank subfield In this way data is
198. an 120 days in the past you would enter the following A SEARCH FOR FIELD DATE ACCESS CODE LAST CHANGED A CONDITION LESS THAN 40 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide A GREATER THAN T 120 Enter Jun 20 1995 Each prompt above begins with A what you ve entered becomes search condition A Once you enter your first search condition you can enter additional search conditions if you wish MSC Fileman assigns the letter A to the first search condition B to the second search condition if any C to the third and so on Here is an example of entering two truth tests A SEARCH FOR FIELD DATE ACCESS CODE LAST CHANGED A CONDITION LESS THAN A GREATER THAN T 120 Enter Jun 20 1995 B SEARCH FOR FIELD ACCESS CODE B CONDITION NULL C SEARCH FOR FIELD Enter Combine Conditions After defining a series of conditions A B etc you combine the conditions to yield the complete test that an entry must satisfy to be selected in the search The complete test is a logical combination of tests A B etc using AND OR and NOT Operators for Combining Search Conditions Condition Symbol Description Example AND amp For truth test to be true the A amp B conditions on both sides of the AND operator must be true The amp symbol can be omitted i e AB is the same as A amp B
199. and fields that point to the target file An abbreviated description of the field is shown To the right in the last column are any files that are pointed to by the target file The output s heading contains brief descriptions of the codes used January 2015 213 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data A possible output for the PATIENT file is shown below File Package PATIENT FILE Date MAY 31 1991 FILE POINTER FILE POINTER FIELD TYPE POINTER FIELD FILE POINTED TO L Laygo S File not in set N Normal Ref C Xref Truncated m Multiple v Variable Pointer ADMISSIONS 16999 16026 PATIENT CLIENT nn N S L gt RELIGION gt RELIGION v PROVIDER gt PERSON s PROVIDER This output shows that the CLIENT field in the ADMISSIONS file points to the PATIENT file LAYGO additions are allowed and the ADMISSIONS file is not in the set of files being mapped Further the RELIGION field in the PATIENT file points to the RELIGION file and the PROVIDER field a v VARIABLE POINTER points to the PERSON and PROVIDER files If the target file points to a file that is not in the account the map shows NONEXISTENT FILE O REF For a more elaborate example of a pointer map see the Pointer Map section in the MSC Fileman Technical Manual Check Fix DD Structure Option In order to ensure that the internal structure of your files and subfiles is consistent use
200. ar gt and Enter lt Enter gt keys For example if you are editing a particular patient in a Nursing application and then switch to the Order Entry application to work with the same patient you can usually retrieve the same patient by pressing the Spacebar and the Enter keys at the second application s Order Entry Select PATIENT NAME prompt For example Select PATIENT NAME lt Spacebar gt lt Enter gt FMPATIENT 24 NAME FMPATIENT 24 January 2015 81 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Screenman Screenman is MSC Fileman s screen oriented data entry tool It is an alternative to the Scrolling Mode approach With Screenman data is entered in forms Each form field occupies a fixed position on the screen instead of scrolling off You can see many data fields at once and use simple key combinations to edit data and move from field to field on a screen You can also move from one screen to another like turning through the pages of a book Scrolling Mode Editing vs Screen Mode Editing Similarities Youcan change a field s value by entering a different value or delete a field s value by entering the at sign You can enter one or two question marks to call up a list of acceptable responses and other help If you enter a value deemed unacceptable Screenman displays a message explaining what type of information should be entered e f you wish you
201. ary 2015 53 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Online Help As with most screen based VISTA applications the Browser includes online help To access a Help summary press lt F1 gt H For more detailed help press lt F1 gt lt F1 gt H Other Features To Press Repaint the Screen lt PF1 gt P Print the Document PF1 2 PF1 P This feature allows you to print the document currently being displayed in the Browser You can choose to print a header on each page which will include the document title the current date and time and the page number You can also choose whether to print the document in word wrap mode and whether to have word processing windows interpreted This feature was released with Patch DI 22 0 169 54 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Change the document title in the Browser header line lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt or lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowUp gt This feature lets you change the text in the Browser s header to some line in your report Each time you press lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt you set the Browser header line to the text of the next line down in your document and vice versa for lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowUp gt Typically you might want to set the Browser s header line to the text in your report s header that contains field names for your report s data You might ne
202. at OPUS 331 335 338 422 January 2015 Index MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide EXPORT FIELD Wil tiple aded mno Pin ai 358 362p EXPORT FIELDS Templates i 344p EXPORT Templates 331 335 337 339 344p 355 357pp 362 365p 368 EXPO ii PR MO etn inae 31 326p 330 359 Exporting Dat motio een es e Een pn Ye Pt AA Sti A an eriei anet ia e e ar ae Ea E E Enar Eies 339 IVIL POS evocare nfi te AAA AA A edlen es 343 IN OCS MEN ERU 342 Send Export Data To a Device sioe ere ios ubt Ra e eb case 340 Send Export Data To a Host Pl ooo 341 sci EE E E EE E OE EEEE 331 A 992 LCP Sive teni c OU ud upto tim ub dt vds 335 vici M te 338 EXPIDA A DARE DINEM ECL a jl qo 149 EXTRACT Templates corretti traia 306p 309 317pp 325 Extract IDOL saat tres riria aniei a 306 ARCHIVAL ACTI Ple 311 Destination Please in 307 Important Items to Note talar adela dudas ap 306 Mappi g Into RAIN ete D Nas tate ou e ces 309 DV CLV LEW A 306 Sota Pl A A 307 O nal EE 312 vp M 314 DLE Oss iui M eam atu ins 316 D KE d ise dine bove eee aca ae he cae hale aad 317 wc RE cok 318 vij E 321 DIepoA vat ta to DIA HN P dmt 323 EO P EEA A ES E E E E E ES E tala 324 Step
203. ata MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide LOWERCASK string string is an expression yielding alphabetic characters This function will change uppercase characters in string to lowercase except for the first character and the first character after a punctuation mark A space is a punctuation mark thus the first letter of a word will not be changed String cannot be a word processing field the contents of a word processing field will be unaffected LOWERCASE FMPATIENT 20 gt Fmpatient 20 PADRIGHT PADRIGHT string n Parameters string isa string or string expression to be printed nis the total size of the output string This function will pad string on the right with spaces to make a string n characters long If string is longer than n characters the entire string will be returned this function will not truncate Examples PADRIGHT Peter 10 gt Peter five spaces after the r PADRIGHT CITY 15 gt San Juan Capistrano REPLACE REPLACK string oldstring newstring Parameters string is the string expression that will be changed oldstring is a string expression containing the character s in string that will be replaced newstring is a string expression containing the character s that will replace those in oldstring This function returns the input string with all January 2015 185 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data occurrences of the oldstring changed to the newstrin
204. ata a Erase a bip evi e c 265 IB ngu 266 Edin S oio O apte eal cdi hae ero te 264 Tratister Entries Mem ai rh ea 290 Transfer File Entries OPI 290p 293 295 301 Transferrin gs e Data Withinthe Same Fre ouo a m E P 291 Entries Between FICS sus ois Sensis enr deben ied testo dads 293 Entries nto a New Piles accesos eec e 295 430 January 2015 Index MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Fil EQU AE 290 TRIGGER CrOSS TEO TONCES ended 264 PERA ds 352 ALY Operatofs aiei wow etui di AO 131 Wneditable Data Opt ede te opea eed breed 282 Urvalidated US enin oed ndisse gs tti hse ted hup rs au EE a Lu ipd Advanced Edit Technical 398 Update Destination File Op saeta 306pp 318 321 324 IW rra A A Cross Reference a Field or File option ess 262 Utility Functions Menu 123 202 241 259 262 268 274 277p 345 A A A AET FUNCION PM 162 Validate Extract Template ODDO 5a esee sees beoe Fori sre 325 Variable Stuffs os oisi artc sae arca Advanced Edit Technituesucn riene orca ias 398 Variables Available for Programmer Use Foreign Formats 362 Verify Fields OPUS 241 261 View Presta Opin tira 389 395 VMS CONVERT UI asa bd 359 A coat ae i e a ath teen rete lnch ute VERANET 341 379 Vphelda c ee nPop oT motn A tn Toot 150 WORD PROCESSING Piel se etos Leite feet deb o rach estaba ai iter dep
205. ata set January 2015 379 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data You can send to more than one permanent storage location without having to recreate the archiving activity When the archived data is moved to permanent storage every line contained in the temporary storage word processing field is simply read and then written to a sequential medium The status of your archiving activity after using this option is ARCHIVED PERMANENT In the example below the archiving activity is identified by file name CHANGE It is going to be archived to the specified tape Select ARCHIVE OPTION MOVE ARCHIVED DATA TO PERMANENT STORAGE Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY CHANGE Enter 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 ARCHIVED TEMPORARY SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING NOTE This option will 1 print an archive activity report to specified PRINTER DEVICE and 2 will move archive data to permanent storage to specified ARCHIVE STORAGE DEVICE Select some type of SEQUENTIAL storage media such as SDP TAPE or DISK FILE HFS for archival storage PRINTER DEVICE PRINTER ARCHIVE STORAGE DEVICE MAGTAPE Parameter CAVL 0 2048 DO YOU WANT YOUR OUTPUT QUEUED NO YES Requested Start Time NOW Enter ARCHIVE DEVICE LABEL ISC6V3SMUA0 ARCHIVE 083092 3 Enter If the archive storage device is tape an archive device label is generated for you as depicted in the previous example You can override this label by
206. ation for the text that follows it and causes tabbing to the n column over from the left margin Output is right justified on the n column if n is negative For example the text following TAB 121 will begin at column 12 the text following TAB C will be centered WIDTH arg Specifies that the text that follows it will always be printed in a column arg characters wide Arg in other words is the difference between the left margin position and the right margin position lus one NOTE In the absence of aWIDTH specification the output column width is determined by the user or defaulted by the system at print time NOWRAP Causes the text that follows it to be printed line for line without wraparound This eliminates the need to end each line with a tab or start the line with a space to force the line to be printed as it stands WRAP Causes the text that follows it to be printed in wraparound mode This is the default setting UNDERLINE arg Causes the arg to be underlined Starts underlining Underlining continues until a second _ is encountered This only works on printers that underline January 2015 407 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques REF For additional information about functions see the Computed Expressions section Q NOTE In order to print a character you must enter it as Likewise to print enter I 11
207. be where it should start how many lines to skip before printing the field and the column title for the field You can also insert literal strings within the output For fields that have numeric values you can call for several arithmetic calculations and indicate the number of decimal digits of accuracy If you have requested subtotals in the sort dialogue by preceding the field with a calculations are done at the subtotal level as well A complete list of print qualifiers can be found in the Appendix to this manual Saving Print Criteria PRINT Templates January 2015 21 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data PRINT templates let you store your print field specifications for use at a later time You can retrieve the template at a later time by using the template name surrounded by square brackets Template names must be unique with respect to any other PRINT template created for the same file MSC Fileman will notify you if you try to create a template with a template name that already exists for a file PRINT templates are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 4 To see a list of all existing templates that pertain to the file you are dealing with enter a left bracket and a question mark at the prompt where you can retrieve templates For example FIRST PRINT FIELD This gives you a list of the PRINT templates available for your use with the file You are automatically prompted fo
208. being assigned to the DEMOG group DESCRIPTION 1 gt An entry is required If you do not know this patient s Social 2 gt Security Number enter 000000000 to indicate the number is 3 gt unknown EDIT Option lt Enter gt TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 1 gt lt Enter gt The DESCRIPTION and TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION attributes document the use and meaning of the field The information in DESCRIPTION is shown to the user when two question marks are entered at the EDIT Option prompt When initially creating a field you are prompted for the DESCRIPTION field after the HELP PROMPT The TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION is displayed only when the data dictionary is printed e NOTE Versions of MSC Fileman prior to Version 21 0 allowed you to also enter a Help Frame for field documentation that attribute is no longer supported DATA TYPE OF SSN FREE TEXT Enter MINIMUM LENGTH 9 Enter MAXIMUM LENGTH 9 Enter OPTIONAL PATTERN MATCH IN X X 9N Enter IS SSN ENTRY MANDATORY Y N Y Enter HELP PROMPT ANSWER MUST BE 9 CHARACTERS IN LENGTH Replace With Enter 9 numbers without dashes e g 666456789 Replace Enter Enter 9 numbers without dashes e g 666456789 To illustrate the use of GROUPS add the NAME DATE OF BIRTH and SEX fields into the DEMOG group Select FIELD NAME 240 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide LABEL N
209. bfields you want printed A subfield must be specified even if the multiple has only one subfield To print all fields in the file enter ALL uppercase at the FIRST PRINT FIELD prompt You are then prompted Do you mean ALL the fields in the file NO 20 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Enter YES to indicate all fields Otherwise the file is searched for field labels beginning with the letters ALL NOTE Fields from other files can also be printed using extended pointers This technique is described in the Using Computed Expressions in COMPUTED Fields section in the Computed Expressions chapter of the MSC Fileman Advanced User Manual You can also enter other computed expressions which are also described in that chapter Print Qualifier Reference MSC Fileman s print capabilities provide many ways to format a report If you don t specify any formatting controls a format is constructed automatically The width of each field s print area is computed using information from the field s definition The default width is the larger of the maximum number of characters allowed for the field and the length of the longest word of the field s label or other specification in the print dialogue Two inter column spaces are added to separate fields However by using print qualifiers at the PRINT FIELD prompt for each field you can indicate how long the field s print area should
210. by placing M code in this field only those with programmer access can enter code in this field When this M code is executed the local variable X will contain the date in MSC Fileman internal format Your M code should result in the local variable Y containing the date in the format you want exported If your format will be used with Kernel it is recommended that you make use of the date extrinsic functions provided by Kernel if possible O REF For more information on Kernel date extrinsic functions see the Kernel Developer s Guide Data from fields with DATA TYPE field values of DATE TIME in the primary file its Multiples and pointed to files are altered by the code in this field date values from other sources are not There is another way to change the exported output you can use a MSC Fileman function when selecting fields for export THEN EXPORT FIELD NUMDATE DATE OF BIRTH The DATE FORMAT field will have no effect on that output FILE HEADER Some applications require special information to process the data in the file that is imported For example the field names might be needed Also you may want to put some special data into the file for identification or documentation purposes The FILE HEADER field allows you to output information before the January 2015 361 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data stream of exported data This field can contain either a literal string surrounded
211. can correct the setting you need to make an emergency exit from the editor by using one of the following keystroke combinations e Press Esc OPO if your keyboard has an Escape key e Press Ctrl 2OPO if your keyboard does not have an Escape key Press lt Ctrl A gt lt Enter gt Q if neither of the above methods work NOTE You must enter all letters in the above key sequences in uppercase Screen Editor and Personal Computers Pasting and Uploading If you are accessing your hospital computer system from a personal computer PC you can paste text from an application on the PC into the Screen Editor and also upload files into the Screen Editor There are some issues to be aware of when pasting text or uploading files into the Screen Editor Symbol Characters Extended ASCII characters typically symbol characters cannot be stored in WORD PROCESSING fields Examples of such characters include smart quote characters bullets and symbols Such characters when encountered are stripped or replaced with a space or as appropriate To avoid problems uploading these types of characters you should January 2015 105 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Turn off smart quotes in your word processor on your personal computer Avoid using bullets e Avoid using symbols in your text such as 4 and Files Save as Text If you are uploading an entir
212. can jump from the current field to any other field in your current screen With your cursor resting at any field s prompt simply enter a caret and then the name of the field Differences In Scrolling Mode you must enter and store your response to one field prompt before you can continue to the next field In Screen Mode you can move the cursor from field prompt to field prompt without entering or storing any responses In Scrolling Mode your data values or responses to field prompts are 82 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide stored one at a time as you move from prompt to prompt In Screen Mode your responses to most prompts are stored only when you exit the form For a detailed explanation on creating Screenman forms see the Screenman Tutorial for Developers Manual available from www osehra org Screenman Screen Edit an Existing User NAME FMUSER ONE Page 1 of 5 NAME FMUSER ONE INITIAL OF TITLE OIT STAFF NICK NAME One SSN 000111659 DOB DEGREE MAIL CODE DISUSER TERMINATION DATE Termination Reason PRIMARY MENU OPTION Select SECONDARY MENU OPTIONS EVE TIU MED MANAGEMENT Want to edit ACCESS CODE Y N FILE MANAGER ACCESS CODE Want to edit VERIFY CODE Y N Select DIVISION SERVICE SECTION INFORMATION RESOURCES MANAGEME Exit Save Next Page Refresh Enter a command or followed by a caption to jump to a
213. can use the Edit File option to Edit the Name of a File Edit the file name at the FILE NAME prompt Delete a File If you enter an at sign O at the FILE NAME prompt you are given the choice of deleting the entire file and its data attribute dictionary including all of its templates and file definitions or just deleting the current individual entries in the file However you cannot delete a file that is pointed to by another file Enter or Edit the Description of a File You can enter or edit the word processing text description for documenting the file at the DESCRIPTION prompt This description appears in the Standard Modified Standard and Global Map format data dictionary listings Enter or Edit the Application Group You can enter or edit the Application Group at the Select APPLICATION GROUP prompt Enter a namespace from two to four characters indicating a package accessing this file Enter or Edit the Developer s Name You can enter or edit the name of the package developer at the DEVELOPER prompt Entering two question marks lets you choose from a list of names January 2015 279 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data 280 Enter or Edit the File Access Parameters You can enter or edit the security access to a file by making entries at the DATA DICTIONARY ACCESS READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS DELETE ACCESS LAYGO ACCESS and or AUDIT ACCESS prompts Ask
214. ced You want to list the EXAM DATE field from the RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries that point back to a patient From the PATIENT file enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME N S1 THEN PRINT FIELD RADIOLOGY EXAM Relational Jump By RADIOLOGY EXAM do you mean the RADIOLOGY EXAM File pointing via its EXAMINEE Field YES Enter THEN PRINT RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD EXAM DATE THEN PRINT RADIOLOGY EXAM FIELD Enter THEN PRINT FIELD Enter As indicated by this example you did not have to specify the EXAMINEE field That field was identified because it is a field in the RADIOLOGY EXAM file that points back to the current file The following is the output produced by these print specifications PATIENT LIST OCT 1 1996 15 12 PAGE 1 NAME EXAM DATE FMPATIENT 13 DEC 22 1995 FMPATIENT 14 FMPATIENT 15 1995 1993 FMPATIENT 10 SEP 29 1995 JUN 22 1996 The resulting output is a two column report containing names from the PATIENT file and corresponding examination dates from the RADIOLOGY EXAM file Since there may be several RADIOLOGY EXAM file entries for 154 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide a given patient this report is an example of a Multiple valued Multiline result being returned O REF For more information on Multiline results being returned see the Multiline Return Values section You can use Backwards Extended Pointers in the following places in MSC
215. chiving activity internal entry number and the SEARCH and PRINT templates used in archiving If an archiving activity is purged the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains the purge and archive date and the person who did the purge Beginning with MSC Fileman 20 0 the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file contains data about both archiving and extract activities A file can have only one active activity at a time either an archiving activity or an extract activity Archiving activities are selectable only within the Archiving options When you are doing an inquire on the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file the word ARCHIVING will appear for all archiving activities January 2015 385 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data 386 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Filegrams O NOTE In order to use the full capabilities of MSC Fileman s Filegram procedures Kernel 6 5 or later must be installed on your system Filegrams are a feature in MSC Fileman intended for use by System Managers Package Developers and Programmers A filegram is a process that moves a record also called an entry from a file on one computer system to a duplicate file on another independent computer system An independent computer system is defined as a system having its own database Sending data from the live account at a medical center to a test account at the same medical center is an example of moving a filegram locally Sending data
216. cifications as the extract field 5 If you are extracting DATA TYPE field values of any of the following 1 FREE TEXT 310 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 2 DATE TIME 3 NUMERIC 4 WORD PROCESSING 5 MUMPS Create the corresponding field in the destination file using the same specifications as the extract field 6 If you are extracting a Multiple type field create the corresponding field in the destination file as a Multiple type field Multiples in the source file are moved to Multiples in the destination file following the DATA TYPE field value recommendations The structure of the Multiple in the destination file should be the same as that in the source file down to the lowest level Multiple that you extract When extracting data in a Subfile at least one field from every Multiple level above the Subfile must also be extracted If you do not specify a field to extract at a higher level the 01 field at that level will automatically be extracted 7 If you are extracting a Backward Extended Pointer type field create the corresponding field in the destination file as a Multiple The Extract Tool resolves Backward Pointers Thus their values are moved to Multiples in the destination file 8 If the field you are extracting has an OUTPUT transform make sure the INPUT transform of the destination field can receive the data in the format generated by the OUTPUT transform ARCHIVAL ACTIVI
217. cify whether or not the entries should be deleted from the from file as they are transferred In this case the answer was NO to delete A simple report is created that lists the entries that were transferred You have the ability to route that list to a printer using the DEVICE prompt In addition you have considerable control over which entries are 294 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide transferred Your answers to the TRANSFER ENTRIES BY and START WITH prompts select entries in the same way that you specify sort criteria when describing a print output REF For more information on sort criteria and print output see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the MSC Fileman User Manual For example if you only wanted to transfer scholars born after 1900 to the NEW SCHOLAR file you could answer the TRANSFER ENTRIES BY prompt like this TRANSFER ENTRIES BY NAME DATE OF BIRTH gt 1900 WITHIN DATE OF BIRTH gt 1900 TRANSFER ENTRIES BY Enter O NOTE The Transfer File Entries option can be used to purge files You can define a SCHOLAR ARCHIVE file containing a subset of the fields that are in the original file perhaps the fields NAME SSN and DATE OF BIRTH you can then simply transfer into this separate file all or a selected group of entries from the original file deleting the entries as they are transferred Transferring Entries into a Ne
218. cript value if there is one Computed Values Those with programmer access can have any value in the cross reference be computed that is the value is determined from M code that sets the variable X 268 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Subscript Transforms Those with programmer access can define a Transform for Storage and a Transform for Display on subscripts in an index The Transform for Storage is code that transforms the internal value of a field before it is stored as a subscript in the index The Transform for Display is code that transforms the value stored in the index back to a form that can be displayed to the user SET and Kill Conditions Those with programmer access can enter M code that specifies whether the set or kill logic is fired The M code sets the variable X to Boolean true only if the logic should be executed The before and after values are available in the X X1 and X2 arrays The X X1 and X2 Arrays Those with programmer access can reference the X X1 and X2 arrays in the SET and KILL logic and the SET and KILL conditions of New Style cross references When a field is edited and the cross reference logic is executed the field s corresponding X1 array element contains the old value of the field the X2 array element contains the new value of the field and the X array element contains either the old or new value depending on whether the SET logic SET condi
219. d Footers You can print complex multi line headings by using a PRINT template to hold your heading format Suppose for example that you want the patient s name and date of birth to appear as the heading at every page break You could first create a PATIENT HEADER template as follows SORT BY NAME START WITH NAME FIRST Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD PATIENT NAME THEN PRINT FIELD NAME THEN PRINT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH C50 THEN PRINT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH THEN PRINT FIELD Enter kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Heading S C PATIENT LIST lt Enter gt STORE PRINT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE PATIENT HEADER Are you adding PATIENT HEADER as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No YES lt Enter gt Yes DEVICE Then at a later time when you do another print at the heading prompt enter the template name 28 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Heading S C PATIENT LIST PATIENT HEADER When you enter a PRINT template name such as PATIENT HEADER at the Heading S C prompt the format of the template is used as a replacement for the full normal report heading on each page of your report it replaces the full default heading including title time date page number field names and separator line Thus the header as defined above would contain no column headings and would not be separated from the body of the report by a horizontal line or even a blank line You can add t
220. d Prompt SHUI 72 Responding to PROMI DES eon me riei d ea i t atat ETET 73 Getting Online Help at Any Prompt Enter or esses 73 Incorrect Responses bi 74 Partial Res POSES osa ds 74 Default Responses aia 74 Longer Default Responses and the Replace With Editor 75 Prompts witha List Of CHOIGOS sesei e tons HR t M se eren fee Y Key EA euren PP tutte etatis odd en entries Mele fae Ulead tion urere rae i iae Lus 78 Special Responses to Field Prompts eee eh tere there tts 79 Sereen maA P 82 Scrolling Mode Editing vs Screen Mode Editing sess 82 Screenmatr SCLC Mesias onsite ttp onda 83 Cursor Movement Navigation Keystrokes sees 84 Tr Seat tes d nue cu tr E D EN e 87 Det 92 TOUDIESHOOH NS me M 93 A MM E 95 Choosing Word processing Editor oti re rp aN 95 Switching to Another Editor While Editing esses 96 Entering Text usi acest nd aeui ea ds a a 98 Entering Commiatids iei e oto deer tpe es 98 Cursor Movement Navigation Keystrokes ssees 99 Saving and EX daa 100 Finding Tebas a it 100 Lorhgattipe Tal SEMIS asada sica 101 Cutie dnd Pasting aaa 101 Deleting cnc t M 102 Setas ANALG lel o gt mo TE 103 TIonble5HOOUTIo o Cd lead stas 103 Screen Editor and Personal Computers sss 104 DATA UB OE d I
221. d for each field in the record Suppose for example you have a record with LASTNAME FMPATIENT FIRSTNAME ONE AGE 36 25 characters might be set aside for LASTNAME 20 characters for FIRSTNAME and 3 characters for AGE The resulting record exported in fixed length format would look like FMPATIENT ONE 36 Groups of records are exported line by line one line after another A file of records in fixed length format might look like January 2015 329 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data FMPATIENT TWO 29 FMPATIENT THREE 47 FMPATIENT FOUR 38 In order to use fixed length data format both applications the exporting application and the importing application must be able to recognize the format How to Export Data The following menu shows the options used to export data MSC Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Data Export to Foreign Format DDXP EXPORT MENU Define Foreign File Format DDXP DEFINE FORMAT gt Locked with DDXP DEFINE Select Fields for Export DDXP SELECT EXPORT FIELDS Create Export Template DDXP CREATE EXPORT TEMPLATE Export Data DDXP EXPORT DATA Print Format Documentation DDXP FORMAT DOCUMENTATION If you know how to print file entries you already know most of the procedures to export file entries The Export Tool is based on the standard MSC Fileman Print File Entries option O REF For more information on the Print
222. ds in the key have values are not null and that those field values taken together are unique across all records in the file Any problems are reported You can also save the entries that violate KEY INTEGRITY in a template Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILITY OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT Enter Select Subfile Enter Keys defined on file 716026 A PRIMARY KEY Uniqueness Index KEYA Field s 1 NAME 2 01 2 SSN 02 January 2015 287 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Choose V Verify E Edit D Delete C Create V Enter ERIFY Which Key do you wish to verify A Enter STORE THESE ENTRY ID S IN TEMPLATE Enter DEVICE HOME Enter Telnet terminal KEY INTEGRITY CHECK DEC 31 1998 09 23 PAGE 1 Key A 5 File 16026 Uniqueness Index KEYA 6 ENTRY NAME ERROR p FMPATIENT 10 Duplicate Key A 5 2 FMPATIENT 10 Duplicate Key A 5 3 FMPATIENT 25 Missing Key Field s SSN 16026 02 In this example records 1 and 2 have the same key and record 3 is missing a value for SSN field 02 288 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Transferring File Entries The Transfer Entries menu contains three options Transfer File Entries Compare Merge File Entries Namespace Compare These options allow you to transfer en
223. dual on the ultimate target system who in turn forwards it to their S DIFG SRV HISTORY server 22 Both the sender and the recipient can use the View Filegram option to inspect the filegram 23 Then the recipient of the filegram on the target system uses the Install Verify Filegram option to install the filegram into the destination file 24 Senders and recipients can delete a filegram at any time The recipient can choose to modify the S DIFG SRV HISTORY server or create another server to aid in the installation of filegrams O REF For additional information about setting up servers see the Kernel and MailMan documentation Filegram Steps Create Edit Filegram Template Option Use the Create Edit Filegram Template option to create a FILEGRAM type template or edit an existing FILEGRAM type template A FILEGRAM type template is similar to a regular PRINT template without any formatting instructions You always receive the STORE FILEGRAM LOGIC IN TEMPLATE prompt no matter how many fields you identify O REF For information about regular PRINT templates see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the MSC Fileman User Manual The Create Edit Filegram Template option is the first step in developing a January 2015 389 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data filegram there will not be a filegram without the template This template is also used in the archiving process Before using this
224. e PROCESSING field in question is empty null No argument is required CONTAINS NUMERIC FREE Enter a character string that TEXT WORD should be contained in PROCESSING matching entry fields MUMPS SET OF CODES and COMPUTED fields January 2015 39 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data MATCHES none NUMERIC FREE Enter a MUMPS pattern TEXT MUMPS match The pattern must be COMPUTED and valid for the MUMPS DATE TIME fields pattern match operator LESS THAN lt NUMERIC Enter a value that a COMPUTED SET matching entry field should OF CODES FREE be less than Non TEXT and NUMERIC fields are DATE TIME fields evaluated as if they were numbers Thus strings beginning with alpha characters are evaluated as zero EQUALS All data except Enter a value to which a WORD matching entry field should PROCESSING be equal GREATER gt NUMERIC Enter a value to which a THAN COMPUTED SET matching entry field should OF CODES FREE be less than Non TEXT and NUMERIC fields are DATE TIME fields evaluated as if they were numbers Thus strings beginning with alpha characters are evaluated as zero When you start your search MSC Fileman asks you to enter a field a condition and a value to which the field is compared For example to create a search condition that would find all entries whose DATE ACCESS CODE LAST CHANGED field contains a date older th
225. e to the sentence This example is simple EDIT Option 2 2 gt This example is sample Replace ample With imple Replace Enter This eximple is sample Edit line 112 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide As you can see from this example MSC Fileman replaced the first occurrence of the ample characters Thus example was changed to eximple rather than sample being changed to simple because the word example came before the word simple in the sentence i e it was the first occurrence Obviously we should have replaced the whole word sample with simple to avoid any confusion Shortcuts at the Heplace With Prompt As with editing long field values you can replace long strings of characters by using ellipses An ellipsis is three successive periods When editing you can replace longer strings of characters by using an ellipsis at the Replace prompt You can specify ranges of text to replace for any line just as with a long text field with the ellipsis For example to replace an entire line at a Replace With prompt enter the ellipsis three periods at the Replace prompt You are then able to replace the entire default with what you entered at the With prompt EDIT Option 5 5 gt care of the boxes Replace With care to replace the existing supplies Replace Enter care to replace the existing supplies Edit
226. e Part 5 Defining Data WORD PROCESSING since by definition such types take Multiline values Two special questions are asked about Multiple valued fields SHOULD USER SEE AN ADDING NEW ENTRY MESSAGE FOR NEW ENTRIES Y N Answering NO here means that the new Diagnosis or whatever the Multiple is named gets added without a verification prompt being asked HAVING ENTERED OR EDITED ONE SHOULD USER BE ASKED ANOTHER Y N Answering YES means that the user is prompted to put in several diagnoses one right after the other NO means that the user is not prompted to enter a second value Making a Field Mandatory For all DATA TYPE field values except COMPUTED as you create the field you are asked the following IS xxxxxxxx ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO The xxxxxxxx represents the name of the field If you answer YES the user of your file will not be allowed to skip the field without entering data for a particular entry Field Number Sequences It is often useful to sequence the fields so that when you are using the Enter or Edit File Entries option and you ask to edit ALL fields you will see the field questions presented in a natural order If you want to add a CURRENT AGE field to our PATIENT file and place it between DATE OF BIRTH 2 and RELIGION 3 the dialogue would be Select FIELD 2 5 236 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Are you addin
227. e list of entries found in the search at the SORT BY prompt In this case the new search is done against the entries in the SEARCH template rather than the entire file Answer the SORT BY prompt with the bracketed SEARCH template name SORT BY NAME RESEARCH 1 Reusing Search Results in a Print When doing MSC Fileman prints you can also recall the results of a previous search at the SORT BY prompt In this case the entries saved in the SEARCH template are the ones printed in the report This is handy if you do a search collect a group of entries and then want to print several different reports based on the same set of entries Internal vs External Field Values for Search Conditions Forall SET OF CODES field types you must use external values for the search conditions For DATE TIME field types you can enter internal or external values for the search conditions For other DATA TYPE field values i e NUMERIC COMPUTED and FREE TEXT there is no difference between internal and external value For POINTER TO A FILE or VARIABLE POINTER fields the sort is based on the field type of the 01 field of the pointed to file Print Number of Matches Found 46 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide If you only want to print the number of matches found without printing any of the matched entries answer the FIRST PRINT FIELD prompt by simply pressing the Ent
228. e the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD ORDER TEXT You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 01 in Sub File 772 02 of File 772 FIELD LABEL MESSAGE TEX DATA TYPE WORD PROCESSING lm ooo o C c 2 9 99029 9 1241 amp c c SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE YES A SHALL CHARACTERS IN THIS TEXT BE TREATED LIKE ANY OTHER CHARACTERS NO ia anuary 2015 249 J y MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT The text of the incoming messages for this transmission XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With WORD PROCESSINC type fields MSC Fileman asks two questions in the popup window SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE If you answer YES to this question text is automatically wrapped at word boundaries to fit in the column in which it is being printed Yes is the default SHALL Nr CHARACTER
229. e what is entered matches a certain format For example if you are entering a Social Security Number which is stored as a DATA TYPE field value of FREE TEXT not NUMERIC your input would typically be checked to make sure it is nine characters in length and contains all digits SSN abcde Enter ANSWER MUST BE 9 CHARACTERS IN LENGTH SSN 99999 Enter ANSWER MUST BE 9 CHARACTERS IN LENGTH SSN 33233290 Enter ANSWER MUST BE 9 CHARACTERS IN LENGTH SSN 000232343 DATE WORD PROCESSING Fields DATA TYPE field values of WORD PROCESSING can contain unlimited amounts of text data and are suitable for things like mail messages physician notes and descriptions Because of their special nature MSC Fileman provides special tools for entering and editing data into this kind of a field Two editors for editing WORD PROCESSING field types are provided with MSC Fileman and described in their own chapters in this manual Screen Editor Line Editor These chapter also explains how you can set your default editor and switch your current editor on the fly For most people the Screen Editor should be your Preferred Editor for WORD PROCESSING fields When you encounter a WORD PROCESSING field type if your default editor is the Screen Editor a portion of any existing text is displayed and you ll be prompted Edit NO January 2015 63 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating a
230. e word processing document as opposed to pasting save it first as a Text Only with Line Breaks or similar file type in your personal computer word processor Wrap Vs No Wrap If your source document contains a carriage return at the end of every line turn WRAP off in the Screen Editor before you paste or upload by pressing lt PF2 gt Turn it back on once the paste or upload is completed If your source document contains a carriage return at the end of each paragraph only however leave WRAP on in the Screen Editor Avoiding Lost Characters If the host computer system can t keep up with the your text upload characters can get lost This can be a factor if you upload large quantities of text or characters This character loss can occur because pastes and ASCII uploads don t use error correcting communications protocols If you notice characters getting lost one way to solve this is to adjust the character pacing or similar setting in your terminal emulation program This can slow down the transfer of text such that characters no longer get lost due to communications overload If you need to paste or upload large quantities of text consider switching to an Alternate Editor such as Kermit that uses an error correcting communications protocol This automatically compensates for communications overflows preventing the loss of characters during text 106 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman
231. e z bic arsed etse tore tr US adiu abb ses o EDU ede vata uds 413 Orientation MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Orientation The purpose of this manual is to gather all the options and features available to users in MSC Fileman 22 2 into one source It is intended as a reference work so that users can look up information about specific item they are using This is not a good manual for learning how to use Fileman s options and features New users should begin with the MSC Fileman 22 2 Getting Started Manual and more advanced users can find help in the MSC Fileman 22 2 Advanced User Manual Users familiar with the manual suite from previous versions of Fileman may find that some things are missing from this user manual Information on system administration has been moved to the MSC Fileman 22 2 Technical Manual Information on auditing has been moved to the MSC Fileman 22 2 Security and Privacy Manual This manual uses VA conventions for displaying mockups of sensitive data in illustrations and screen captures The first three digits prefix of any social security numbers SSN will begin with 000 Patient and user names will be formatted as FMPATIENT N and FMUSER N respectively where N represents the first name as a number spelled out Screen captures and computer source code are shown in a non proportional font and enclosed within a box The user s responses to online prompts will be boldface Most screen captu
232. each DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSIS is a Multiple valued field that has the following information An AGE AT ONSET A HISTORY e A PROVIDER e g a primary care physician For a list of valid PROVIDERS you would consult File 6 and then File 16 If the PROVIDER s name does not appear it can then be entered in File 16 since LAYGO Learn As You Go has been allowed e A SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER SSN Condensed Data Dictionary Another format for listing a file s attributes is the Condensed format and the following example illustrates a Condensed data dictionary listing CONDENSED DATA DICTIONARY PATIENT FILE 16026 UCI VAH KXX STORED IN DIZ 16026 05 31 91 PAGE 1 200 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide FILE SECURITY DD SECURITY DELETE SECURITY READ SECURITY LAYGO SECURITY WRITE SECURITY CROSS REFERENCED BY NAME B FILE STRUCTURE FIELD FIELD NUMBER NAME 01 NAME RF 0 1 1 SEX RS 0 2 2 DATE OF BIRTH RD 0 3 3 RELIGION P13 0 4 4 DIAGNOSIS Multiple 16026 04 1 0 01 DIAGNOSIS MF 0 1 1 AGE AT ONSET NJ3 0 0 2 2 HISTORY Multiple 16026 42 1 0 01 HISTORY W 0 1 5 PROVIDER V 2 1 6 SSN RFa 2 2 The codes in parentheses following the field names in the Condensed data dictionary contain information regarding the specifications of the field Here is a complete list of those codes and th
233. ecified as an identifier for a file simply by using the Identifier option available on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY A multiple valued field cannot be designated as an identifier however a subfield of that multiple valued field can be designated as an identifier for the multiple The DIAGNOSIS field in the PATIENT file cannot for example be designated as an identifier but its subfield AGE AT ONSET can be designated as an identifier of DIAGNOSIS This feature is discussed in more detail later in this section These are the steps for setting up the sample SSN field as an identifier MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD SSN Want to make SSN an identifier NO Y Want to display SSN whenever a lookup is done on an entry in the PATIENT file YES Enter Here the positive answer to the last question causes the patient s SSN value to show up whenever a lookup on a patient is done For example Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 1 FMPATIENT 25 000223333 2 FMPATIENT 29 000114444 CHOOSE 1 2 An identifier field will not be asked if its WRITE access security does not match the MSC Fileman Access Code of the user If the identifier field has been specified in the Modify File Attributes option as a required field the 274 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide user must type a valid answer to its prompt when it is asked as an identifier otherwise the entry jus
234. ecify fields to extract and their corresponding mapping in the destination file For more detailed description of requirements on the destination file please see your MSC Fileman User Manual OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE DESTINATION FILE CHANGE EXTRACT FIRST EXTRACT CHANGE FIELD 01 Enter NO MAP NO TO CHANGE EXTRACT FIELD 01 Enter NO January 2015 319 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data THEN EXTRACT CHANGE FIELD VERSION MAP VERSION TO CHANGE EXTRACT FIELD VERSION THEN EXTRACT CHANGE FIELD PROGRAMMER MAP PROGRAMMER TO CHANGE EXTRACT FIELD PROGRAMMER STORE EXTRACT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE CHANGE EXTRACT Are you adding CHANGE EXTRACT as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No YES While you are creating your EXTRACT template MSC Fileman performs a few validation checks Inspecting the extract field and its corresponding field in the destination file MSC Fileman checks to see if both fields are compatible in several important areas including data type minimum length maximum length minimum values maximum values If a discrepancy exists MSC Fileman will display an error message such as the following statement PROGRAMMER field in CHANGE EXTRACT file should have a maximum length of at least 30 characters After MSC Fileman displays an error message about your destination field you can continue building your template You will not however be able to update the de
235. ed to a printer or the screen CRT must occur Printing fields that uniquely identify the entries being archived gives you a permanent record of the archived entries You cannot create an archiving activity until at least one entry is located according to your search criteria sorted and printed to a printer or a terminal O NOTE If a subentry to be archived is contained in a Multiple field the entire entry must be archived An example of the dialogue you may encounter follows Notice the sequence of search sort and print 372 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ARCHIVE FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE A SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD 01 Enter NO A CONDITION LESS THAN A LESS THAN 900 B SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD Enter IF A Enter NO LESS THAN 900 STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE ZZTEST TEMPLATE Are you adding ZZTEST TEMPLATE as a new SORT TEMPLATE No Y Enter Yes SORT BY VERSION START WITH VERSION FIRST Enter WITHIN VERSION SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD 01 Enter NO THEN PRINT FIELD VERSION THEN PRINT FIELD PROGRAMMER THEN PRINT FIELD Enter HEADING CHANGE ARCHIVE SEARCH Replace Enter DEVICE Enter CHANGE ARCHIVE SEARCH AUG 30 1992 10 59 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 3 MATCHES FOUND After using this option the s
236. ed to create an EXPORT template Since that template relies on the information in the FOREIGN FORMAT file s entry at the time the template was created you cannot modify this format Instead you are given the option of seeing what is in the format Do you want to see the contents of 123 IMPORT NUMBERS format NO YES NAME 123 IMPORT NUMBERS FIELD DELIMITER 032 MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH 0 FORMAT USED YES QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS YES PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE YES SEND LAST FIELD DELIMITER YES SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL O0 DESCRIPTION This format exports data for use with LOTUS 1 2 3 spreadsheets Non numeric fields will be in quotes Each field will be separated by a space A 0 will be exported for null valued numeric fields in the primary file USAGE NOTES To import into 1 2 3 choose FILE gt IMPORT gt NUMBERS As this example shows the FORMAT USED field is YES This indicates that the format has been used to create an EXPORT template Whether you ask to see the contents of the format or not you are next given the chance to make a copy of the format in order to modify it You enter a name for the new format that does not yet exist in the FOREIGN FORMAT file Do you want to use 123 IMPORT NUMBERS as the basis for a new format NO YES lt Enter gt Name for new FOREIGN FORMAT CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Are you adding CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS as a new FOREIGN FORMAT the 22ND No Y Enter W
237. ed to press lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt four or five times to get to your report s field header line Then as you scroll through your report the Browser header line contains the field names that match and help identify the data you re scrolling through Switch to another document lt PF1 gt S Adds another document to the active list of documents and switches to it Choose another VA FileMan file field and entry for the document to switch to Return to previous document after having switched at least once Press R Pressed repeatedly R returns you all the way back to your first document Split Screen while in Full Screen Mode lt PF2 gt 5S Move Cursor to Lower Screen in Split Screen Mode lt PF2 gt lt ArrowDown gt January 2015 55 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Move Cursor to lt PF2 gt lt ArrowUp gt Upper Screen in Split Screen Mode Resize screens in lt PF2 gt lt PF2 gt lt ArrowUp gt Split Screen Mode and lt PF2 gt lt PF2 gt lt ArrowDown gt Return to Full Screen PF2 F from Split Screen Mode The Browser as an Option If you like the Browser you can also use it to view the contents of any word processing field that you have access to You can call up the Browser by choosing Other from MSC Fileman s main menu then selecting Browser from the Other submenu MSC Fileman then prompts you f
238. eference Guide OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD 3 Enter SSN Want to make SSN a specifier NO YES Is the value of this field unique for each entry NO YES Answer YES only if you have a regular cross reference on the field that you are making a specifier A field can be a specifier without being unique If you answer YES a dialogue similar to the following occurs Select one of the following 1C REGULAR If one of the above provides a direct look up by SSN please enter its number or name 1 To delete a specifier Select FIELD 3 lt Enter gt SSN SSN is already a specifier Do you want to delete it NO YES Generate Filegram Option The Generate Filegram option is used by a filegram sender Be sure that the DUZ correctly identifies the filegram sender the DUZ is used to identify the filegram s sender to the recipient The option creates a filegram in MailMan message format after you designate a file FILEGRAM type template and a file entry Concurrently it creates a record in the FILEGRAM HISTORY File the FILEGRAM HISTORY file 41 12 points to the MESSAGE file 3 9 The record created in the FILEGRAM HISTORY file is called a filegram history The filegram history allows MSC Fileman to differentiate between a filegram message and a mail message After the filegram is placed into the mail message you can send it to an individual at any established address Janua
239. eie tertie trot tert tens 356 SET and Kill GOndiWofio neriesi reiini E Roof i January 2015 429 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Index CTOSSSEGIOPOTI tdi arde ieu rec et 269 cens deri lias scc 409 IDADES nA E EE 31 338 SORT Lem plat etra et rre dd we tfe 19 126p 338 S ttine NUDOS 15 A UE M 15 SOLES With MUA Plena at ER POPES Data oy sad vac dci iia 344 SOUNDEX Cross TO accio 264 is A E de a t vba 388 392 Standard Captioned OUEDUE s seco HORE dcr de ados easi es 7 Statistical PemmtOualiflerS oso aeter t tcd iet tii n oe eeu 333 POE ALLS LCS ierti cau eek scotia at amer alid edt ipaa on ty duis deben 31 otatistics OPTION wise cai Savas db ou rans bio be bienes Ab o tpa e 31 Subs ript PAT SLOTS hig eoe estes onto tet ptt Dat acces usa dvi tUe ade est CLOS TES c ae eigo e Ruso Ont po POSU Noct eH a SEES 269 SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL Field er tepore rot roter 360 SUMMARIZE ACI tid tet ets tes ep astuces 302 grip c H M H Q Computed EXxpr ssiONS tcs 130 itu mL 404 Template Edit ODIO Gad ese voee eo PIE ve ate te 123pp 345 Text Formatting ausos PRO OOO hb ee n FR Ye pe eei C adr aside dopo e Expressions in Word Processing Windows sse 405 Word Processing Pell Noire nbn fie e ente even a Advanced Edit Techniques eee eene tates 403 Traditional C ross reteter e5 ooo Dass ts cenit dicite beta tee as CAE aseo n eis dene dn eh amie Pas be
240. eir meanings The field has been marked for auditing all the time ERI The auditing is only on edit or delete For Multiples new subentries can be added without being asked BC The data is Boolean computed true or false and C the data is computed 201 January 2015 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data D the dataisdatevalued O To specify printing n characters with d decimals O The field has an OUTPUT anson Y the ata is a VARIABLEPOINTER U V WL The WORD PROCESSING data is normally printed in line mode i e without word wrap X Editing is not allowed under the Modify File Attributes option because the INPUT transform has been modified under the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY 202 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide There is a screen associated with a DATA TYPE field value of any of the following POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER SET OF CODES For example the SSN field is required R is FREE TEXT E and is audited a Standard and Modified Standard Data Dictionaries The most complete information about a file is obtained by using the Standard data dictionary format which is the default for the List File Attributes option In addition to detailed information about every field in the file the Standard data dictionary format gives the file access identifiers cross references other files p
241. eld is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With COMPUTED type January 2015 251 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data fields MSC Fileman displays the characteristics of the computed expression in the popup window O REF The syntax of these expressions is explained fully in the Computed Expressions section Field 4 68 is the RELEASE DATE TIME field The JUST RELEASED field will be TRUE if the RELEASE DATE TIME was less than two days ago O NOTE You can specify this virtual value to be BOOLEAN STRING VALUED DATE VALUED or NUMERIC Only in the last case are the three fields following the TYPE OF RESULT prompt editable POINTER TO A FILE Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the WHO ENTERED field 43 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of POINTER TO A FILE Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER lt Enter gt Select FIELD WHO ENTERED You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 13 in File 100 FIELD LABEL WHO ENTERED DATA TYPE POINTER c eee ee c c ee ee i es q POINT TO WHICH FILE NAZIO A SHALL ADDING
242. eld s data dictionary definition says to always print in word wrap mode WORD PROCESSING DATA TYPEs are automatically wrapped The W suffix overrides the R or L suffixes do not use them together field X Suppress header and inter column spaces Follow the field specification with X to suppress the two spaces normally inserted before a field and the column header for the field The result is concatenation of the field with the field that came before it The X suffix is often used to add a literal caption to a field 416 January 2015 Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide field xxx Customize header The default header for columns of a report is the field label for fields or a computed expression for on the fly computed expressions To change the header follow the field label with a semicolon and the column header you want Enclose the header in quotes When possible spaces wrap the substitute header within a print width obtained from the field s data definition For example THEN PRINT FIELD DOB Date of Birth THEN PRINT FIELD DOB Date of Birth The first specification prints the header on two lines the second prints it on one line with underscores To suppress the header add to the field field Yn Set start row position You can start printing a field on any line on the page If n is positive
243. en file or determine whether a specific entry is duplicated Returns one of the possible Boolean values 1 field value is duplicated in another entry January 2015 field value is unique 175 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Example using the Search File Entries option to perform a search on the example file named ZZINDIVIDUAL Select OPTION SEARCH FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE ZZINDIVIDUAL Enter A SEARCH FOR ZZINDIVIDUAL FIELD DUPLICATED NAME B SEARCH FOR ZZINDIVIDUAL FIELD IF A Enter DUPLICATED NAME STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE Enter SORT BY NAME Enter START WITH NAME FIRST Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD NUMBER THEN PRINT FIELD NAME THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C ZZINDIVIDUAL SEARCH Enter DEVICE Enter Telnet Terminal Right Margin 80 Enter ZZINDIVIDUAL SEARC MAR 18 2008 14 44 PAGE 1 NUMBER FMPATIENT ONE FMPATIENT ONE 2 MATCHES FOUND Another example for using DUPLICATED this time using Option PRINT FILE ENTRIES would be if you wanted to print the name with three asterisks in front of it if it were a duplicated name FIRST PRINT FIELD SS DUPLICATED NAME 1 NAME FILE FILE vpointer 176 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide vpointer is the label or field number of a variable pointer field U
244. en there are no records to print print sort Criteria in heading Heading PATIENT LIST Thus at the Heading S C prompt you can Enter S to not print the heading i e not print anything if no records are found to print Enter C to print sort criteria in the report heading on the first page Entera new heading to replace the default heading or press the Enter key to accept the default heading Suppressing Report Headings and Page Feeds If you do not want headings to be printed in your output enter an at sign at the HEADING prompt HEADING PATIENT LIST January 2015 27 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data If you want neither headings nor page feeds in your output enter two at signs 00 at the HEADING prompt If you suppress the headings in your output and also save your print criteria in a PRINT template you will be asked DO YOU ALWAYS WANT TO SUPPRESS SUBHEADERS WHEN PRINTING TEMPLATE Subheaders are the names of SORT BY fields you see in the body of your report when you don t include those SORT BY fields as print fields To automatically suppress all subheaders answer YES at this prompt NOTE When you are sorting you can suppress subheaders individually at each sort level by entering an at sign in front of the field on which you are sorting For more information see the Sorting section Custom Headings an
245. entering your own device label information If you select an archive storage device that is non sequential a warning is issued You are then given the option to continue the archiving process CAUTION If you specify a device that can be overwritten e g SDP 380 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide or that does rot electronically store data e g a printer the data will be forever irretrievable Depending on what devices are selected and whether queueing was requested for either device different warnings will be issued informing the user of either steps he need to take or steps that the program will take as a result of the queueing request Here is an example of an archive activity report ARCHIVE ACTIVITY REPORT AUG 30 1992 PAGE 1 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 ARCHIVE DEVICE LABEL INFORMATION ISC6V3 MUAO ARCHIVE 083092 3 PRIMARY ARCHIVED FILE CHANGE 16000 ARCHIVER FMEMPLOYEE J SEARCH CRITERIA 01 LESS THAN 900 INDEX INFORMATION NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 PLEASE KEEP THIS FOR FUTURE REFERENCE Purge Stored Entries Before running the Purge Stored Entries option use the Find Archived Entries option to verify that the archive medium contains the complete archived data for an archiving activity by searching for the last record listed on the index This o
246. ents normal exiting any changes you ve made in the current WORD PROCESSING field are not saved On the other hand if you time out when editing text your changes are saved Finding Text Action Key Sequence Find text not case sensitive lt PF1 gt F Brings up a Find dialogue see picture below To search for text downward enter the text to find and press the Enter key To search for text upward enter the text to find and press lt ArrowUp gt Find next occurrence of text lt PF1 gt N Find Replace text lt PF1 gt P Find What _ Replace with Option Find Next Replace Replace All Quit January 2015 101 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Formatting Paragraphs Action Key Sequence Join and or break the lt PF1 gt J current line and next line Make sure Wrap mode is on before joining or breaking lines Toggle Wrap mode with lt PF2 gt Reformat paragraph PFI R Joins and or breaks all lines between current line and next blank line to create a word wrapped paragraph Make sure Wrap mode is on first Toggle with lt PF2 gt Cutting and Pasting Action Key Sequence Select Mark text lt PF1 gt M Position the cursor at the beginning of the text you wish to select and press lt PF1 gt M Move the cursor to the end of the text you want and press lt PF1 gt M again The selected text is hig
247. er which is the message that is displayed to users when they enter a single question mark while editing the ORDER field can be edited The DESCRIPTION and TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION fields are multi line WORD PROCESSING fields to edit them press the Enter key and a separate screen opens i e a popup window The DESCRIPTION is displayed to users who enter two question marks while editing the ORDER field The TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION however is for internal documentation only January 2015 223 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data DATE TIME Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as DATE TIME allows you to enter a minimum and maximum date You can also indicate whether the date can be entered with an imprecise date e g JUL 1969 or with the time of day e g JUL 2004 MSC Fileman does not accept dates before 1700 For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME you are asked the following questions Select FIELD DATE OF BIRTH Are you adding DATE OF BIRTH as a new FIELD NO Y DATA TYPE OF DATE OF BIRTH DATE TIME EARLIEST DATE OPTIONAL 1 1 1860 LATEST DATE 1963 CAN DATE BE IMPRECISE Y N YES Enter CAN TIME OF DAY BE ENTERED Y N NO Enter If you reply YES to the CAN TIME OF DAY BE ENTERED Y N NO prompt you would then be asked CAN SECONDS BE ENTERED WILL DATE OF BIRTH FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS DATE OF BIRTH
248. er Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Multiple valued fields cannot be changed to single valued fields or vice versa Multiple valued fields can only be defined when creating a field COMPUTED fields cannot be changed to other types of fields or vice versa e WORD PROCESSINC type fields should only be changed into Multiple valued FREE TEXT fields OnlyaMultiple valued FREE TEXT field can be changed into a WORD PROCESSING field and only if no other subfields are defined for that field POINTER TO A FILE type fields cannot be changed to VARIABLE POINTER type fields or vice versa Deleting an Existing Field Deleting a field and its definition is done by deleting the field Name LABEL Delete the field by typing the at sign after the display of a field s LABEL when using the Modify File Attributes option Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD SEX LABEL SEX SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE THE ENTIRE SEX FIELD YES OK TO DELETE SEX FIELDS IN THE EXISTING ENTRIES YES A CAUTION If you answer NO to the OK TO DELETE question data conflicts may occur in the future if you create new fields It is advisable to always delete existing entries Only a programmer can delete the entries after you have answered NO 242 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Examples o
249. er key Searching Multiples Searching on multiple valued fields like the DIAGNOSIS field in the PATIENT file is a special situation You must specify whether a truth test is to be considered met if at least one of the subentries for an entry passes the test or if all the subentries must pass the test When truth tests contain a negative contains a single quote you can even specify that an entry with no subentries should automatically pass the test Suppose for example that you want to search for all patients who were born before 1900 and who don t have a DIAGNOSIS containing the word ANGINA Select MSC Fileman Option SEARCH Enter File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter A SEARCH FOR PATIENT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH A CONDITION Enter LESS THAN A LESS THAN DATE 1920 Enter 1920 B SEARCH FOR PATIENT FIELD SERVICE CONNECTED 1 SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS multiple 2 SERVICE CONNECTED PERCENTAGE 3 SERVICE CONNECTED CHOOSE 1 3 1 Enter SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS multiple B SEARCH FOR PATIENT SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS SUB FIELD SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS B CONDITION Enter CONTAINS B CONTAINS ANGINA C SEARCH FOR PATIENT SERVICE CONNECTED CONDITIONS SUB FIELD Enter C SEARCH FOR PATIENT FIELD Enter January 2015 47 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data IF A amp B Enter DATE OF BIRTH LESS THAN 1
250. er you give the new file a name you are asked Select FIELD Enter a new field name and respond with YES when MSC Fileman asks Are you adding xxxxxxxx as a new FIELD The xxxxxxxx represents the name of the field you entered After answering YES to this prompt you are now ready to specify what sort of data the new field will contain A field can only be one type of data the choices are listed in the following section 220 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Field Data Types There are nine data types DATE TIME Dates with or without time stamps 2 NUMERIC DATA TYPE fields of NUMERIC including dollar values 3 SET OF CODES Codes that represent values e g 1 MALE 2 FEMALE 4 FREE TEXT A single alphanumeric string of characters WORD PROCESSING A Multiline document of text 6 COMPUTED A virtual field values not stored POINTER TO AFILE Referencing an entry in some other file Za VARIABLE POINTER Referencing an entry in a defined set of files 9 MUMPS Used by programmers to enter M code You are asked for the DATA TYPE field value for any field you are creating You must pick one of these nine choices Data validation checks are then asked depending on the DATA TYPE field value entered For some data types a default HELP prompt is automatically composed O NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the
251. ered lines in the WORD PROCESSING field You can then easily choose the lines to be transferred If the field from which you are transferring text displays text without wrapping you ll receive the following message WARNING The field you are transferring text from displays text without 120 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide wrapping The field you are transferring text into may display text differently Do you want to continue Enter Yes or No Consider the possibility that the text transferred from the no wrap field may be unreadable if the field you are transferring into does wrap text For example a spreadsheet might lose the alignment of its columns If the transfer does not succeed the message no change is shown The transfer might fail for several reasons ncorrect syntax for the extended pointer Anattempted transfer from other than a WORD PROCESSING field type e Lack of permission to read the file from which you are trying to extract text You must have READ ACCESS to transfer text from a file For details of the different types of file security see the MSC Fileman Security and Privacy Manual January 2015 121 Part 3 Templates Part 3 Templates MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Templates The Template Edit option available on the MSC Fileman Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY is used to edit each
252. ers If a number comes from a field in your primary file that is defined as NUMERIC or COMPUTED that number will be exported with all leading spaces or trailing insignificant zeros removed This is different from the way that the regular MSC Fileman Print File Entries works If the field had a value of zero the character zero 0 will be exported If the value of a numeric field in the primary file is null the exported value will depend on the contents of the SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL field for the format being used If a number comes from a source other than a DATA TYPE field of NUMERIC or COMPUTED in the primary file it can be output with leading spaces or trailing insignificant zeros Such a number might originate from a field in a pointed to file reached by the relational syntax a MSC Fileman function or other computed expression In these cases the 342 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide value of the SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL field will usually have no effect on what is exported O NOTE Whether exported numbers have leading spaces or trailing insignificant zeros and whether nulls produce special output is controlled by how the field is defined in the MSC Fileman data dictionary The DATA TYPE field input by the user when the PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE field contains YES does not affect these characteristics of the export Special Considerations Multiples Data Flattening Data exported from Multiples is
253. ersion The entries are not really gone merely locked Also after using this option you cannot add or delete entries to an archiving activity If changes in the selection of entries for archiving is necessary you have to cancel this activity and restart CAUTION This process can be quite time consuming It can be queued at the DEVICE prompt After it is completed the status of your archiving activity is ARCHIVED TEMPORARY In the dialogue below the entries in Archiving Activity 3 are being sent to temporary storage using the ZZTESTFILEGRAM FILEGRAM type template The task is being queued with output sent to PRINTER The resulting report contains a header dots and archiving totals as shown below Select ARCHIVE OPTION WRITE Enter ENTRIES TO TEMPORARY STORAGE Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING You MUST enter a FILEGRAM template name This FILEGRAM template will be used to actually build the archive message PRINT TEMPLATE ZZTESTFILEGRAM Enter FILEGRAM AUG 30 1992 USER 60 FILE 16000 DEVICE Q lt Enter gt UEUE TO PRINT ON 378 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide DEVICE PRINTER CHANGE ARCHIVING ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 15 01 PAGE 1 4 ITEMS HAVE BEEN ARCHIVED Move Archived Data to Permanent Storage Once you have written an archiving activity to temporary storage you can use
254. es The structures of MSC Fileman files are stored in the data dictionary DD There you can find the specifications of every field in every file Frequently you need to know the information in the DD usually field names and descriptions to successfully access and use the data in MSC Fileman s files The Data Dictionary Utilities submenu contains the following utilities that show information about files List File Attributes Map Pointer Relations Check Fix DD Structure Find Pointers Into a File List File Attributes Option To get a listing of the fields in a file and other file attributes use the List File Attributes option This listing displays the structure of the file and the characteristics of the fields in the file it does not show entries records or any data contained in the file This information can be very useful when deciding what fields to include in a report or what fields to edit You have your choice of the following formats for the listing Brief Condensed Standard or Modified Standard Custom Tailored Templates Only Global Map Indexes and Cross References Only Keys Only January 2015 197 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data First choose the file to display information about you can use either its file number or name When you select the file you have the option of requesting a range of files If you select a range of files the file number of the go to file must
255. es ODEHOD oco tete cod isset te a de fi e eren 307 Purge Stored Entries Opina 323 371 378 381p QUOTE NONSNUMNERIC FIELDS Field ss tette tens 358 Quoted Fields in Delimited Format essen 329 Re Index Fde ODLUOR ewe e retain pw pee 268 275p READ ACCESS us eno Lotta oa 123 290 RECORD DELIMITER EIOS ata 356 RECORD LENGTH FIXED Held cata atn irn e rte eiie 356 REGULAR CrOSSStefefGfl COS rito dtd eus 263 Relational co eosdebet t tesa od cb v A iea prse utet Dad Jumps Across Pile Gece seers sacs actin rok teaches A eee Relational Navigation vais eee tonto ttes eti reti ten estote iade 151 Navigation A A A 146 backward Extended Ponte avia 152 Simple Extended Pointer das 147 Simple Extended Polterypib axes eecoe ia 148 RELIGION El HS sara E EEE A tin vesner ee 334 RESPONSES Mal plenas i ert tme ebat et eon te ds e uri 257 Scattergram a su adsis A el ENEY 33 Screenman shortcut Ke Sado ord eese Padi ioco ita 86 bereemnamn Zoom EOIOE coss de Sesto ertu E acne SUE A 88 search conditons e occae a tee Panic e A eit s arr dat Ed 39 46 Search File Entries Option csse 31 142 151 155 313 372 SEARCH Templates aia 45 306 312pp 322 338 372 385 sereno mili peli iia 47 Select Entries to Archive OptoOFi iia 370p Select Entries to Extract ON a ie loa ii 312p Select Fields tor Export OpUOT i eee ridad 331p 345 SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS Templates nai 331pp SEND LAST FIELD DELIMITER Field
256. es are checked to assure that they exist and reference and existing entry Thelength of a cross referenced is verified to be no greater than 30 characters January 2015 259 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Following is a sample report illustrating how the Verify Fields option identifies the field and cross reference being checked and shows the IEN entry 01 value and a brief description of each error found VERIFY FIELDS REPORT KBAN BROKEN FILE FILE 11310003 JAN 09 2013 14 33 PAGE 1 11310003 01 FIELD 01 NAME FREE TEXT CHECKING CROSS REFERENCE ENTRYZ NAME ERROR 6 BAD B XREF BAD B XREF not properly Cross referenc 10 THIRTY TWO CHARACTER LIMIT ENT WRONG B CROSS REF BAD B XREF 99 99 DANGLING B CROSS REF BAD B XREF 9 LOOPY OUTPUT TRANSFORM WRONG B CROSS REF LOOPY OUTPUT TRANS 10 THIRTY TWO CHARACTER LIMIT ENT DUPLICATE B CROSS REF THIRTY TWO CHAR 11310003 02 FIELD 2 02 POINTER POINTER CHECKING CROSS REFERENCE ENTRYZ NAME ERROR 2 BAD POINTER No 6666 in pointed to File 7 BAD C POINTER XREF 4 not properly Cross referenced 7 BAD C POINTER XREF WRONG C CROSS REF 44 2 BAD POINTER WRONG C CROSS REF 7777 11310003 03 FIELD 03 DATE DATE CHECKING CROSS REFERENCE 3 BAD DATE ABCDEF fails Input Transform 8 BAD D DATE XREF 3220801 D index 1051 not properly set 11310003 04 FIELD 04 SET SET OF CODES
257. es ee ttis aberant bite cea refero sic 197 Map Pointer Relations OPINA 212 Check Fix DD Structure Options eei cnp ecco etn R ted 214 Creatine Files atid Piel AS ss e ote ibi as 219 Creating dE TIe aub decimas etui rcr debate dene dorado eu 219 Creating Held cn ro iernii er in e QUA EEE ann heed aie 220 Multiple Valued Field Multiples eee 235 Making a Field Mandato esee ot oe pede ants tede tuu tat 236 Field Number Sequence iii paid 236 NUMBER COO TTC cs ct y Dn te itera de tet c eos 237 Chaneine and Deleting Held abore iit issued dps 238 Examples of File and Field Creation io crac 243 IA aE EEE TEE R E AEO E as 259 Verify Field E 259 Cross Reference a Field or File e etn ii 261 AM ee n a aa a E a R N a 273 INPUT Transform Syed started e eer sa 278 GPL asses m 278 OUTPUT ia 281 Uneditable Daisies ten tet cut aan 282 Mandatory Requited Field Checkout tete tot soto den ete de 282 MBs alise NNI E 283 PartocMboyine Data io onan pa uat as abis tus Ge atc etd iua 289 Transferring File Entries init cia teni ere Ee iR sete p eee ERE 290 Transter Fil Ertries ODEHODL as actes stile i n 290 Compare Merge File Entries Option eerte 296 Namespace Compare Option oe idilio ies dbase 303 Extract TOON a das 306 Extract OVA in 306 Important Items to Note sisi dial 306 M pping Information cose oerte tatibus ia 309 Extract SLC pS ureint SI A A M DAS 312 Importand Export Iools 5 eost ii
258. es will be merged into the target record 1 TOPICS 5 entries 4 entries Enter RETURN to continue Enter The merging of data for a WORD PROCESSING field or for a Multiple and its subfields is done in the same way that the Transfer File Entries option does it Although MSC Fileman is ready to perform the merge at this time you are prompted with other options just in case you are not ready In order to cancel the merge enter the caret at the ACTION prompt to exit OK I M READY TO DO THE MERGE Select one of the following P PROCEED to merge the data S SUMMARIZE the modifications before proceeding E EDIT the data again before proceeding ACTION These three options are P PROCEED to merge the data S SUMMARIZE the modifications before proceeding E EDIT the data again before proceeding PROCEED January 2015 301 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data If you enter P or PROCEED at the ACTION prompt then MSC Fileman will proceed to merge the data specified ACTION PROCEED to merge the data I will now merge all subfiles in this file This may take some time please be patient I will now repoint all files that point to this entry This may take some time please be patient Gathering files and checking PT nodes Merging entries Merge complete Deleting From entry The merging of the data is now complete Be careful when using
259. ew Style Cross reference Delete a New Style Cross reference There are seven types of Traditional cross references and two types of New Style cross references available Generally a cross reference in MSC Fileman specifies that some action is performed when the field s value is entered changed or deleted For several types of cross references the action consists of putting the value into a list an index used when looking up an entry or when sorting The regular cross reference is used for sorting and for lookup you can limit it to sorting only The KWIC mnemonic and SOUNDEX cross references are also used for lookup You can sort a file on any field except a WORD PROCESSING type field whether or not a cross reference exists for the field However sorting is done more quickly and efficiently if a regular cross reference exists on the field When a file is created a Traditional cross reference on the NAME 01 field is automatically established You can add or delete cross references at any time using the Cross Reference a Field or File option DIXREF located on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY This option can also be used to enter a description of a cross reference and to prevent the cross reference from being deleted You can create a cross reference on a Multiple field a Multiple s subfields or on any other field type except a WORD PROCESSING type field For example the PATIENT file contains the AGE AT ONSET subfield in t
260. ext Terminator String Change In the Line Editor a blank line null string signals the end of data entry and returns you to the EDIT Option prompt Thus if you plan to paste or upload text into the Line Editor from a personal computer any blank lines in the uploaded text have the side effect of signaling the end of data entry prematurely One way around this is to use the File Transfer from Foreign CPU option see above Another way around this problem is to use the Text Terminator String Change option on the Utility Sub Menu This lets you change the text terminator so that some character string rather than a blank line is what is used to signal the end of data entry You can change the text terminator to any string of between one and five characters question marks or carets are not allowed in the string To finish editing a WORD PROCESSING field and get to the EDIT Option prompt simply enter your new text terminator string instead of pressing the Enter key on a blank line You should choose a text terminator that doesn t appear in your text end would not be a good choice but EnD might be The new text terminator is not permanent it remains only as long as you are editing a particular WORD PROCESSING field You can change it back to a null line by entering an at sign at the Text Terminator prompt 118 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Yo
261. extracted data You can also use these options to correct discrepancies that you noticed while you were building your EXTRACT template The two options are nearly identical However one major difference exists the Modify Destination File option prompts for a new file attribute ARCHIVE FILE see the Destination File topic previously described in this chapter If you use the Modify File Attributes option to create the destination file you will need to access the Modify Definition File option to set the ARCHIVE FILE flag Here is a sample of the type of dialogue that you will encounter when modifying your destination file Select EXTRACT OPTION MODIFY DESTINATION FILE This option allows you to build a file which will store data extracted from other files When creating fields in the destination file all data types are selectable However only a few data types are acceptable for receiving extracted data Please see your User Manual for more guidance on building the destination file MODIFY WHAT FILE CHANGE EXTRACT From this point on you will see the usual dialogue while creating a new file and creating fields Once you have finished creating your destination file you will see the dialogue that follows Select FIELD Enter ARCHIVE FILE NO January 2015 317 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Enter either Y or N ARCHIVE FILE NO YES will not allow
262. f the field enter a new value and press the Enter key Longer Default Responses and the Replace With Editor When a default is 20 or more characters in length it won t be followed by double slashes Instead it is presented with a Replace prompt ADDRESS 1 301 Bayshore Boulevard Replace The Replace prompt employs the Replace With Editor At the Replace prompt you can revise some or all of the existing default answer To revise only a piece of the existing default response type in any series of letters that are part of the existing default answer that you want to change and then press the Enter key At the With prompt enter the series of characters to replace the original series and press the Enter key At this January 2015 75 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data point the Replace prompt is presented again so that you can enter additional corrections If you re all done however just press the Enter key to finish working in the field and move on to the next prompt For example ADDRESS 1 301 Bayshore Boulevard Replace Bay Enter With North Enter Replace Enter 301 Northshore Boulevard ADDRESS 2 To replace the entire default answer at a Replace With prompt simply enter three periods called an ellipsis at the Replace prompt You are then able to replace the entire default with what you enter at the With p
263. f File and Field Creation The following examples of creating files fields or editing fields in a file are illustrated using Screen Mode File Creation DATE TIME Field SET OF CODES Field FREE TEXT Field WORD PROCESSING Field COMPUTED Field POINTER TO A FILE Field VARIABLE POINTER Field Creating a Multiple Subfields NUMERIC Subfield NOTE These examples assume that the user does not have programmer access REF For explanations of additional capabilities available to the programmer see the Advanced File Definition chapter in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual File Creation The following example illustrates the file definition dialogue you see when creating a new file using the Modify File Attributes option In this case we will create the ORDER file 100 a standard MSC Fileman file Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Are you adding ORDER as a new FILE No Y FILE NUMBER 99000 100 January 2015 243 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data e SORRY HOLD ON A FreeText NAME Field 01 has been created Select FIELD NAME MSC Fileman prompts you to enter the file name If it is a new file MSC Fileman will ask you to confirm that you want to add a new file The default file number to the left of the e g 99000 is related to a site number that is assigned t
264. f the pointed to files and those files must already exist defined previously Additionally an order message and prefix must be associated with each file For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as VARIABLE POINTER you are asked the following questions Select FIELD PROVIDER Are you adding PROVIDER as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF PROVIDER VARIABLE POINTER Select VARIABLE POINTER PROVIDER You answer the Select VARIABLE POINTER prompt with the name or number of an existing file Are you adding PROVIDER as a new VARIABLE POINTER No X VARIABLE POINTER PROVIDER Enter MESSAGE Staff Provider ORDER 1 PREFIX S SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY NO The MESSAGE is part of the online help associated with the VARIABLE POINTER field when a single question mark is entered during editing In this example the PROVIDER file MESSAGE is associated with Staff Provider The several pointed to files are searched based on their ORDER In this example since the ORDER for the PROVIDER VARIABLE POINTER is one the PROVIDER file is the first file searched The PREFIX field is used to reference a particular pointed to file To see the entries in a particular file you would enter that file s PREFIX followed by a 232 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide period and a question mark at the VARIABLE POINTER s field name e g in thi
265. ference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Select MOZART WORK EINE KLEINE NACHTMUSIK Are you adding a new MOZART WORK No YES KOECHEL NUMBER 525 More importantly with a 001 field defined an entry in the file can always be looked up by the Internal Entry Number IEN irrespective of any other cross referencing that exists for the file Thus Select MOZART WORK 525 Enter EINE KLEINE NACHTMUSIK Record Numbers must always be positive and canonic that is they cannot contain alpha suffixes leading zeros or trailing fractional zeros Forced Lookups Using Numbers Number meaningful lookups can be forced by prefixing the numeric input with the accent grave If 55 FMPATIENT s Internal Entry Number in the PATIENT file is 355 he could be identified as follows Select PATIENT NAME 7355 Enter FMPATIENT 5 Incidentally the 001 field example above illustrates how using the Modify File Attributes option can force a field to have a particular number 001 in this case It is done just by entering the new Number first and then the new Label Changing and Deleting Fields Changing Field Attributes After creating a field in a file you can return to change or delete the field within the Modify File Attributes option simply by entering the field name or number when asked Select FIELD 238 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide When you
266. fields for your report You decide what information will be displayed and you determine the printed format of the output O REF For a detailed description of the techniques used to control the format of output see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the MSC Fileman User Manual For this simple example we accept the default settings Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION LIST FILE ATTRIBUTES START WITH WHAT FILE PATIENT lt Enter gt GO TO WHAT FILE PATIENT lt Enter gt Select SUB FILE lt Enter gt Select LISTING FORMAT STANDARD CUSTOM TAILORED SORT BY LABEL ANSWER WITH ATTRIBUTE NUMBER OR LABEL DO YOU WANT THE ENTIRE ATTRIBUTE LIST Y lt Enter gt The SORT BY prompt allows you to specify the order in which the data dictionary information will be displayed Here we are asking for the entire list of possible attributes about a field January 2015 207 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data that can be stored in the data dictionary Typically no field would have a value for every one of these attributes CHOOSE FROM 001 NUMBER 01 LABEL 1 TITLE 12 VARIABLE POINTER multiple 2 SPECIFIER 23 LENGTH 24 DECIMAL DEFAULT 25 TYPE 26 COMPUTE ALGORITHM 27 SUB FIELDS 28 MULTIPLE VALUED 29 DEPTH OF SUB FIELD 3 POINTER 4 GLOBAL SUBSCRIPT LOCATION 5 INPUT TRANSFORM 1 CROSS REFERENCE multiple 1 1 AUDIT 1 2 AUDIT CON
267. flattened that is data at upper levels is repeated for each subentry For example take the comma delimited export for a top level file s 4 01 NAME field and a Subfile s 2 01 DATE and 1 TYPE fields The output for an entry with four subentries would look like FMPATIENT 01 JAN 95 SC FMPATIENT 24 JUN 95 NSC FMPATIENT 14 AUG 95 SC FMPATIENT 21 JUL 96 NSC O NOTE The top level 01 field is repeated for each Subfile entry No More Than One Multiple at Any One File Level You cannot export more than one Multiple at any one file level You can export data from one Multiple and from Subfiles directly descendent from that Multiple as long as you never export more than one Subfile at the same level Suppose you are exporting data from a file with the following structure January 2015 343 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Subfile 2B 1 Subfile 2B 2 Subfile 2C 1 In addition to fields in the Primary file you can export from Subfile 1A or Subfile 2A but not from both Also you can export from Subfile 2A Subfile 2B 1 and Subfile 2C 1 but you could not additionally choose fields in Subfile 2B 2 If you need data from Subfiles that are not directly descendent from each other you can do multiple exports and join the data together in the importing application Sorting with Multiples A special automated sort is done to the data when Multiples are exported you cannot perform your own
268. for fields printed out in a report you must associate one of the following qualifiers with fields in the print Count mean standard deviation minimum and maximum Count Coutandmean sss Coutandmean sss To obtain descriptive statistics 1 Print a report and use the or print qualifiers on one or more fields 2 Immediately after the report completes generate the Descriptive Statistics based on the report Initial Print FIRST PRINT FIELD BUDGET THEN PRINT FIELD COST THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Heading S C PATIENT STATISTICS Enter DEVICE Enter SSH VIRTUAL TERMINAL Right Margin 80 Enter SORRY JUST A MOMENT PLEASE Output is generated here Generating the Descriptive Statistics Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS 32 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Select OTHER OPTION STATISTICS Select STATISTICAL ROUTINE DES Enter CRIPTIVE STATISTICS User FMUSER TWO 2 51 PM 02 15 13 DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS N OF STANDARD CASES MEAN DEVIATION MINIMUM MAXIMUM BUDGET 27 45845 1481 25685 8582 2589 0000 95200 0000 COST 27 45914 1111 25796 2936 259 0000 96000 0000 Scattergram If you subtotal by two fields i e sub subtotal in a sort you can create Scattergrams for fields that were counted with or in the corresponding print Only numeric values are charted The Scattergram is scaled to fit your output
269. format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname Use With the first format this function returns the largest value from the 01 field of the file or Multiple identified by fname The second format returns the largest value from field The function works only if the internally stored values of the entries are numeric Thus you can use numeric or date valued fields Also free text fields will work if the stored values are numbers Computed fields with numeric results can be used Pointer fields will return the value from the pointed to file Examples MAXIMUM APPOINTMENT gt FEB 25 1991 APPOINTMENT is a Multiple valued DATE TIME field MAXIMUM PATIENT AGE gt 93 AGE is a field in the 178 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide LE current file PATIENT MINIMUM Format MINIMUM fname MINIMUM fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple valued field in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname Use This function returns the smallest value from the file s 01 field or from the Multiple identified by fname The second format returns the smalle
270. from a computer in the San Francisco Medical Center to a computer in the Salt Lake City Medical Center is an example of moving a filegram remotely The records you can move by a filegram can be either physical stored in one file or logical related fields stored in different files Logical records are loaded into filegrams by using MSC Fileman s relational navigational syntax For successful filegram installation the recipient system must have the following Kernel 6 5 or later The FILEGRAM HISTORY file 41 12 The Filegram key to the Filegram submenu A file structure that matches the one reflected by the entry in the filegram This is the structure existing on the sender s system FILEGRAM type Templates The Filegram process requires you to create an OUTPUT template which is stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 4 along with regular PRINT January 2015 387 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data templates MSC Fileman recognizes the FILEGRAM type and regular PRINT templates as OUTPUT templates but their similarity ends there O NOTE Since FILEGRAM type templates are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file the dialogues you encounter in the Filegram process will refer to a FILEGRAM type template as a PRINT template Regular PRINT templates already created are screened so that you cannot accidentally replace an existing PRINT template with a FILEGRAM type template Filegram and Archiving Relationship
271. g Descriptive Scattergram Histogram In each case to generate statistics from reports you use a two step process 1 Use the Print File Entries or Search File Entries options to generate a MSC Fileman report Do not queue the report The entries you select in your report are the ones on which statistics will be generated the way you use sort and print qualifiers in the report affects the way statistics will be generated as discussed later in this chapter 2 Immediately after the report finishes use the Statistics option on the MSC Fileman menu to generate statistics The two step process for each type of statistical output is described below O NOTE If you have statistical software on a personal computer you might want to consider using MSC Fileman s Export Tool as an alternative to MSC Fileman s statistics options especially if the statistics options described in this chapter do not provide the statistical analysis you need With the Export Tool you can export your data into a format your personal computer statistical software can read and use all of that software s capabilities to perform statistical analyses on MSC Fileman data Descriptive Statistics The Descriptive Statistics routine creates a summary report of the numeric January 2015 31 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data information produced by the preceding print The number of cases is always shown To get descriptive statistics
272. g The oldstring and newstring can be any length They do not have to be equal in length REPLACE abracadabra ab gt racad ra REPLACE Name is XXX XXX NAME gt Name is FMPATIENT21 REVERSE REVERSE string This function returns the characters in string in reverse order REVERSE NAME gt neB nilknarF STRIPBLANKS STRIPBLANKS string Use This function removes leading and trailing spaces from string Example STRIPBLANKS Waste no space gt Waste no space no leading or trailing spaces TRANSLATE TRANSLATKE string oldchar newchar Parameters string is a string expression to be changed oldchar are the character s to be translated newchar are the character s to replace the oldchar 186 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide This function alters string by changing each character in oldchar into the character in the corresponding position in newchar The translation is one character for one character TRANSLATE 08261991 123 ABC gt 08B6A99A TRANSLATE NAME F f gt fMPATIENT fORTY ONE UPPERCASE UPPERCASE string string is an expression with alphabetic characters This function will change lowercase characters in string to uppercase String cannot be a word processing field the contents of a word processing field will be unaffected If the user s language is not English and if that language has code
273. g a new FIELD No Y LABEL CURRENT AGE FIELD NUMBER 2 5 Enter You could have specified any number between two and three NUMBER 001 Field All files have unique numbers associated with each of their entries Defining the NUMBER field allows you to use the Internal Entry Number IEN also called the record number as you would any other field Usually this means that someone like Herr Doktor Ludwig Koechel in the case of the MOZART WORK file has gone to the trouble of creating a numbering scheme for the entries If you wish to set up a file in which a unique Internal Entry Number is always matched with each entry Name you can do so by creating a field numbered 001 for the file Select FILE MOZART WORK Select FIELD 001 Are you adding a new FIELD No YES LABEL KOECHEL NUMBER FIELD NUMBER 001 Enter DATA TYPE OF KOECHEL NUMBER NUMERIC INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND 1 INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND 626 IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT Y N NO Enter MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS 0 Enter HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 1 and 626 0 Decimal Digits Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter The previous dialogue is what would normally create a NUMERIC valued field In this case we are describing the file s PRIMARY KEY or Internal Entry Number Once such a 001 field is defined you can create a new file entry that might look like this January 2015 237 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Re
274. get UCI and the scope of the comparison The report has two columns one for each UCI It first lists differences between the Data Dictionaries In this case the target UCI does not have a B Index Then File Entries are compared When a difference is identified the value of the entry s 01 field and its IEN is shown as a heading followed by fields containing different values along with their values Here the DATE INPUT field has a value of Q in the home UCI and no value in the target UCI Finally this example lists entries that exist in the home UCI but are missing in the target UCI Sample Namespace Compare Session Select OPTION TRANSFER ENTRIES Select TRANSFER OPTION Answer with TRANSFER OPTION NUMBER or NAME Choose from 1 TRANSFER FILE ENTRIES January 2015 303 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data 2 COMPARE MERGE FILE ENTRIES 3 NAMESPACE COMPARE Select TRANSFER OPTION 3 NAMESPACE COMPARE UCI home dev1 g db gld START WITH What File LANGUAGE 533 entries GO TO What File LANGUAGE lt Enter gt 533 entries Compare to what UCI home sample emptyENV g mumps gld Select one of the following 1 DATA DICTIONARY ONLY 2 FILE ENTRIES ONLY 3 DATA DICTIONARY AND FILE ENTRIES Enter response 3 lt Enter gt DATA DICTIONARY AND FILE ENTRIES DISPLAY COMPARISON ON DEVICE HOME lt Enter gt TELNET MAR 13 2013 MSC Fileman MUMPS ORG UCI home dev1 g db gld UCI home sam
275. given for a particular entry or on other aspects of the editing session By using a technique called branching the designer of an INPUT template can make the presentation of certain fields conditional based on the values of other fields You must have programmer access to set up branching With programmer access any executable M code can be put into an INPUT template You can branch either to a field prompt elsewhere in the template or to a predefined place holder The place holder is identified by On where n is an integer e g 1 To branch within an INPUT template you enter M code at one of the EDIT FIELD prompts You set the variable Y to the branch destination Y can be given the value of a field label a field number or a place holder If Y is set to zero and editing is being done at the top level of a file the template is 400 January 2015 Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide exited If Y is set to zero and a Multiple is being edited the Multiple is exited The variable X will contain the updated internal value of the field edited at the previous prompt Thus you can check X to determine if you want to set Y to branch or not For example suppose you had a file called ADMISSIONS Some of the fields are concerned only with the discharge of a patient You want to branch around those fields if the DATE OF DISCHARGE is empty in the database and no date is given in the current editing
276. gn and show up to two decimal places MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS 0 Enter WILL AGE AT ONSET FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS AGE AT ONSET ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter HELP PROMPT Type a Number between 0 and 100 0 Decimal Digits Replace Enter DESCRIPTION 1 gt Enter A default help prompt is automatically written for you with the DATA TYPE field value of NUMERIC You can change this prompt using the Replace With syntax e NOTE This help information is displayed when the user inputs a single question mark when editing this field January 2015 225 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data WY NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of NUMERIC in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section SET OF CODES Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as a SET OF CODES can be used to restrict a user to just a few possible values e g YES or NO When defining a DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES enter a valid code and a translation of what each code means The user can enter the code the full meaning or a portion of the full meaning If the field is set up to require only a one character response this data type can simplify the user s data entry MSC Fileman has only a limited amount
277. gned specifically to 234 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide contain executable M code The code entered into this kind of field is verified to be valid M code that conforms to VA programming standards MUMPS valued fields are usually used in files that are part of developer tools systems For example the OPTION file 19 is part of the MENU MANAGEMENT system used in the VA for assigning menus and associated actions to each computer user The ENTRY ACTION field on the OPTION file 19 is defined as a MUMPS type field This field allows a developer who is creating an option to enter M code to do any setup and initialization that is needed before the end user can do the action allowed by the option Multiple Valued Field Multiples When you create a DATA TYPE field value of any of the following DATE TIME NUMERIC SET OF CODES FREE TEXT POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER After entering type specific information you are asked the following WILL FIELD BE MULTIPLE NO Answering YES to this prompt means that There can be more than one occurrence of a data value for this field in the entry e g more than one DIAGNOSIS in a PATIENT file entry Subfields can later be associated with this field e g each DIAGNOSIS could have a DATE OF ONSET e The MULTIPLE prompt is not asked for DATA TYPE field values of January 2015 235 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guid
278. gth Sometimes users may mistype and answer a field prompt with same key as or some other meaningless punctuation character A PATTERN MATCH check such as X 1P E will keep that kind of mistake out of your database Carets in a FREE TEXT Field If you are going to have carets in a FREE TEXT field it is advisable to create the field on a node by itself You should create the field as usual but when MSC Fileman asks for the PIECE POSITION reply with E1 maximum length as shown below Select FIELD SPECIAL SITUATION Are you adding SPECIAL SITUATION as a new FIELD the 3RD No X 248 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide FIELD NUMBER 11 50 DATA TYPE OF SPECIAL SITUATION FREE TEXT MINIMUM LENGTH 3 MAXIMUM LENGTH 200 OPTIONAL PATTERN MATCH IN X WILL MY TRY FIELD BE MULTIPLE No lt The E1 200 means that the field occupies positions 1 through 200 of the node SUBSCRIPT 0 50 S PIECE POSITION 1 E1 200 IS MY TRY ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter HELP PROMPT Answer must be 3 200 characters in length Replace Enter XECUTABLE HELP DESCRIPTION No existing text Edit NO WORD PROCESSING Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the ORDER TEXT field 4 11 in the ORDER file 2100 has a value of WORD PROCESSING Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to us
279. hat is it cannot have a name that starts with the letter A tcannot have any set or kill conditions e t must consist of only field type cross reference values all of which are used as subscripts that is it can contain no computed values e No subscripts can have transforms Create a Key To create a key proceed in the following manner Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILITY OPTION KEY DEFINITION MODIFY WHAT FILE ZZPATIENT Enter Select Subfile Enter There are no Keys defined on file 716026 Want to create a new Key for this file No YES Enter a Name for the new Key A Enter Creating new Key A You will then be taken into Screen Mode i e Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the key Enter a single question mark or two question marks at any prompt for additional help Number 5 EDIT A KEY Page 1 of 1 File 16026 Name A Priority PRIMARY KEY FIELDS 284 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Field Seq No File Field Name Uniqueness Index Index Details COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert On this screen in the KEY FIELDS section you can select the fields you wish to include in this key and assign each field a sequence number The sequence number determines the order in which the fields appear as subscripts in the Uniqueness Index If you select the key fields i
280. he DIAGNOSIS Multiple If you create a regular cross reference for a field in a Multiple you can choose in what context the cross reference will be used You might want to cross reference the whole file by AGE AT ONSET so that a report sorted by AGE AT ONSET could be produced efficiently Alternately you might want to cross reference only an individual patient s 262 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide diagnoses by onset age so that a lookup of diagnosis could be done using AGE AT ONSET Types of Traditional Cross references Cross Description reference REGULAR The field value is sorted and stored in the cross reference The regular cross reference is used for sorting If you wish it will be used when looking up entries also The cross reference that is automatically created on the NAME field 4 01 field when a file is created is a regular cross reference this is the B cross reference KWIC Key Word in Context each word of three or more letters in the field value becomes a separate cross reference A space is considered the primary word separator For example KING LEAR can be looked up under either KING or LEAR Uppercase or lowercase two letter words such as IN AN OR and IS are rot considered key text The words THE AND THEN FOR FROM OTHER THAN WITH THEIR SOME and THIS upper or lowercase are not considered key text Quotation marks are also not considered key text
281. he EXPORT FIELD prompt that are computed expressions with numeric results By default these fields are assigned a FREE TEXT DATA TYPE If you want the user to choose the DATA TYPE when the EXPORT template is created answer YES to the PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE field If the Export Tool assigns a non numeric to a DATA TYPE field or if the user chooses one of those DATA TYPE field values the field s values will be surrounded by quotes when this field contains YES O NOTE Do not set this field to YES if a fixed length record is being exported or imported PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE The Export Tool will determine the DATA TYPE field value for fields in the primary file and its Multiples based on their definition in the data dictionary Other fields are automatically assigned a DATA TYPE of FREE TEXT If you want the user to choose the DATA TYPE of each field when creating an EXPORT template answer YES to this field The only DATA TYPE field values recognized by the Export Tool are the following January 2015 399 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data FREE TEXT NUMERIC DATE TIME The DATA TYPE field value entered by the user controls whether or not the values from that field will be surrounded by quotes if the QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS field is set to YES The user supplied DATA TYPE field value does not affect how numbers are exported numeric export is controlled by the DATA TYPE field value in the data dictionary only
282. hen the new format has been created you are given the opportunity to modify it The Screenman form that follows is used for editing Foreign Formats 366 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide FOREIGN FILE FORMAT CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Page 1 FIELD DELIMITER 032 RECORD LENGTH FIXED SEND LAST DELIMITER YES MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH 0 RECORD DELIMITER NEED FOREIGN FIELD NAMES FILE HEADER FILE TRAILER DATE FORMAT SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL O QUOTE NON NUMERIC YES PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE YES Go to next page to document format COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert The meaning of the fields on this page of the form is described in the FOREIGN FORMAT File Attributes Reference section You are presented with the same form whether you are modifying an existing format or creating one from scratch TIP It is important to always create and edit formats using the Data Export options because validity checks on the relationships between the various fields are built into the Screenman form If you enter inconsistent data you will be alerted when you try to exit the form There is a second page of the form that contains documenting information about the format The second page allows you to enter a description and usage notes for the format You can also enter other names for the format in a Multiple these other names can then be used to reference the format anywhere in the Export or I
283. hese additional fields are defined you can use them in a signon routine to set these key variables Of course you may choose to place additional information about your users in the NEW PERSON file 200 If you add other fields to your NEW PERSON file use field numbers greater than 10 000 and use subfile numbers with at least 5 digits following the decimal place Also place the fields in global nodes subscripted with numbers greater than 10 000 If you numberspace your data elements in this way you will be able to avoid conflicts if you later install Kernel s NEW PERSON file January 2015 37 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Search When you print reports you can print a subset of the total number of file entries if you sort your output For example by sorting on a file s DATE field you could sort for entries from October 1st to October 15th and only print entries whose DATE field falls in that sort range Selecting a subset of entries by sorting works well if the subset of entries you would like to print can be isolated based on a contiguous sort range However what if you would like a different set of entries e g only entries whose DATE field is equal to either September 1st October 1st or November 1st You cannot do this with a sort range because the sort range that includes September 1st and November 1st would include every entry between the two dates When you use MSC Fileman s search cap
284. hese in yourself as print fields in the template if you so desire Custom Footers You can also add footers to the bottom of each page of a report First save the contents of the footer in a template as you do to create a custom heading Then use the template at the HEADING prompt with a dash before the first bracket Heading S C PATIENT LIST PATIENT FOOTER You can specify both a heading and a footer like this Heading S C PATIENT LIST PATIENT HEADER PATIENT FOOTER NOTE Specifying only a footer at the Heading S C prompt suppresses the default heading If you need a header as well as footer you must use custom templates for both Printing Sort Criteria in the Heading or the Footer You can print the sort criteria values used to sort the report in the header in two different ways e At the Heading S C prompt entering C prints the sort criteria in the automatically generated report heading January 2015 29 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Use the sort qualifier Pa b to save the FROM and TO values used to sort a report Then in a customized header or footer stored in SORT templates you can retrieve the sort values with PARAM a string 30 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Statistics How to Generate Statistics from Reports MSC Fileman currently offers three types of statistical processin
285. hlighted in reverse video Deselect Unmark text lt PF1 gt lt PF1 gt M Delete selected text lt Delete gt or lt Backspace gt on selected text Cut and save to buffer lt PF1 gt X on selected text Copy and save to buffer lt PF1 gt C on selected text Paste from buffer lt PF1 gt V 102 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Move text to another location lt PF1 gt X at new location Copy text to another location lt PF1 gt C at new location To move or copy selected text to another location Select the text use lt PF1 gt M Place the cursor at the new location Press lt PF1 gt X move text or lt PF1 gt C copy text To save text to the buffer so that you can paste one or more times Select the text use lt PF1 gt M With the cursor on the selected text press lt PF1 gt X cut text to buffer or lt PF1 gt C copy text to buffer To paste text from the buffer Move the cursor to the location you want to paste the text Press lt PF1 gt V Deleting Action Key Sequence Character before cursor lt Backspace gt Character at cursor lt PF4 gt or lt Remove gt or lt Delete gt which key depends on your terminal and keyboard type Word at cursor lt Ctrl W gt From cursor to end of line lt PF1 gt lt PF2 gt Entire line lt PF1 gt D January 2015 103 MSC Filema
286. hus text is output in no wrap mode You would probably want a spreadsheet or a restaurant menu printed in no wrap mode e NOTE If the column in which no wrap text is being printed is too short to accommodate the line of text your printer may break the line in the middle of words or otherwise destroy the formatting of the text NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of WORD PROCESSING in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section COMPUTED Data Type When a DATA TYPE field is defined as COMPUTED its value is determined at the time the field is accessed This computation is based on an expression stored in the data dictionary The field value or data itself is not stored in the data dictionary The COMPUTED expression is constructed using field names literals or constants functions and operators REF For a complete explanation of these elements see the Computed Expressions section January 2015 229 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data W NOTE The functions referred to above are MSC Fileman functions stored in the FUNCTION file 4 5 not M functions A developer with programmer access can also enter M code in a COMPUTED field The M code must set the variable X to the COMPUTED field value For example when defining a DATA T
287. ields nothing follows the final field This field allows you to specify whether or not a field delimiter should be exported after the last field A YES answer sends the delimiter a NO answer does not The contents of this field does not affect whether or not a delimiter is sent after each record RECORD DELIMITER Applications that import delimited fields need to know when one record ends and a new one begins In most cases records are separated by a carriage return or by a line feed and a carriage return This is the same as pressing the Enter key at the end of a line The Export Tool automatically puts this separator after each record every record begins on a new line of output You do nof need to put the ASCII values for carriage return and line feed in this field Some applications may also require that additional characters be placed after each record If this is the case put those characters into the RECORD DELIMITER field The requirements for coding the field are the same as for the FIELD DELIMITER field RECORD LENGTH FIXED A second common way to import and export data in addition to using delimited data is with fixed length records In a fixed length record each field has a predetermined constant data length For example a name field might be 30 characters long The name FMPATNT 10 is only 10 characters long thus 20 spaces would be added to the field value to fill the required 30 characters The next field s value w
288. ify that the action associated with a cross reference be performed only once after the entire record has been edited typically at the end of the editing session Record level execution would normally be selected for compound cross references If the C index in the example above were defined using Traditional MUMPS type cross references and both the NAME and ID Number fields were contained in a single INPUT template the index would be updated when the NAME field was edited and then again when the ID Number was edited But if the cross reference were defined as a New Style compound index with record level execution the index would be updated only once after the entire record was edited after changes to both the NAME and ID Number fields had been completed Code to Kill the Entire Index This is code that MSC Fileman can execute to remove an entire index from a file This can make re indexing a file much more efficient To delete an index MSC Fileman can execute the Kill Entire Index Code instead of looping through all the record in a file and removing each record s index one at a time January 2015 267 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Activity New Style cross references can have an Activity of R and or I to allow you to control whether the cross reference should be fired during Reindexing and or Installation KIDS If you call IX DIK IXI DIK or IXALL DIK or if you select the Re Index File option DI
289. ike the following PATIENT LIST JUL 19 1996 11 36 PAGE 1 SSN NAME January 2015 15 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data 666333333 FMPATIENT 13 666999900 FMPATIENT 14 000769000 FMPATIENT 15 A similar situation occurs when you sort on ward locations Suppose you have wards 8 8C and 9 8 and 9 are canonic numbers while 8C is a non canonic string Thus if you sort on ward location your output comes out in this order 8 9 8C To avoid this problem use the sort qualifier TXT on your sort field This forces all field values to be non canonic with the result that a group of strings like 8 8C and 9 sort in the expected order For more information on the TXT sort qualifier see the list of Sort Qualifiers in the appendix Sorting to Select Entries for Printing Besides using sorting to determine the order of entries printed you can also use the START WITH prompt to restrict what entries are printed to a range For example if you accept the default sort range from first to last you may get a report with every item in the file listed You can cut this list down to a subset of the entries in the file by how you sort e g entries that sort from FMPATIENT A to FMPATIENT Z only To specify a sort range enter the range starting point at the START WITH prompt and the range end point at the GO TO prompt For example SORT BY NAME Enter START WITH
290. ile 41 1 along with the current values of the fields SORT Templates When you choose several entries to display you will be prompted January 2015 7 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data STORE THESE ENTRY ID s IN A TEMPLATE You can save your list of selected entries in a SORT template by entering a template name at this prompt Your list of entries is then saved in a SORT template You can then reuse the list of selected entries in the template when you do additional printing from this file in the future For more information on using SORT templates see the Saving Sort Criteria SORT Templates section in the Print chapter of this manual Choose Your Own Print Fields CAUTION Do not use STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT To choose your own fields to output for each entry answer NO to the STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT prompt You can then choose your own output fields For example if you only need NAME DATE OF BIRTH and PROVIDER information about a selected patient you could request it as shown in the following example Select MSC Fileman Option INQ Enter uire to File Entries OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT lt Enter gt Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT ONE ANOTHER ONE lt Enter gt STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT Yes NO lt Enter gt No FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME 1 NAME 2 NAME COMPONENTS 3 NAME ORDER CHOOSE 1 3 1 Enter NAME THEN PRINT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH THEN PRINT FIE
291. ile you can start from the PATIENT file and for each record in the PATIENT file retrieve not only the name of the doctor for that patient but also additional information about the doctor from the DOCTOR file You can use relational navigation in many places in MSC Fileman to move beyond the current file and retrieve or edit information in related files records including Reports Print Fields Sort Criteria Search Criteria Editing Records edit information in related files not just current file Computed Expressions COMPUTED Fields Within word processing Windows The syntax to perform relational navigation called Extended Pointer syntax is discussed throughout this chapter Several types of pointer relationships between files can be exploited to combine information 146 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Simple Extended Pointer most common Backward Extended Pointer Join Extended Pointer A special form of relational navigation called relational jumping uses these pointer relationships to let you jump from one file to another This makes it easier to specify a group of fields from another file when specifying what fields to edit search print or sort by in interactive MSC Fileman Simple Extended Pointer The most common form of relational navigation uses simple extended pointers This type of navigation requires a pointer field to exist from the curren
292. ile changes from SELECTED to EDITED You can only use this option to modify your list before the entries are moved to the destination file If you need to change the extract activity list after the destination file is updated you will need to cancel the extract activity and start a new extract activity To use the Add Delete Selected Entries option select the extract activity you wish to modify by entering the archival activity number source file number or source file name Then select the entry to be added or deleted The following dialogue depicts the sequence you will follow when adding an entry to the extract activity Select EXTRACT OPTION ADD DELETE SELECTED ENTRIES Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY ANSWER WITH ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY ARCHIVE NUMBER OR FILE CHOOSE FROM 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 SELECTED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 Enter 08 30 92 SELECTED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Select CHANGE NO 330 NO 330 VERSION 17 09 PROGRAMMER FMPROGRAMMER 27 ROUTINE DIL2 DATE CHANGED OCT 24 1995 ADD this entry TO the EXTRACT SELECTION YES Enter January 2015 315 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data e NOTE Entering two question marks at the Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY prompt displays a list of file entries e The phrase on EXTRACT list appears next to those entries that are currently part of the extract activity The question DELETE this entr
293. imply press the Enter key a null response to accept that number or enter a number not already assigned to a file Your new file is now initialized MSC Fileman creates the NAME field field number 01 which is free text 3 to 30 characters in length non numeric and has no leading punctuation You will see the following message January 2015 219 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data A FreeText NAME Field 2 01 has been created The 01 field s definition can be modified like any other field it does not have to be FREE TEXT its label need not be NAME and so forth The 01 field should be the key attribute of an entry used to identify it and to order the entries for lookups However entries can be identified and ordered by other fields through cross references After creating a new file you can define any number of fields for the new file as described in the Creating Fields topic below o REF For an example of a new file using the Modify File Attributes option see the Examples of File and Field Creation section Creating Fields For any file you can create fields describing logically related data that pertains to entries in that file When created every file automatically receives one field a NAME field the 01 field You must explicitly define any other fields All such definitions are made and changed with the Modify File Attributes option When you create a file aft
294. ing options directly through MSC Fileman from programmer mode e g gt D QDD MSC Fileman performs the archiving function by searching through file entries using specified criteria extracting and transporting the selected entries by filegrams to temporary storage in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 41 11 and then simply writing the data to permanent storage The FILEGRAM type template used to transport an archive activity can be created during the archiving session in the Archiving menu options or an existing FILEGRAM type template created using the Filegram options can be used Considerations Before Archiving The following summarizes some of the important items to note regarding the archiving facility Consider them before you begin archiving January 2015 369 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data 370 We strongly encourage you to have a current backup of your files before archiving Archiving is not user specific In other words archiving is attached to a file not a user For your own protection please be aware that someone other than yourself can complete or change an existing archiving activity Data from logical and physical files can be archived but only the data from the physical primary file can be purged removed MSC Fileman must be able to collect and print the data using the search criteria before you can create an archiving activity That is the Select Entries to Archive option must be run
295. ireto File Entries OPIO on 5 SORT Templates un A pn E eas 7 Choose Your Own Print Eleldsz is eese niine ds 8 Choose Your Own Device nning dc 9 luu AAA aes 11 How to Print Reports from Piles nasa 11 MSC Fileman s Print CapabiliBies u ien e tette ettet up tentant ns 11 Standard Column Format for MSC Fileman Prints sss 12 POE ELEN Des acd Saas S 13 DEAS CS MM M 31 How to Generate Statistics from Reports sssssseeeeeeeen 31 D sctiptive Sas Siri nderit eren eiim e d dont evi do Yd dpa 31 SCALE FORA as uc at Dopod a da oat Rub AAA alode itta Mead 33 Histogtam s erento etie etidp ani d ei Bina Bid egets og bn d 35 coop die dat c 38 FLOW tO CARCI Ah o ideo deris meteo unas bi apni dcs deed edd 38 eiorirdqus cis NE MEE 39 Detausand Feat res a aodio opis eto A Ge lied bude e 44 A 50 The Browser SCIES io ostenta epa ene e Sete ete eu etes 51 Browser POAC ECS a uoce odo 51 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data eser ii 57 Field Type Sisner an aia 58 DATEZLINE PISIGS ico E E E ER 58 NUMERIC Fields essetis AMOR os 61 SET OF CODES FieldS iet Pete ies ad 61 FREE FEX T Fieldstone dd dett eitis A nat 62 WORDSEROCESSIN G EIGS ai da aid 63 COMPUTED Ello 64 POINTER TOA FILE Helds id 65 VARIA BEE POUN TER Held Sri ti n 66 Subtitles Milla iS 69 lema Propio eo oco vend taped tende ms Food aee sep cu tust Rn 71 Thes Ener Key A teainbi eee err Gore dol caben 71 Standar
296. iting it retrieving it sorting it printing it making it into reports Although MSC Fileman was written for VISTA it does not need to be used with VISTA It can be installed as a standalone database management system Before You Start In order to use MSC Fileman you should have a basic working understanding of VISTA including how to sign on how to navigate using menus and how to access help by typing one or two question marks 2 January 2015 Introduction MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Because MSC Fileman is a database system you should also have a basic understanding of what a database is and the meaning of basic database elements such as field record and file January 2015 3 Part 1 Reading Data Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Inquire Many reports that you print from applications are pre designed that is the selection of records and the fields that print for each record are pre determined by the designer of the application You simply choose the report you would like to print from a menu option choose an output device and the selected report prints You can also create your own reports however if you have either MSC Fileman s print options or custom designed application options that take advantage of the same MSC Fileman features This chapter introduces one of MSC Fileman s print options Inquire to File Entries There are two ways you ll have an opportunity to use
297. ld that is computed The DATA TYPE field value of COMPUTED allows a computed expression to be stored in the data dictionary To define a field as COMPUTED use the Modify File Attributes option and reply to the DATA TYPE prompt with COMPUTED Select OPTION MODIFY FILE ATTRIBUTES DO YOU WANT TO USER THE SCREEN MODE VERSION Yes NO MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT Select FIELD AGE Are you adding AGE as a new FIELD the 13TH Y FIELD NUMBER 13 Enter DATA TYPE OF AGE COMPUTED You now enter the computed expression that will be stored in the AGE field In this case a function TODAY a field name DATE OF BIRTH and 136 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide a numeric literal are combined with two arithmetic binary operators to give a numeric result COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION TODAY DATE OF BIRTH 365 25 TRANSLATES TO THE FOLLOWING CODE S Y 16033 13 1 S D DIZ 16033 D0 0 0 1 X DT S X X X1 X X2 P Y 16033 13 1 U 3 X D X2 DTC X1 S X X 365 25 NOTE You will only see the generated code if you have programmer access When creating a COMPUTED field you are given the opportunity to specify the type of result of the computed expression Note the list of choices available The the following dialogue is presented TYPE OF RESULT STRING Enter a code from the list Select one of the following STRING NUMERIC BOOLEA
298. ld attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value as FREE TEXT in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section WORD PROCESSING Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as WORD PROCESSING allows entry of unlimited free text data The data can be edited formatted and printed with word processing text editors O REF For a description of MSC Fileman s native text editors see the Screen Editor and Line Editor chapters in the MSC Fileman User Manual For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as WORD PROCESSING you are asked the following questions Select FIELD HISTORY Are you adding HISTORY as a new FIELD No Y DATA TYPE OF HISTORY WORD PROCESSING SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE Yes lt Enter gt 228 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide HELP PROMPT SUBJECTIVE NARRATIVE OF PATIENT S PROBLEM HISTORY DESCRIPTION 1 Enter If you answer YES to the SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE question text is automatically wrapped at word boundaries to fit in the column in which it is being printed Usually this is the preferred way to print text TIP When it is important that lines of text be printed exactly as they were entered answer NO to the SHALL THIS TEXT NORMALLY APPEAR IN WORD WRAP MODE question T
299. ld designation like X or C22 14 Statistical print qualifiers preceding the field like or amp 15 Backward extended pointers 16 Relational jumps to other files i e use of a terminating colon instead use the full extended pointer syntax to obtain data from other files 17 Specifications that return more than one value e g a Multiple in a pointed to file you can specify Multiples in the primary file After you enter a set of field specifications you are immediately prompted for a template in which to store the selected fields You must store your field specifications in a template to proceed with the next step in the data export After you specify a template name for the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template you have completed this step The following is an example of the EXPORT FIELD dialogue The example uses the sample PATIENT file 200 Several unacceptable responses are shown the error messages are the ones you would receive to these responses Select MSC Fileman OPTION OTHER OPTIONS January 2015 333 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Select OTHER OPTION DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION SELECT FIELDS FOR EXPORT OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT FIRST EXPORT FIELD NAME S SORRY You cannot add S to the export field specifications FIRST EXPORT FIELD NAME THEN EXPORT FIELD INTERNAL SEX THEN EXPORT FIELD RELIGIO
300. led from your keyboard You can enter lt F1 gt H to access Help information including navigation commands To Press Scroll up or down one lt ArrowUp gt and lt ArrowDown gt line at a time Scroll right 22 columns lt ArrowRight gt Scroll to rightmost edge lt PF1 gt lt ArrowRight gt Scroll left 22 columns lt ArrowLeft gt Scroll to leftmost edge PF1 ArrowLeft Page Down lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt lt NextScreen gt or lt PageDown gt Page Up lt PF1 gt lt ArrowUp gt lt PrevScreen gt or lt PageUp gt Go to Top lt PF1 gt T Go to Bottom lt PF1 gt B Go to specific line lt PF1 gt G screen or column At prompt enter a number which you can precede with S screen L line or C column The cursor is re positioned at the corresponding screen line or column If you enter a number only screen is assumed Exit lt PF1 gt E or lt PF1 gt Q Clipboard The Browser uses MSC Fileman s shared clipboard space which means you can copy text from the Browser and paste it into any word processing field using the Screen Editor For example you could generate a report view it on the Browser then copy some or all of your report and paste it into a Mailman message 52 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide To use this feature press lt F1 gt C This should bring up the following prompt Copy Text
301. letter a Utility Command from the following Editor Change File Transfer from Foreign CPU Text Terminator String Change UTILITY Option LIST List the Message Assume that you ve just entered four lines of text in a WORD 114 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide PROCESSING field and would now like to review the entire text After entering text on Line 4 4 gt press the Enter key When prompted for Line 5 5 gt press the Enter key again and you ll arrive at the EDIT Option prompt Enter L for List a Range of Lines option and choose the range of lines to list in this case Lines 1 to 4 EDIT Option L Enter ist line 1 Enter to 4 Enter 1 gt Owing to poverty in early youth patient seems not to 2 gt have had proper diet Since achieving economic success 3 gt his diet has been adequate but traces of original 4 gt deficiency remain EDIT Option ADD Append More Text After listing lines of text see above suppose you need to add a few comments at the end of your message From the EDIT Option prompt enter A for Add Lines to End of Text option You can now add additional lines EDIT Option A Enter dd lines 5 Next appointment will be in three weeks lt Enter gt 6 gt Regular appointments need to be set up Enter 7 Enter JOIN Combine Two Lines of Text Suppose you are at the EDI
302. line Replace Prompt Shortcuts Shortcut Action Replaces everything XXX Replaces everything starting from the characters xxx to the end lt PF1 gt E XX Replaces everything from the beginning up to and including the characters xxx lt PF1 gt Q XXX YY Y Replaces everything starting from xxx up to and including yyy lt PF1 gt A January 2015 113 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data endor END Appends what you enter at the With prompt to the end of the value lt PF1 gt S Commands Available Commands In the Line Editor all commands are available at the EDIT Option prompt To see a list of available commands simply enter two question marks as shown below EDIT Option Choose by first letter a Word Processing Command from the following Add Lines to End of Text Break a Line into Two Change Every String to Another in a Range of Lines Delete Line s Edit a Line Replace With Insert Line s after an Existing Line Join Line to the One Following List a Range of Lines Move Lines to New Location within Text Print Lines as Formatted Output Repeat Lines at a New Location Search for a String Transfer Lines From Another Document Utility Sub Menu Y Programmer Edit or type a Line Number to edit that line EDIT Option U Enter tilities in Word Processing UTILITY Option Choose by first
303. lued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section MINUTES MINUTES datexp1 datexp2 Parameters datexp1 and datexp2 are date time expressions Time stamps are not necessary This function returns the number of minutes that datexp1 is after datexp2 If no time is associated with a date time expression DATE 12 00 A M is used Examples MINUTES MID NOW gt 832 MINUTES MID TODAY gt 1440 January 2015 167 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data MONTH MONTH datexp is a date time expression Use This function returns the month and year from a date time valued expression MONTH DATE OF BIRTH AUG 1943 MONTHNAME Formar MONTHNAME S Parameters n is an expression that evaluates to an integer from 1 through 12 This function returns the full name of the month corresponding to n MONTHNAME 4 gt APRIL MONTHNAME E DATE OF BIRTH 4 5 gt APRIL Function E extracts the 4th and 5th digits from a date stored in MSC Fileman internal format YYYMMDD NOON Use This argumentless function returns today s date with a time stamp of 12 00 NOON gt AUG 23 1991 12 00 W REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Exp
304. ly entering will appear in this secondary popup window As you can see in this example the OPTION file s MESSAGE is associated with PROTOCOL Since its ORDER is one it is the first file searched The PREFIX MISC can also be used to refer to the OPTION file Just as with the WHO ENTERED POINTER TO A FILE field previously described users cannot add new options to the OPTION file on the fly when they are 254 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide entering an ITEM ORDERED in the ORDER file because the SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY prompt is NO Creating a Multiple The following example illustrates creating a Multiple field For this example we will simulate creating the RESPONSES field 44 5 in the ORDER file 4100 It has a DATA TYPE of NUMERIC Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD RESPONSES Are you adding RESPONSES as a new FIELD No Y FIELD NUMBER 4 5 Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 4 5 in File 100 FIELD LABEL RESPONSES DATA TYPE NUMERIC TITLE AUDIT AUDIT CONDITION READ ACCESS DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE YES SHOULD USER SEE AN ADDING A NEW ENT
305. merged to entry can be time consuming or may create many tasked jobs This is more likely if the file is pointed to by many files or if the files that point to it have many entries In these situations consider merging at times when your system is not busy DO YOU WANT TO DISPLAY ONLY THE DISCREPANT FIELDS NO DEVICE Enter RIGHT MARGIN 80 COMPARISON OF SCHOLAR FILE ENTRIES FEB 14 2011 11 59 PAGE 1 SCHOLAR FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H NAME FMPATIENT 23 A FMPATIENT 23 H FER SSN 000 99 9999 000 88 8888 SUBJECT AREA PHILOSOPHY MATHEMATICS January 2015 297 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data DATE OF BIRTH 1872 F Press RETURN to continue or to exit The asterisks appearing in front of the field label indicate the entries contain different data in those fields This simple report compares the data in each field in the two entries Merging Entries You can use the Compare Merge File Entries option to merge entries To do this 1 Identify a file 2 Identify the two entries to be compared 3 At the MERGE THESE ENTRIES AFTER COMPARING THEM prompt answer YES 4 Choose which entry will supply the default values Choose to retain or delete the merge from record Optionally adjust field by field which entry supplies the default value 7 Choose to proceed with the merge summarize before merging or re edit the merge criteria O
306. modifications or deletions of data or data dictionary NO will place no restrictions on the file ARCHIVE FILE NO Enter Select EXTRACT OPTION Create Extract Template Option 5 of 9 When selecting destination fields for data to be extracted into keep in mind that the INPUT transforms of the destination fields are executed for each field value For an extracted record the value of each field in the record is tested against the INPUT transform of its destination field If any field fails the INPUT transform the extract for the entire record will fail Make sure the INPUT transforms on the destination fields are appropriate for the data you will be extracting O NOTE If you are extracting a Subrecord using the EXTRACT DIAXU entry point and its FILING LEVEL parameter and a value fails the INPUT transform only the extract of the Subrecord will fail When you are ready to build an EXTRACT template you must select the Create Extract Template option Using this option you will identify not only the field you wish to extract from the source file but also its corresponding field in the destination file The EXTRACT template is the only type of PRINT template used in the Update Destination File option Building an EXTRACT template requires entering valid field numbers or field names at the EXTRACT FIELD prompt Since MSC Fileman stores EXTRACT templates in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 this option uses the term PRINT
307. mport Tools Here is what the second page looks like with the Multiple s popup window opened January 2015 367 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data FOREIGN FILE FORMAT CLONE 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Page 2 DESCRIPTION WP USAGE NOTES WP Select OTHER NAME FOR FORMAT LOTUS 123 NUMBERS OTHER NAME LOTUS 123 NUMB DESCRIPTION WP Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert COMMAND After you have completed and filed the Screenman forms you are returned to the Data Export submenu You can now use the new format to create an EXPORT template or do an import 368 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Archiving O NOTE To use MSC Fileman s archiving procedure Kernel 6 5 or later must be installed on your system To use the Find Archived Records option to retrieve records archived with MSC Fileman versions earlier than 20 0 Kernel 7 1 or later must be installed on your system In general computer terms archiving is a procedure that permits you to remove data from an online database and place that data into a low cost storage medium such as magnetic tape for long term retention Archiving in MSC Fileman is a complete purge that simply clears data from your system In other words no data restoration is provided However there is a data retrieval option This facility is a prototype and supported only as a developer s tool You must access your archiv
308. n echoes back the remaining characters and uses the matching choice as your response If more than one possible answers begin with the character s that you typed MSC Fileman displays the possible choices in a list and asks you to choose which choice you want by number OPTION S 1 ScreenMan 2 Statistics CHOOSE 1 3 1 lt Enter gt ScreenMan Default Responses When you re working in VISTA applications the computer frequently 74 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide present a default answer along with a prompt This answer is built into the application program and represents the most probable response to the prompt that is being asked These default answers are clearly identified by the double slash marks that follow them If the default answer that is provided is correct you need only press the Enter key to accept it For example SSN 000123124 In this case if you press the Enter key 000123123 is posted as your response to this prompt If on the other hand the default answer isn t what you need enter the correct information at the prompt For example SSN 123123124 000234563 Enter When editing data stored in fields defaults are used to present the current value of the field As with any default prompt if you just press the Enter key the current value of the field is left unchanged To change the value o
309. n 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Settings Modes Action Key Sequence Wrap No Wrap mode toggle PF2 If wrap is off left and right margin settings are ignored Insert Replace mode toggle lt PF3 gt or Insert Here or lt Insert gt Determines whether new characters are inserted before existing text or instead overwrite existing text Set Clear tab stop lt PF1 gt lt Tab gt Change from default tab stops is effective for current session only Set left margin lt PF1 gt lt Comma gt Move cursor to desired left margin position first Set right margin lt PF1 gt lt Period gt Move cursor to desired right margin position first Status line toggle on or off lt PF1 gt Troubleshooting Terminal Type Setting The Screen Editor is designed for use on all terminal types known in the Kernel computing environment It is very important that your terminal 104 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide type be correctly identified to MSC Fileman Refer to the Kernel manuals for more information about how terminal types are identified Since the PF keys are used in the Screen Editor those keys should not be reprogrammed PF Keys Not Working How to Exit If your lt PF gt keys do not work in the Screen Editor your terminal type is probably set incorrectly Before you
310. n HFS Device Setup on OpenVMS Systems DSM for OpenVMS requires that you add a command parameter to the OPEN command if you export records longer than 512 characters to a Host file The parameter is RECORDSIZE nnnn where nnnn is greater than the longest record that you are exporting If you are using Kernel s DEVICE file 43 5 the OPEN PARAMETER field for the HFS device you are using should be edited to look like NEW RECORDSIZE nnnn January 2015 341 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Sample Output The data below has been prepared for import by Lotus 1 2 3 so it need not be easily read by people However you can see that text fields are surrounded by quotes empty text fields consist just of two quotes A space is in between each field s value Numeric values have no quotes If a field defined as numeric in the MSC Fileman data dictionary has no value a zero 0 is output because this format has SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL set to o FMPATIENT FIVE m PROTE GANGRENE 45 FMPATIENT SIX f CATHO SLEEPING SICKNESS 28 FMPATIENT SEVEN m PROTE CIRRHOSIS 25 FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER FLU 34 FMPATIENT NINE m BLOOD POISONING 44 FMPATIENT FIVE m PROTE GUN SHOT 50 FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER FLU 37 FMPATIENT NINE m FLU O FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER FLU 46 FMPATIENT EIGHT f OTHER APPENDICITIS 39 Special Considerations Exporting Numb
311. n no more fields within the second file are specified the dialogue falls back to the original file Having navigated over to a second file you can use another extended pointer to move to still a third file January 2015 159 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data You cannot cross file boundaries on input unless you have WRITE access to the file to which you move This restriction applies to the individual who created this Patient Exam INPUT template Computed field with Multiple Pointer return type The following example shows the definition of a computed field using a backwards pointer The result is a computed field with a multiple pointer result type Select OPTION MODIFY FILE ATTRIBUTES Do you want to use the screen mode version YES NO Modify what File ZZD TEST FILE1 6 entries Select FIELD TESTERS Are you adding TESTERS as a new FIELD the 13TH No Y FIELD NUMBER 12 DATA TYPE OF TESTERS COMPUTED COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION NEW PERSON NAME By NEW PERSON do you mean the NEW PERSON File pointing via its ZZD TEST FILE POINTER field ZZD Cross reference Yes Enter Yes TRANSLATES TO THE FOLLOWING CODE S Y 999991 12 80 G DO X DD 999991 12 9 4 S X S D0 Y 999991 12 80 FIELD IS MULTIPLE VALUED TYPE OF RESULT MULTIPLE POINTER Enter POINT TO WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter Example Defining a Computed Multiple Pointer Field Once the field
312. n the previous step you determined the data format for your export and made sure there was a corresponding FOREIGN FORMAT file 44 entry The next step is to choose what file and field data to export Do this using the Select Fields for Export Option this creates a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template The process of creating a SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template is very similar to the way you choose fields for printing with the Print File Entries option Qo REF For details on selecting fields see the Choosing Print Fields topic in the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the MSC Fileman User Manual First you must identify the file from which you are exporting data This is the primary file Then you choose from which fields to export data 332 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide In addition to fields from that file and its Multiples you can export data from other files by using the extended pointer syntax O REF For more information on pointer syntax see the Relational Navigation section Also you can put other computed expressions at the EXPORT FIELD prompt to make use of MSC Fileman functions or M code There are several kinds of specifications that are valid at the PRINT FIELD prompt that are not allowed at the EXPORT FIELD prompt They are 11 WORD PROCESSING type fields 12 ALL signifying all the fields in a file 13 Print qualifiers following the fie
313. n this manner leave the Uniqueness Index field blank When you exit the form MSC Fileman will prompt you for a name for the Uniqueness Index and then create the index automatically for you I m going to create a new Uniqueness Index to support Key A of File 716026 Index Name C Enter One moment please Building new index DONE Press RETURN to continue Alternatively you can leave the information in the KEY FIELDS section blank and select an existing Uniqueness Index When you exit the form MSC Fileman checks that the information in the KEY FIELDS section is consistent with the selected Uniqueness Index If there is a conflict you are asked for a method to resolve the conflict In this case select Option 2 Make Key match Uniqueness Index as shown below The Key fields and the fields in the Uniqueness Index don t match Select one of the following January 2015 285 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data 1 Re Edit the Key 2 Make Key match Uniqueness Index also selected on up arrow Enter response 2 Enter Make Key match Uniqueness Index also selected on up arrow Modifying fields in Key DONE Edit a Key To edit a key identify the file or subfile you wish to edit MSC Fileman will display the cross references on the file and offer you the choices of Edit Delete or Create Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select UTILIT
314. nd Deleting Data Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 22 NAME FMPATIENT 22 Enter SEX MALE Enter DATE OF BIRTH AUG 22 1948 Enter HISTORY Owing to poverty in early youth patient seems not to have had proper diet Since achieving economic success his diet has been adequate but traces of original deficiency remain Edit NO When you encounter a WORD PROCESSING field type if your default editor is the Line Editor on the other hand a portion of the text is displayed and you ll be prompted with Edit Option Select PATIENT NAME FMPATIENT 22 NAME FMPATIENT 22 Enter SEX MALE Enter DATE OF BIRTH AUG 22 1948 Enter HISTORY 1 gt Owing to poverty in early youth patient seems not to 2 gt have had proper diet Since achieving economic success 3 gt his diet has been adequate but traces of original 4 gt deficiency remain EDIT OPTION COMPUTED Fields DATA TYPE field values of COMPUTED are typically used to output a value computed at run time in a report You cannot edit the value of a COMPUTED field type An example of a COMPUTED field type would be a field that calculated age based on today s date and a patient s DATE OF BIRTH field Because the field is a COMPUTED field type it can output a patient s current age based on whatever today s date is You cannot edit the AGE field but you can use it to print out the current age of the patient 64 January 2015
315. nd VARIABLE POINTER field types 212 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide W REF These field types are described in the Creating Fields topic in the Creating Files and Fields section You select an application package a file or a group of files to be mapped If you select a package to map you are given the opportunity to exclude a file or files from the map The initial dialogue goes like this Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION MAP POINTER RELATIONS Prints a graph of pointer relations in a database of MSC Fileman files named in the Kernel PACKAGE file 9 4 or given separately Works best with 132 column output Select PACKAGE NAME Enter Enter files to be included Add FILE PATIENT Add FILE Enter Files included 16026 PATIENT Enter name of file group for optional graph header PATIENT FILE DEVICE HOME Enter In this instance only a single file the PATIENT file has been selected for mapping Of course a more useful and complex map would be produced if an entire package or a large related group of files were mapped e NOTE You must have DD access to the PACKAGE file 29 4 and to the files chosen at the Add FILE prompt The output consists of three columns The middle column has the target file or files each surrounded by a box This is the file or group of files that you asked to be mapped To the left in the first column are the files
316. need to change the archiving activity list after writing to temporary storage you must cancel that archiving activity and start a new one When using this option you first select the archiving activity number that you want to modify You can also identify the archiving activity by its file number or file name Then choose the entry that you want to add or delete Here is an example in which an entry is being added to the archiving activity Select ARCHIVE OPTION ADD DELETE lt Enter gt SELECTED ENTRIES Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY ANSWER WITH ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY ARCHIVE NUMBER OR FILE CHOOSE FROM 1 MSC Fileman CHANGE 08 05 89 ARCHIVED PERMANENT SELECTOR FMUSER FIVE ARCHIVING 3 CHANGE 08 30 92 SELECTED SELECTOR FMUSER SIX ARCHIVING 374 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Select CHANGE NO 330 NO 330 VERSION 17 09 PROGRAMMER FMPROGRAMMER 27 ROUTINE DIL2 DATE CHANGED OCT 24 1986 ADD this entry TO the ARCHIVAL SELECTION YES Enter If you enter two question marks at the prompt where you select the entry for addition or deletion a list of the file s entries is displayed Those that are already part of the archiving activity are identified by ON ARCHIVE LIST The ADD this entry TO the ARCHIVAL SELECTION YES question appears if you have selected an entry not already on the list for archiving A DELETE
317. ng Filegram templatename Otherwise specify the fields you want included in the archive The 01 field and the file s PRIMARY KEY and Identifier fields will always be sent In the example that follows all fields are being sent NOTE The PRIMARY KEY is available as of Version 22 0 Here is an example of creating a FILEGRAM type template Select ARCHIVE OPTION CREATE FILEGRAM ARCHIVING TEMPLATE OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE FIRST SEND CHANGE FIELD ALL Do you mean ALL the fields in the file No Y THEN SEND CHANGE FIELD Enter STORE ARCHIVE LOGIC IN TEMPLATE CHANGE FILEGRAM Are you adding CHANGE FILEGRAM as a new PRINT TEMPLATE No YES Write Entries to Temporary Storage The Write Entries to Temporary Storage option writes your selected January 2015 377 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data archiving activities to the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file into a WORD PROCESSING field This step is in preparation for moving the data to permanent storage You cannot archive to permanent storage unless you use the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option first Needless to say this file could grow quite large and will shrink only after the Purge Stored Entries option has been run After using this option the archived entries will appear to be missing from the primary file This protective measure assures selected entries cannot be edited so that entries in the file will match the archived v
318. ng application The maximum number of characters on each line of output usually the longest possible exported record PROMPT FOR 1 or The DATA TYPE field value of each exported DATA TYPE YES field possible choices are FREE TEXT NUMERIC DATE TIME In the example below the file and field specifications in the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template example Error Reference source not found are combined with the 123 Import Numbers FOREIGN FORMAT Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION CREATE EXPORT TEMPLATE OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT Enter SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS Template PATIENT TEST SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS OCT 30 1992 11 32 USER 7 FILE 99002 Do you want to see the fields stored in the PATIENT TEST template Enter Yes or No NO YES FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME lt Enter gt 336 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide THEN PRINT FIELD INTERNAL SEX Enter THEN PRINT FIELD SE RELIGION CLASSIFICATION 1 5 Enter THEN PRINT FIELD DIAGNOSIS Enter THEN PRINT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD DIAGNOSIS Enter THEN PRINT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD AGE AT ONSET Enter THEN PRINT DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD Enter THEN PRINT FIELD Enter Do you want to use this template Enter Yes or No YES Enter Do you want to delete the PATIENT TEST template after the export template is created Enter Yes or No NO Enter When a
319. ns such as print merges You cannot use the Import or Export Tools to exchange word processing fields from MSC Fileman files however 326 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide How Data is Moved between Applications Movement of data between applications that do not speak the same language is a complex process because it involves coordinating activities in different computer applications and often in multiple computing environments MSC Fileman s Import and Export Tools use ASCII data exchange It is the oldest and most widely supported way of exchanging data between applications Data for a particular record or group of records can be transported in one of two standard formats 13 Delimited 14 Fixed length To export data from a MSC Fileman file use the Export Tool to create an ASCII data file containing exported records The exported data is formatted in such a way that it can be recognized by the particular foreign application The ASCII data file can then be imported into the foreign application To import data to a MSC Fileman file use your foreign application to generate an ASCII data file containing records in either delimited or fixed length formats Then use the Import Tool to load those records into the MSC Fileman file you specify Dependency on Correct Data Communication For import or export of data to succeed the data must be passed correctly on all communication pathways between
320. ntifies the file is ATTENDING PHYSICIAN IN DOCTOR FILE SPECIALTY This is the long form of the syntax It is long because the file name is included How to Navigate With a Variable Pointer Field If the pointing field is a variable pointer the long form of the extended pointer syntax must be used so that MSC Fileman will know which of the pointed to files to search Here is the syntax vpfield IN file FILE element OR vpfield file element Vpfield is the variable pointer field in the current file file is one of the possible pointed to files and element applies to that pointed to file The following is an example from the PATIENT file where the PROVIDER field is a variable pointer to either the PHYSICIAN file or the PERSON file and PHONE is a field in the PERSON file You could enter the following print specifications FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME THEN PRINT FIELD PROVIDER THEN PRINT FIELD FILE PROVIDER 150 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide THEN PRINT FIELD PROVIDER PERSON PHONE THEN PRINT FIELD Enter You would receive the following output NAME PROVIDER FILE PROVIDER PROVIDER PERSON PHONE FMPATIENT 13 FMPROVIDER 3 PHYSICIAN FMPATIENT 14 FMPROVIDER 4 PERSON 555 3332 The long form simple pointer asked for the PHONE field from the PERSON file Only the variable pointer from the FMPATIENT 14 entry pointed to
321. nto a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below January 2015 253 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Field 7 in File 100 FIELD LABEL WHO ENTERED DATA TYPE VARIABLE POINTER Ps O aie 7 VARIABLE POINTER FILE 1 OPTION ORDER 1 VARIABLE POINTER FILE 2 LAB TEST ORDER 2 AU VARIABLE POINTER FILE 3 ORDER VARIABLE POINTER FILE 4 ORDER VARIABLE POINTER FILE 5 ORDER VARIABLE POINTER FILE 6 ORDER cts a aaa C MMC MMC a gla a T 1 VARIABLE POINTER 1 D MESSAGE igueyejeor PREFIX MISC SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY NO SCREEN EXPLANATION OF SCREEN Mi e COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value With VARIABLE POINTER type fields MSC Fileman asks you to enter the pointed to file name and its order in the first popup window In this case the first VARIABLE POINTER file entered was the OPTION file which would already have to exist The ORDER was also set to one When you press the Enter key at the ORDER prompt for each VARIABLE POINTER there is an additional popup window i e a popup window within the popup window The additional questions pertaining to the VARIABLE POINTER file you are current
322. o subheader begin the subheader field Ln Useless than the The L suffix lets you specify that only the entire sort field first n characters of the field be used to for sorting sort Thus if you specify SORT BY NAME L2 Only the first two letters of the name field will be used for sorting The order of Maris Roger and Mantle Mickey for example will be unpredictable in your output 410 January 2015 Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide field Pa b January 2015 Store sort range for display The P suffix saves the START WITH and GO TO sort range for one level of sort fields for later reference at a PRINT FIELD prompt You can substitute any string up to 60 characters in length for a and b in Pa b Whatever strings you use as a and b e g FROM and TO become subscripts of the PARAM array SORT BY NAME PFROM TO START WITH NAME FIRST C GO TO NAME LAST Dzzzzz Then at a PRINT FIELD prompt you can reference the saved values by using PARAM a string and PARAM b string Thus in this case THEN PRINT FIELD PARAM FROM THEN PRINT FIELD PARAM TO The sort from and sort to values of C and Dzzzzz in the report would then print in the appropriate location The typical reason to save sort values and then retrieve them from the PARAM array in a print field is for custom report he
323. o your computer when MSC Fileman is initialized This file number is within the range of numbers assigned to your site Be sure to follow local policies when assigning file numbers As you can see from this example when a file is created a field with the label NAME and number 01 is automatically created When creating a new file you can change the definition of this field in the same way you can change the definition of any other field When you select a field e g the NAME field you will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 01 in File 100 FIELD LABEL DATA TYPE FREE TEXT TITLE AUDIT AUDIT CONDITION READ ACCESS DELETE ACCESS WRITE ACCESS SOURCE DESCRIPTION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY YES HELP PROMPT NAME MUST BE 3 35 CHARACTERS NOT NUMERIC OR STARTING WITH PU XECUTABLE HELP 244 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert DATE TIME Fields In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the RELEASE DATE TIME field 4 68 in the ORDER file 100 has a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD RELEASE DATE TIME You will then be
324. of space to store the codes and their external values If the limit is exceeded you are told TOO MUCH SHOULD BE A POINTER NOT SET The DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES is sometimes referred to as a SET For example when defining a DATA TYPE field value as SET OF CODES you are asked the following questions Select FIELD SEX Are you adding SEX as a new FIELD No Y Enter DATA TYPE OF SEX SET OF CODES INTERNALLY STORED CODE m Enter WILL STAND FOR MALE INTERNALLY STORED CODE f Enter WILL STAND FOR FEMALE INTERNALLY STORED CODE Enter WILL SEX FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS SEX ENTRY MANDATORY Y N No Y HELP PROMPT Enter DESCRIPTION 1 Enter In this example m stands for Male and f stands for Female Numbers as well as alphabetic characters can be used 226 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide W9 NOTE You can review and change a file s field attributes easily by running the Modify File Attributes option in Screen Mode REF For an example of entering a DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES in Screen Mode see the Examples of File and Field Creation section FREE TEXT Data Type A DATA TYPE field defined as FREE TEXT allows you to enter the maximum and minimum allowable string length of the FREE TEXT data You can also enter an M PATTERN MATCH that input data will have to match For example when defining a
325. of the field the form in which it is stored in the database NON SMOKER is the external value of the field the form in which it is displayed on screen and in reports Every DATA TYPE field value has an internal and external value in most cases however the internal and external values are the same SET OF CODES field types are an exception NOTE Probably the only place you need to know the distinction between internal and external values is when you print a report and sort on a SET OF CODES valued field The sort order is based on the internal values codes if you sort on a SET OF CODES valued field For more information on printing and sorting see the Print chapter of this manual FREE TEXT Fields You can enter almost any character from your keyboard in a DATA TYPE field value of FREE TEXT The computer accepts numbers letters and most of the symbols that can be entered The FREE TEXT field type places a restriction on the number of characters that you can enter If you enter a question mark in response to the prompt for a FREE TEXT valued field you learn how many characters you are allowed to enter For example a FREE TEXT field type would probably be used to hold a patient s street address ADDRESS 235 Begonia Street 62 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide In some places even though the field is FREE TEXT checks are applied to make sur
326. of the three types of MSC Fileman templates INPUT PRINT SORT For each template type a two screen Screenman form is used This allows you to edit templates in Screen Mode The first screen of the pair allows you to change the access privileges of the template you are editing READ ACCESS This access controls which class of users i e DUZ 0 get to use the template WRITE ACCESS This access controls which class of users gets to change the template The first screen also allows you to enter a DESCRIPTION for the purpose of documenting what the template does This DESCRIPTION will be printed on a TEMPLATES ONLY data dictionary list and in the TEMPLATES section of other data dictionary listings The second screen allows you to edit the contents of a template In order to jump to the second screen from the first screen in a Screen Mode you need only press the lt F1 gt lt ArrowDown gt from wherever you are on the current screen O NOTE The first screen provides the usual kind of field by field help in response to entering a single question mark all help messages are displayed in the lower portion of the screen Also entering lt F1 gt H will January 2015 123 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 3 Templates provide general Screenman help The second screen however does not provide help on individual entries Thus if you are building a complicated new template from scratch it is still a g
327. ointing to the file files pointed to by the file and any templates including forms and blocks associated with the file Standard Format Here is a sample data dictionary in Standard format STANDARD DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 1 STORED IN DIZ 16026 1 ENTRY SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX DATA NAME GLOBAL DATA ELEMENT TITLE LOCATION TYPE A sample file containing some of the fields found in a file of patient information in a hospital database DD ACCESS RD ACCESS WR ACCESS January 2015 203 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data DEL ACCESS LAYGO ACCESS AUDIT ACCESS CROSS REFERENCED BY NAME B CREATED ON MAR 22 1991 16026 01 NAME INPUT TRANSFORM X LAST EDITED HELP PROMPT in length GROUP CROSS REFERENCE E X 1 30 DA z SE X 1 30 DA ref used to on the value in 16026 1 SEX LAST EDITED GROUP 16026 2 DATE OF BIRTH INPUT TRANSFORM K 2630000 lt X 1600101 gt x LAST EDITED HELP PROMPT 1963 GROUP 0 1 FREE TEXT Required K L X 230 L X 3 X 2 1P E MAR 29 1991 Answer must be 3 30 characters DEMOG 16026 B 1 S DIZ 16026 B 2 K DIZ 16026 B Automatically created regular x look up and sort entries based the 01 NAME field 0 2 SET Required m FOR MALE f FOR FEMALE MAR 22 1991 DEMOG 0 3 DATE Required S DT E D DT S X Y X MAR 22
328. oks like CHANGE EXTRACT SEARCH AUG 30 1992 10 59 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 26 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 26 3 MATCHES FOUND After you use this option MSC Fileman marks the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file entry with a status of SELECTED If an unfinished extract activity exists for a file and you select this same file for a subsequent extract activity you will see the following message There is already an outstanding extract activity Please finish it or CANCEL it Since the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file maintains a record of both your extract and archiving activities you will see the italicized word archiving whenever the outstanding file activity is an archiving one To add or delete entries from the SEARCH SORT template you just created use the Add Delete Selected Entries option Add Delete Selected Entries Option 2 of 9 When you wish to add entries to the extract activity or you wish to delete 314 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide an entry or entries use the Add Delete Selected Entries option This option provides an easy way to eliminate undesired entries or to add needed ones to your list of entries to extract Like the Inquire to File Entries option this option displays a selected entry and then asks if you wish to delete or add the entry If you modify the list then the activity s status in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY f
329. ollowing 1 Enter a caret followed by the name of the Multiple field 2 Ignore the default presented at the THEN PRINT FIELD prompt and insert each subfield by entering a caret followed by the name of that subfield 3 After all subfields have been added enter a caret and a right bracket J For example FIRST PRINT FIELD FIELD1 Enter THEN PRINT FIELD FIELD2 Enter THEN PRINT FIELD FIELD3 MultField Enter multiple THEN PRINT MultField SUB FIELD FIELD3 SubFieldl THEN PRINT MultField SUB FIELD FIELD3 SubField2 THEN PRINT MultField SUB FIELD FIELD3 THEN PRINT FIELD FIELD3 The CAPTIONED PRINT Template CAPTIONED Every file has a pre defined CAPTIONED PRINT template that you can select at the PRINT FIELD prompt The CAPTIONED PRINT Template can be very useful it prints out all fields for each entry in your report Use it is a quick way to get all the fields for each entry in your report much quicker than entering each field individually Use it as follows 24 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide FIRST PRINT FIELD CAPTIONED COMPUTED Fields and Record Numbers in CAPTIONED OUTPUT When you choose the CAPTIONED PRINT Template you re prompted with Include COMPUTED fields At this prompt you can decide whether to include COMPUTED type fields in the output for each record as well as record numbers
330. only difference is that with the Print File Entries option you have to choose from which file to print Unlike the Inquire to File Entries option which displays individual records MSC Fileman s print can list all records in a file Thus the focus of the January 2015 11 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Inquire to File Entries option is a single or small group of entries while MSC Fileman s prints are concerned with the entire file MSC Fileman s print features allow considerable flexibility in selecting entries ordering or sorting the entries selected choosing which fields to display and formatting the output The following two basic components can be used to create a report SORT BY dialogue Used to sort and sometimes narrow down the entries that you want displayed PRINT FIELD dialogue Used to choose the fields you want and the format of their display The choices you can make at these two prompts are discussed in detail later in this chapter Standard Column Format for MSC Fileman Prints MSC Fileman has a standard columnar format for print output The file name current date time and page number appear at the top of each report page followed by column headings that correspond to the labels of selected fields There are many ways to customize the format as shown below PATIENT LIST NOV 28 1996 11 32 PAGE 1 NAME SEX FMPATIENT SEVEN MALE FMPATIENT EIGHT MALE
331. ood idea to use the traditional interactive Scrolling Mode with the Enter or Edit File Entries and Print File Entries options Here is an example the first screen of a PRINT template using the Template Edit option Select Utility Functions Option TEMPLATE Edit MODIFY WHAT FILE NEW PERSON Enter Select TEMPLATE File PRINT template Select PRINT TEMPLATE XUFILEINQ 1 XUFILEINO 2 XUFILEINOHDR CHOOSE 1 2 1 Enter XUFILEINO Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the template properties as shown below TEMPLATE NAME XUFILEINQ TEMPLATE TYPE Compiled as XUFILEO routine DATE LAST MODIFIED NOV 4 2004 11 29 DATE LAST USED MAY 17 2012 READ ACCESS WRITE ACCESS USER DESCRIPTION HEADER XUFILEINOHDR SUB HEADER SUPPRESSED Print Fields on Next Page Exit Save Next Page Refresh 124 January 2015 Part 3 Templates MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide YA Enter a command or Specific field followed by a caption to jump to a COMMAND Nau Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert The dates shown following the DATE LAST MODIFIED and DATE LAST USED prompts are for informational purposes only and are not editable Also if a template has been compiled into a set of routines an informational message will be displayed near the top of the screen e g Compiled as XUFILEO
332. or the file field and entry to view 56 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Field Types When you are editing a field entering a question mark at the field prompt usually provides enough help to infer what kind of field you have reached and to predict what kind of data is acceptable in this field i e DATA TYPE field value You do not need to know a lot about these DATA TYPE field values but a little information can be helpful In the pages that follow you ll find examples and brief explanations about each field type i e DATA TYPE field value In MSC Fileman you will work with many if not all of the following DATA TYPE field values DATE TIME NUMERIC SET OF CODES FREE TEXT WORD PROCESSING COMPUTED POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER In addition Subfiles Multiples are introduced at the end of this chapter DATE TIME Fields You can use a variety of formats when entering dates For example a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME would probably be used to hold a patient s birthdate DATE OF BIRTH MAR 3 1955 With a DATE TIME field type as with all field types entering a question mark retrieves help on acceptable responses Enter a single question mark 58 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide ata DATE TIME field promp
333. ose pages during the editing session e f you have accessed any subpages required fields in those subpages must also have values If any required field is empty you cannot file any data changes When you attempt to file Screenman displays a list of those fields that require values The lt PF1 gt Q key sequence allows you to quit the form without saving changes Filing does not occur if you time out NOTE There is one situation in which a change to the database is made immediately when you delete an entry from a file or subfile When you attempt to delete an entry Screenman issues a warning that deletions are immediate and permanent Even if you quit the form without saving your changes the entry is not restored to the database Troubleshooting While screen displays offer many advantages they also require that the software can correctly identify the type of terminal being used or emulated An incorrect identification may produce unreadable and unusable screens To exit such a screen enter lt Enter gt lt Enter gt If you continue to find the screens are unreadable check the following sources for troubleshooting information e The System Management chapter in the section of the MSC Fileman Technical Manual Kernel Systems Manual look for information on Device Type at Signon and changing your terminal type January 2015 93 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data
334. othing at all Whenever you press the Enter key without first entering data or a command you tell the computer either to avoid taking action or to take the default action at the current prompt The computer then moves on to the next prompt Standard Prompt Structure The standard MSC Fileman prompt consists of three parts Prompt Default Response Your Response NAME MOZART WOLFGANG BEETHOVEN LUDWIG VON This 1s the This part of the This is a prompt prompt is optional response typed question and may not always by the user This appear since itis VA and it now FileMan s default becomes the value Simply press default value lt RET gt here if this for this record is the value you want 72 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Responding to Prompts When MSC Fileman prompts you for a response typically a colon is used at the end of the prompt the computer waits for a response Prompts are often asking for the value of a field in a file like the one shown below DATE OF BIRTH This type of prompt is waiting for you to enter a value like 3 OCT 49 Don t forget to complete your interaction by pressing the Enter key Enter If the answer to the prompt question is a choice of several things the prompt often starts with the word Select as in Select PATIENT NAME If the question requires either a YES or NO response in
335. ou match the fields in the incoming records to the fields in the destination file If you do not have an existing IMPORT template that matches incoming to destination fields go to the Field Selection page and specify those fields individually see the Match Source to Destination Fields section A completed page one of the form might look like DATA IMPORT Page 1 DATA FORMAT SOURCE FILE Internal or external EXTERNAL Full path USERS FMPATIENT Host file name IMPORT DAT Foreign format EXCEL COMMA OR Data fixed length MSC Fileman FILE Field delimiter Fields quoted Primary file NEW PERSON Field selection page OR Import Template COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert Match Source to Destination Fields For your import you need to match each field in the incoming record to a field in the destination MSC Fileman file January 2015 347 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Fields in the incoming record are imported in order from left to right Thus for each field in the incoming record you specify the corresponding destination field in the MSC Fileman file in the same order The first MSC Fileman field you specify will be the destination for the first field in the incoming record the second will match the second field in the incoming record and so forth FIELD SELECTION FOR IMPORT Page 2 Choose a field from NEW PERSON Field Delete last field selected These
336. ou MUST enter an EXTRACT template name This EXTRACT template will be used to populate your destination file PRINT TEMPLATE CHANGE EXTRACT Enter EXTRACT AUG 30 1992 USER Z2 FILE 16000 Excuse me this will take a few moments Checking the destination file If entries cannot be moved to the destination file an exception report will be printed Select a device where to print the exception report QUEUEING to this device will queue the Update process EXCEPTION REPORT DEVICE QUEUE TO PRINT ON DEVICE PRINTER After the destination file has been updated MSC Fileman changes the extract activity status from SELECTED or EDITED to UPDATED DESTINATION FILE At this point the entries from the source file are no longer available on lookups This protective measure prevents you from attempting to edit the selected source file entries so that they contain the same data as the corresponding destination file entries January 2015 321 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data The following Exception Report is printed when the Extract Tool fails to move all of the data in a source entry into the destination file A failed INPUT transform is one possible cause of such a failure In this case the incomplete entry in the destination file is deleted The source entry is not locked and its internal entry number is deleted from the extract list The total number of entries extracted is reduced by the total number
337. ould begin in the thirty first column If you want to import or export fixed length records answer YES to this 356 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide field At the time that the EXPORT template is created or an import is done the user will be prompted for the length of each field in the target or source file During export in most cases data will be truncated when the length of a field is reached Thus if a field contains 32 characters but the user defined length is 30 the last 2 characters will not be exported However DATE TIME valued fields will always be exported in their entirety For dates the user must indicate a data length at least as long as the exported date which is 11 characters for standard MSC Fileman dates O NOTE Fixed record lengths cannot be used in conjunction with field delimited data Also the maximum record size for exports for a fixed length format is 255 characters There is no limit on record length during import however A CAUTION Fixed length exports will succeed only if all fields are exported on the same physical line Therefore the total of all the field lengths must not be more than the value stored in the MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH field MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH In many cases data import will be much easier if an entire record is contained on a single line of output That is there are no carriage returns within a single record only between records This
338. p format shows the actual structure of the global file that contains the data for the file and its templates This information is of primary interest to programmers who can control how data is stored Here is a sample Global Map GLOBAL MAP DATA DICTIONARY 16026 PATIENT FILE 05 31 91 PAGE 1 STORED IN DIZ 16026 1 ENTRY SITE KDEMO V7 UCI VAH KXX CROSS REFERENCED BY NAME B DIZ 16026 D0 0 4 01 NAME 1F 1 SEX 2S 2 DATE OF BIRTH 3D gt 3 RELIGION 4P DIZ 16026 D0 1 0 16026 04A 4 DIAGNOSIS DIZ 16026 D0 1 D1 0 4 01 DIAGNOSIS 1F 1 AGE AT ONSET 2N DIZ 16026 D0 1 D1 1 0 16026 42 2 HISTORY 210 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide DIZ 16026 D0 1 D1 1 D2 0 4 01 HISTORY 1W DIZ 16026 D0 2 5 PROVIDER 1V 6 SSN 2F INPUT TEMPLATE S DIE 30 ZZUPDATE PRINT TEMPLATE S DIPT 01 CAPTIONED DIPT 60 ZZDIAGPRINT SORT TEMPLATE S An understanding of these data dictionary listings is the key to displaying changing and deleting the data in individual file entries Indexes and Cross references Only The Indexes and Cross References Only format shows the Traditional cross references and New Style indexes that are defined on a file Here is a sample Indexes and Cross References Only data dictionary listing INDEX AND CROSS REFERENCE LIST FILE
339. ple emptyENV g mumps gld DATA DICTIONARY 85 LANGUAGE INDEX B Regular new style B Index ENTRIES IN FILE 85 LANGUAGE LANGUAGE FRENCH 4 DATE INPUT OQ LANGUAGE 8 ABKHAZ LANGUAGE 9 ACHINESE LANGUAGE 13 ACOLI LANGUAGE 14 ADANGME LANGUAGE 15 ADYGHE LANGUAGE 16 AFAR LANGUAGE 17 AFRIHILI LANGUAGE 19 AFRIKAANS P to exit Type Enter to continue or e You cannot compare a GT M database against a Cache database O Under GT M your Global Directory file must contain only absolute 304 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide path references to use the Namespace Compare option If you Global Directory uses relative paths or environmental variables this option will not work properly January 2015 305 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Extract Tool Using the Extract Tool you can move or copy data from logical records in MSC Fileman files to a new MSC Fileman file This new file may either permit users to modify its contents or prevent users from modifying its contents and can be available for online inquiries and print processes If this new file is used to store archived data any options and utilities that create new entries or update existing entries are restricted Options and utilities that update the data dictionary are also restricted Extract Overview The following is an overview of the process of using the Extract Tool to
340. ppears that displays information about the Multiple as a whole O NOTE If you wanted to delete the entire Multiple field you would enter an at sign O at the MULTIPLE FIELD LABEL prompt After viewing this screen you can proceed to add fields to the Multiple or to edit existing Subfields This is done at the Select SUB FIELD prompt that is displayed when you exit Screen Mode shown below Numeric Subfield After selecting a Multiple valued field e g the RESPONSES Multiple field in the ORDER file 100 you can enter or modify the Multiple s subfields by entering the field s namber or name label at the Select xxxxxxx SUB FIELD prompt where xxxxxxx represents the name of the Multiple A 01 field with the same name as the Multiple field was added automatically when the field was identified as a Multiple The 01 field is the identifying key for an entry in the Subfile Multiple it is similar to a file s 01 field which is the file s identifying key In the following example the 01 subfield is edited to have a DATA TYPE of NUMERIC Select RESPONSES SUB FIELD 01 Enter ITEM ENTRY You will then be taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the subfield as shown below Field 01 in Sub File 100 045 of File 100 FIELD LABEL ITEM ENTRY DATA TYPE NUMERIC C RS O Hu o 1 INCLUSIVE LOWER BOUND i AU INCLUSIVE UPPER BOUND 9999999 IS THIS A DOLLAR AMOUNT NO MAXIMUM
341. ption is used to remove archived data from both the archived file our example is the CHANGE file and the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file A brief history of who performed the various archiving steps and when is saved in the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file January 2015 381 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data If you select an archiving activity for purging that has not been sent to the archives then you will receive the message Data has NOT YET been archived to PERMANENT storage You will see the following dialogue when purging permanently archived data Select ARCHIVE OPTION PURGE STORED ENTRIES BEFORE YOU PURGE MAKE SURE THAT YOUR ARCHIVE MEDIUM IS READABLE YOU MAY USE THE FIND ARCHIVED ENTRIES OPTION TO FIND THE LAST ARCHIVED RECORD APPEARING ON THE INDEX Do you want to proceed NO YES Select ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 ARCHIVED PERMANENT SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J ARCHIVING This option will DELETE DATA from both CHANGE and from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file Are you sure you want to continue NO YES By answering YES to the Are you sure you want to continue NO prompt the entries will be immediately deleted Be sure this is your decision The entries will be deleted in INTERNAL NUMBER order lt lt 4 ENTRIES PURGED gt gt Cancel Archival Selection The Cancel Archival Selection option is used to cancel an archiving activity before the Purge
342. r This restriction can be applied to all data types including word processing fields If editing is attempted the field s value along with a No Editing message will be displayed If however the value is part of a subfield the deletion of the entire entry in the Multiple valued field will be allowed unless the 01 field of the Multiple itself is made uneditable You can also use this option to remove the uneditable restriction on a field Mandatory Required Field Check The Mandatory Required Field Check option checks that fields that are key fields or designated as required contain data It can check one a series or all required entries in a file If an entry lacks data in a required or key field a report like the following is furnished 262 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Required Field Check File 16026 ZZPATIENT PAGE 1 Entry DD Number Path Field 3 FMPATIENT 25 16026 SSN DIZ 16026 3 If all required and key fields contain data then the NO REQUIRED FIELD IS MISSING message is displayed You can store the results in a template Key Definition Using the Key Definition option MSC Fileman allows you to define keys on a file or subfile A key is a group of fields that taken collectively uniquely identifies a record All fields in a key must have values must not be null and those values taken together must be unique across all records in the file or subfile M
343. r a template name when it is determined that a considerable amount of information has been specified If you choose five or more print fields or if some of your print fields have special formatting specifications you are prompted to store your print field specification in a PRINT template as follows STORE PRINT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE If you do not want to store your specifications in a template simply press the Enter key If you do want to save these print specifications for future reuse however respond to this prompt with the name of a template either new or existing Do not enclose the name in brackets use brackets only to invoke a template not to name one Forcing Creation of a PRINT Template Ordinarily you are only asked whether you want to save your PRINT template if you enter five or more fields at the PRINT FIELD prompt or enter complex print specifications However by entering a right bracket 22 January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide by itself at one of your field prompts you can force the prompt that asks you for a template name no matter how few fields you specify You must designate at least one field to be printed to receive the template prompt though For example PRINT FIELD Enter PRINT FIELD NAME THEN PRINT FIELD Enter HEADING Enter STORE PRINT LOGIC IN TEMPLATE ID PRINT Using and Editing PRINT Templates If a PRIN
344. rds in the destination file can be uniquely identified An EXTRACT template is the only type of PRINT template that can be used by the Update Destination File option The ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file 11 11 contains a brief history that describes who performed the various extract activity steps and when the steps were completed The extract activity can be canceled at any time before the Purge Extracted Entries option is used 10 The Purge Extracted Entries option deletes all of the source data in the primary file from which you extracted data 11 Selected entries cannot be purged until they have been moved to the destination file 12 A second extract from a file cannot be performed until the active extract activity has been completed either by purging or canceling Source File The term source file represents the primary file and any other files that can be referenced by extended pointers The primary file is the starting file from which you will extract your data The term extract field refers to any field in the source file Destination File The term destination file represents the MSC Fileman file that stores the extracted data The destination file can be located anywhere on the network January 2015 307 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data that is recognized by the system To create this file you select either of two MSC Fileman options Modify File Attributes or the Extract Tool s Modif
345. re index a single record will ignore the no re index restriction which includes the following APIs EN DIK EN14DIK EN24DIK IX DIK IX1 DIK IX2 DIK 276 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide A cross reference will be re indexed if it is specifically named in an API call regardless of whether it is marked Do Not Re Index which includes the following APIs ENALL DIK ENALL2 DIK WU REF For more information on these APIs see the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual Traditional regular cross references e g B and C cross references will always be re indexed and cannot be marked Do Not Re Index All other cross references can be marked Do Not Re Index because re indexing them might cause problems The following cross reference types can be marked Do Not Re Index All New Style cross references Bulletin cross references MUMPS cross references Trigger cross references To mark a cross reference Do Not Re Index use the Cross Reference a Field or File option DIXREF under the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY CAUTION Do Not Re Index can only be undone by KILLing the NOREINDEX node in the DD REF For more information on the Cross Reference a Field or File option see the Cross Reference a Field or File section January 2015 277 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data INPUT Transform Syntax If you have programmer access you will be able to
346. reachable from any Screenman screen To reach the command line do any one of the following e Enter a caret at any field prompt e Press Enter lt Tab gt or lt PF4 gt to move from field to field until you reach the command line January 2015 85 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data e Press lt ArrowDown gt or lt ArrowUp gt to move the cursor from field to field downwards or upwards until you reach the command line Then you can enter SAVE or EXIT at the command line Command Line Options SAVE EXIT etc From the Command Line you can issue the commands to perform various functions while in Screenman You can also use a shortcut key sequence to perform the same function without having to enter it on the command line Shortcut Keys The following are command line options and the corresponding shortcut responses while in a Screenman form Command Shortcut Description Line Option EXIT lt PF1 gt E Exits the form If you have made any changes Screenman asks if you want to save them before exiting SAVE lt PF1 gt S Saves your changes without exiting the form REFRESH PFI R Repaints the page s on the screen in case for some reason the information displayed on the screen has become corrupted NEXT PAGE lt PF1 gt lt ArrowDown gt Available only on multi page or lt PageDown gt forms Goes to the next page of the form CLOSE lt
347. rence Guide Define Foreign File Format option to create a new one You can use the Define Foreign File Format option to Define a new Foreign Format from scratch Modify a Foreign Format that has not been used to create an EXPORT template Copy an existing format in order to create a similar modified one If you are using the Export Tool through Kernel s menu system you need the DDXP DEFINE key to use the Define Foreign File Format option The following is an example of making a new format from an existing one The Define Foreign File Format option is the first one on the Data Export to Foreign Format submenu Select OPTION OTHER OPTIONS Select OTHER OPTION DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT Select DATA EXPORT TO FOREIGN FORMAT OPTION DEFINE FOREIGN FILE FORMAT You are first asked for the name of a format If you want to create a new format from scratch enter a new name You will be presented with the Screenman form used to define a Foreign Format O NOTE Whenever you are asked to choose a FOREIGN FORMAT you can reply with either the format s NAME or one of its OTHER NAMES Here an existing format s name is given Select FOREIGN FORMAT 123 IMPORT NUMBERS 123 IMPORT NUMBERS foreign format has been used to create an Export Template Therefore its definition cannot be changed January 2015 365 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data This format has already been us
348. rence Guide Part 4 Computing Data Date Time Functions BEIWEEN BETWEEN d1 d2 d3 Parameters d1 d2 and d3 are dates or date expressions dl is the date being tested d2 is one limit for the test d3 is the other limit for the test This Boolean function determines if d1 is within the limits defined by d2 and d3 If d1 is within this range a value of 1 true is returned otherwise 0 false is returned If d1 equals d2 or d3 1 true is returned Select OPTION SEARCH FILE ENTRIES OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE BUILD Enter A SEARCH FOR BUILD FIELD BETWEEN DATE DISTRIBUTED 1JAN2000 1JAN2001 B SEARCH FOR BUILD FIELD IF A Enter BETWEEN DATE DISTRIBUTED 1 AN2000 1 AN2001 DATE DATA datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This date function returns the date portion of a date time expression DATE NOW gt AUG 21 1991 W REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section 166 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide DAYOFWEEK DAYOFWEEK datexp datexp is an expression with date time value Use This function returns the day of the week of the date in datexp DAYOFWEEK DATE OF BIRTH TUESDAY a 24 00 time stamp It represents tonight at midnight W REF For tips on displaying date va
349. res are shown in scrolling mode This is because scrolling mode prompts and responses are easier to follow on paper or in PDF form Most of what is shown in scrolling mode can also be done in screen mode list mode or with a GUI it will just look a little different January 2015 1 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Introduction Introduction What is MSC Fileman In discussing what MSC Fileman is it is probably best to begin with what MSC Fileman isn t MSC Fileman isn t a clinical package like Laboratory or Pharmacy and it isn t an administrative package like IFCAP Integrated Funds Distribution Control Point Activity Accounting and Procurement MSC Fileman is an infrastructure package meaning it is part of what makes VISTA run Programmers use the features in MSC Fileman when creating those other packages Lab and Pharmacy and IFCAP and so on Because the same infrastructure packages and tools are used throughout VISTA similar commands keystrokes and shortcuts can be used in all of them In learning to use the features in MSC Fileman you are learning to use features in all of the other packages MSC Fileman is the shorter more informal name of the package MSC File Manager is its formal name As you may have guessed from the name the specific part of the infrastructure that MSC File Manager handles is files That is MSC Fileman manages VISTA s massive database MSC Fileman commands are all about data entering it ed
350. ressions section 168 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide NOW This argumentless function returns the current date and time NOW gt AUG 23 1991 11 23 W9 REF For tips on displaying date valued elements such as this function in computed expressions e g printing see the Data Types in Computed Expressions topic in the Computed Expressions section NUMDATE NUMDATE datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the date in datexp in MM DD YY format NUMDATE DATE OF BIRTH gt 03 07 49 NUMDATE4 NUMDATE4 datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the date in datexp in MM DD YYYY format NUMDATEA DATE OF BIRTH gt 03 07 1949 NUMDAY January 2015 169 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data NUMDAY datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the day of the month in datexp as a number Example NUMDAY DATE OF BIRTH gt 7 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 NUMMONTH NUMMONTH datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value This function returns the month in datexp as a number Example NUMMONTH DATE OF BIRTH gt 3 DATE OF BIRTH March 7 1949 NUMYEAR NUMYEAR datexp datexp is an expression with a date time value Use This function returns the last two digits of the year in datexp as a
351. rity Number can be entered and stored as nine digits but you may want it to always be displayed with punctuating hyphens The Output Transform option allows you to make this kind of specification by associating with any field a computed expression that operates on the value of that field REF For details about using M code in an OUTPUT transform see the OUTPUT Transform topic in the Advanced File Definition chapters in the Developer Tools section in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual In the dialogue that follows you ll encounter the responses that you would enter if you want your SSN field to always appear with inserted dashes Select OPTION UTILITIES Select UTILITY OPTION OUTPUT TRANSFORM MODIFY WHAT FILE PATIENT January 2015 281 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Select FIELD SSN SSN OUTPUT TRANSFORM E SSN 1 3 S E SSN 4 5 SE SSN 6 9 Remember the following The transform does rot apply when you are inputting data thus do not enter the dashes when using the Enter or Edit File Entries option To retrieve the internal stored value of a field that has an OUTPUT transform you can refer to the INTERNAL SSN function The internal form of the date is automatically invoked when you are sorting by a DATE TIME valued field Uneditable Data The Uneditable Data option allows you to specify that a field s data value cannot be edited or deleted by a use
352. rm of the SET OF CODES is moved 2 SET OF CODES if internal form of the SET OF CODES is moved User must make sure the SET OF CODES fields are identical in both the source file and the destination file data dictionaries January 2015 309 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data DATA TYPE DATA TYPE Field Value of Destination Field Field Value of Extract Field FREE TEXT FREE TEXT WORD WORD PROCESSING PROCESSING COMPUTED FREE TEXT DATE TIME or NUMERIC POINTER TO A 1 NUMERIC if internal form of data is moved 2 Non pointer field type FREE TEXT NUMERIC or DATE TIME if external form of data is moved VARIABLE 1 Non pointer field type if external form of data is POINTER moved if the 01 fields of the pointed to files have different DATA TYPE field values DATA TYPE field values of destination field should be FREE TEXT 2 FREE TEXT if internal form of data is moved MUMPS MUMPS Multiples Multiples Backward Multiples Pointers Here are additional guidelines that you must follow while creating your destination file 4 f you are extracting a SET OF CODES type field and you are mapping it to a FREE TEXT type field use a maximum length of the same or greater than length as the longest external value in the SET OF CODES field If you are mapping the SET OF CODES type field to a SET OF CODES type field create the corresponding field in the destination file using the same spe
353. rnal representation of the date to be used for output There are alternatives Continuing with concatenation as an example you can concatenate a caption with the output of a function e g DATE OF BIRTH _NUMDATE DOB yields DATE OF BIRTH 07 13 91 When using the Print File Entries option you can separately identify the caption like this FIRST PRINT FIELD DATE OF BIRTH THEN PRINT FIELD DOB X 134 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Since DOB was not entered as part of a computed expression it will produce output in MSC Fileman s external date format DATE OF BIRTH JUL 13 1991 You can perform certain arithmetic operations with DATA TYPE field values of DATE TIME that directly yield useful results If you subtract a DATA TYPE field value of DATE TIME from another DATE TIME valued field the result is the number of days the two differ If you add a number to or subtract a number from a DATE TIME valued field the result is a new date For example if the DOB field has the value JUL 20 1969 then the value of the computed expression DOB 30 is AUG 19 1969 WORD PROCESSING Data Type DATA TYPE fields with a value of WORD PROCESSING can be manipulated only with the contains operator e g a valid computed expression within the DIAGNOSIS Multiple of our sample PATIENT file 200 is HISTORY poverty This Boolean expression is true if the DIAGNOSIS in que
354. rompt ADDRESS 1 301 Bayhshore Boulevard Replace Enter With 301 Folsom Street Enter Replace Enter 301 Folsom Street ADDRESS 2 If you want to delete the entire text enter the at sign at the Replace prompt ADDRESS 1 301 Bayshore Boulevard Replace 8 Enter SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE Y Enter Yes ADDRESS 2 Replace Prompt Shortcuts Shortcut Action Replaces everything XXX Replaces everything starting from the characters xxx to the end XXX Replaces everything from the beginning up to and including the characters xxx 76 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide XXX Vyy Replaces everything starting from xxx up to and including E end or END Appends what you enter at the With prompt to the end of the value Prompts with a List of Choices If the acceptable answer to a field prompt is one of a set of choices you can display the list of choices by entering one or two question marks If that set of choices is short enough to be displayed on five or six lines the choices are listed when you enter a single question mark Here is an example Select PATIENT NAME ANSWER WITH PATIENT NAME CHOOSE FROM FMPATIENT SEVEN FMPATIENT 18 FMPATIENT 19 Answer must be 3 30 characters in length Select PATIENT NAME When you enter a question mark
355. routine On the second screen of the form you will see the SORT PRINT or INPUT fields themselves Thus you can use this second screen to edit the specific template fields Here is an example of the second screen of a PRINT template using the Template Edit option Editing Print Template XUFILEINQ S 3 Programmer Access to All Files 1 C38 L35 ACCESSIBLE FILE NUMBER C1 L10 FILE ACCESSIBLE FILE C12 L25 DATA DICTIONARY ACCESS R3 DD DELETE ACCESS R5 DELETE LAYGO ACCESS R5 LAYGO READ ACCESS R4 READ WRITE ACCESS R5 WRITE AUDIT ACCESS R5 AUDIT As you can see from this example fields under a Multiple field e g ACCESSIBLE FILE are indented As you edit add and delete subfields here you must preserve the indentation The same holds true for Relational Navigation within the template fields jumped to are in a January 2015 125 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 3 Templates different file and are indented an extra three spaces each You do not have to indent each new level exactly three spaces however there must be some extra number of spaces Then if necessary un indent the same number of spaces to get back to a previous level If a SORT template has a user number i e USER only that user can use that SORT template in the MSC Fileman Print File Entries option To remove this restriction simply delete the user number by entering an at sign at the
356. rt form is shown below Do you want to store the selected fields in an Import Template YES Name of Import Template ZZIMPORT Are you adding ZZIMPORT as a new Import Template YES Do you want to proceed with the import YES Device for Import Results Report HOME Enter Once the import finishes you can review the Import Results report It lists Thecriteria you chose for your import Any records for which the import failed Theinternal entry numbers of the first and last records imported Here s a sample Import Results report Log for MSC Fileman Data Import Page 1 Import Initiated By 10 FMPATIENT Source File USERS FMPATIENT1 IMPORT DAT Fixed Length NO Delimited By Text Values Quoted NO Values Are External Primary MSC Fileman Destination File NEW PERSON Seq Len Field Name Subfile Name if applicable 1 n a NAME 2 n a STREET ADDRESS 1 3 n a STREET ADDRESS 2 4 n a STREET ADDRESS 3 350 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 5 n a CITY 6 n a STATE 7 n a ZIP CODE Error Report Record 4 Rejected The value Illlinois for field STATE in file NEW PERSON is not valid Summary of Import Total Records Read Total Records Filed Total Records Rejected EON IEN of First Record Filed 209 IEN of Last Record Filed 214 Import Filing Started Jul 16 1996 08 24 36 Import Filing Completed Jul 16 1996 08 24 38 Time of Import Filing
357. ry 2015 393 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data You can only send one entry at a time The following dialogue illustrates the generation of a filegram Select FILEGRAM OPTION GENERATE FILEGRAM OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE Select FILEGRAM TEMPLATE ZZTEST FILEGRAM Select CHANGE NO 334 Send mail to SYSTEM MGR METRODB VA GOV And send to Enter Heceiving Filegrams with MailMan Filegram messages do not appear as NEW mail at the receiving site After the mail message is received the filegram recipient must read the mail message Then it should be forwarded to S DIFG SRV HISTORY on the target system i e the system on which the filegram will be installed This is a special server used to load the message into the recipient s FILEGRAM HISTORY file 1 12 and to set up the interface between MSC Fileman and MailMan at the target system Here is an example of what the recipient would see when reading and forwarding a filegram Subj FILEGRAM for entry 334 in CHANGE FILE 1001 186309 25 Aug 89 10 00 20 lines From SITE MANAGER in IN basket Page 1 SDAT CHANGE 1001 N CHANGE 1001 L 334 BEGIN CHANGE 1001 1 SPECIFIER VERSION 1 17 4 END CHANGE 1001 VERSION 1 17 4 ROUTINE 3 DICATT5 CHANGE 4 Changed DIED to DIEO DATE CHANGED 6 APR 13 1987 PROGRAMMER 7 FMPROGRAMMER DESCRIPTION 11 wp This change enables incredibly wonderful things to occur REPORTER 5 L FMEMPLOYE
358. s you are asked FIRST PRINT FIELD OR THEN PRINT FIELD You can answer with a computed expression For example FIRST PRINT FIELD SEX_ RELIGION L33 This computed expression will return the contents of the SEX and RELIGION fields separated by a space Notice that you can follow the computed expression with print qualifiers to suppress the column January 2015 141 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data heading and L33 to indicate that the COMPUTED field length can be 33 characters long A user with programmer access can also enter M code at this prompt The M code must have a WRITE statement for anything that is to be written to the report SEARCH FOR FIELD Prompt In the Search File Entries option you can answer the SEARCH FOR FIELD prompt with a computed expression If the expression is Boolean i e its value is either true or false you will not be asked the condition of the search because the computed expression itself specifies that condition A user with programmer access can also enter M code at this prompt The M code must set the variable X to whatever is to be compared against the search value SORT BY Prompt In Print or Search File Entries options you can answer the SORT BY prompt with a computed expression If you use a Boolean computed expression you will not be asked for the START WITH
359. s example entering S would give you the option to list the entries in the PROVIDER file If you want to refer to only one of the several pointed to files put that file s PREFIX followed by a period at the VARIABLE POINTER s field name e g in this example entering S would refer you to the PROVIDER file By answering NO to the SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY prompt the user is not allowed to add new entries on the fly to the PROVIDER file the same as the RELIGION field entered as a POINTER TO A FILE If you had answered YES then new entries could be added to the PROVIDER file Select VARIABLE POINTER 16 Enter PERSON Are you adding PERSON as a new VARIABLE POINTER the 2ND No X VARIABLE POINTER PERSON Enter MESSAGE Other Provider ORDER 2 PREFIX O SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY YES In this example a second VARIABLE POINTER was created to the PERSON file 416 By answering YES to the SHOULD USER BE ALLOWED TO ADD A NEW ENTRY prompt users who are editing patient data are allowed to add entries to the PERSON file Select VARIABLE POINTER Enter You stop identifying files for a VARIABLE POINTER by simply pressing the Enter key without any additional entries at the Select VARIABLE POINTER prompt WILL PROVIDER FIELD BE MULTIPLE No Enter IS PROVIDER ENTRY MANDATORY Y N NO Enter HELP PROMPT Enter DESCRIPTION
360. s less than 32 as delimiters may not have the effect you want During either export or import often control characters are intercepted by terminal software communication programs or network links they may not be passed through unaltered as regular printable characters usually are For example ASCII value 5 is interpreted by many terminals as a request for their Answerback Message Thus putting 005 in the FIELD DELIMITER field might cause an Answerback Message to be returned by your terminal instead of the ASCII value 5 being inserted between field values O NOTE The importing application will find the delimiting character if it occurs in the data This will cause an incorrect determination of the boundary between fields For example if a comma is the field delimiter and the data for a field was FMPATIENT 10 the importing application would put FMPATIENT into the first field and 10 into the second field You can avoid this problem by specifying that data in non numeric fields be surrounded by quotes e g FMPATIENT 10 Most importing applications will ignore delimiters if they occur within a quoted string See the discussion of Quote Non numeric Fields below January 2015 355 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data SEND LAST FIELD DELIMITER Some importing applications expect a field delimiter following every field including the final field in a record Other applications only expect delimiters between f
361. s of entries appearing on the exception report EXTRACT ACTIVITY EXCEPTION REPORT JUN 27 1996 PAGE 1 EXTRACT ACTIVITY 9 ARCHIVER FMEMPLOYEE J THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES IN THE TEST FILE WERE NOT MOVED BY THE EXTRACT TOOL Entry 9 was NOT processed because The value NEW for field FTEXT MULT LABEL in FTEXT MULT SUB FIELD in file TEST is not valid Enter 30 was NOT processed because The value NEW for field FTEXT MULT LABEL in FTEXT MULT SUB FIELD in file TEST is not valid PLEASE KEEP THIS FOR FUTURE REFERENCE The following is a list of recommended steps to take when an exception report is printed 1 Finish the active extract activity by purging or canceling 2 Determine the problem with the source entry and fix it 3 If there are several entries on the exception report start another extract activity Your SEARCH SORT template can be reused to use the same search specifications 4 Adjust the extract list to match the list of entries on the exception report by using the Add Delete Selected Entries option 5 Proceed as before For exceptions caused by INPUT transforms keep in mind that the value of 322 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide each field in an extracted record is tested against the INPUT transform of its destination field If any value fails its destination field s INPUT transform the extract for the entire record will fail Make sure
362. se This function returns the name of the file to which a variable pointer points for a particular entry FILE PROVIDER STAFF PROVIDERS INTERNAL INTERNAL field a is the label of a field or a field number preceded by This function returns the internally stored value of the field for a particular entry It is useful in obtaining the internally stored instead of displayed DATA TYPE field value of any of the following POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER DATE TIME SET OF CODES Examples INTERNAL PROVIDER gt 136 VA 200 INTERNAL SEX gt m LAST Format LAST fname LAST fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple valued field in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname January 2015 177 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data This function returns the last entry in a file orina Multiple identified by fname If the second format is used the last entry with a non null value in field is returned The last entry is the one with the highest internal entry number the function does not analyze the values of the entries LAST DIAGNOSIS gt Sepsis last entry in this Multiple field LAST DIAGNOSIS OCCURRENCES gt 3 MAXIMUM Format MAXIMUM fname MAXIMUM fname field Parameters In the first
363. se with LOTUS 1 2 3 spreadsheets Non numeric fields will be in quotes Each field will be separated by a space USAGE NOTE To import into 1 2 3 choose FILE gt IMPORT gt NUMBERS OTHER NAME LOTUS 123 NUMBERS DESCRIPTION NAME EXCEL COMMA DESCRIPTION Use this format to export data to the EXCEL spreadsheet on the Macintosh The exported data will have a comma between each field s value The user will be asked to specify the data type of each exported field Those fields that are not numeric will be surrounded by quotes Commas are allowed in the non numeric data but quotes are not USAGE NOTE OTHER NAME COMMA DELIMITED DESCRIPTION Exported data is delimited by commas Non numeric data is surrounded by quotes OTHER NAME CSV DESCRIPTION Comma Separated Values Define Foreign File Format Option MSC Fileman DIUSER Other Options DIOTHER Data Export to Foreign Format DDXP EXPORT MENU Define Foreign File Format DDXP DEFINE FORMAT gt Locked with DDXP DEFINE All exports depend on a Foreign Format In addition you can use Foreign Formats for imports as well Usually you will be able to use an existing format to properly format your data for export or import To find out what formats exist on your system see the Print Format Documentation section If no existing format meets your needs use the 364 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Refe
364. secutive rows of a report duplicate values add N to the field specification field Rn Right justify text To right justify within a field of n characters follow the R with that number Right justified data is not truncated if n is not large enough data spills into the next field s area causing confusing output NUMERIC DATA TYPE fields are right justified by default However computed expressions with numeric results are not right justified automatically field Sn Skip lines You can indicate a number of lines to skip between fields before printing a field by using Sn Without a number S skips a single line If your field has a null value n lines are skipped anyway You cannot use S with a WORD PROCESSING type field To skip one line before a WORD PROCESSING field precede the field with an additional print specification like this THEN PRINT FIELD S field T Use field TITLE If you want to use the field s TITLE as as header defined in the data dictionary instead of its LABEL in the header add T January 2015 415 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers field Wn Wrap text The W suffix splits a field that is too long for its field column width at word boundaries spaces and prints it out fully on two or more rows You can optionally follow the W with the number of column positions to be occupied by each line of output If the fi
365. ser Reference Guide Sorting Order The ordering of entries within a sort is generally from low value to high value Some special cases for some DATA Type field values include SET OF CODES fields are sorted by the internally stored code not the value that is output FREE TEXT fields usually sort from lowest value to highest value following the ASCII sorting sequence Digits sort before uppercase letters which sort before lowercase letters e g M1 sorts before MC which sorts before Mc Sorting Canonic Numbers and Non Canonic Strings and the TXT Sort Qualifier Canonic numbers are pure numbers that do not have leading zeros or trailing zeros after a decimal point Thus 1 1 is a canonic number but 01 1 and 1 10 are not A non canonic string is everything else For example 8C is a non canonic string This distinction is important when sorting because in all MSC Fileman sorting canonic numbers sort first and everything else sorts second Usually this works very well But in a few cases where sort fields contain a mix of canonic numbers and non canonic strings unexpected sort orders result Classic cases include sorting on Social Security Numbers and on ward locations Consider Social Security Numbers SSNs The SSNs 666333333 and 666999900 are canonic numbers But the SSN 000769000 is not a canonic number because of its leading zero When you use the default sort based on Social Security Number you get output that looks l
366. sked if you want the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template deleted answer YES only if you know you will not need the template again If an EXPORT template is not successfully created the SELECTED EXPORT FIELDS template will not be deleted Next identify the FOREIGN FORMAT to use and name the EXPORT template that you are creating You cannot overwrite an existing PRINT template Select FOREIGN FORMAT 123 IMPORT NUMBERS Enter name for EXPORT Template PATIENT TO 123 Are you adding PATIENT TO 123 as a new PRINT TEMPLATE the 197TH No Y Enter After you choose the EXPORT template name you are prompted for any additional information needed In this example the format does require additional information the DATA TYPE field value for each field in this situation the defaults derived by the Export Tool are correct and the maximum length of each record Enter the data types of the fields being exported below Do you want to continue Enter Yes or No YES Enter NAME FREE TEXT Enter January 2015 337 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data INTERNAL SEX FREE TEXT Enter SE RELIGION CLASSIFICATION 1 5 FREE TEXT Enter DIAGNOSIS in DIAGNOSIS subfile FREE TEXT Enter AGE AT ONSET in DIAGNOSIS subfile NUMERIC Enter Enter the maximum length of a physical record that can be exported Enter to stop the creation of an EXPORT template MAXIMUM
367. sort When Subfiles are involved the Export Tool performs a special sort in order to format the data Since the Export Tool must do this customized sort you cannot sort the data yourself If you need the data in a particular sequence sort it in the importing application You can perform any search on the data that is necessary to choose entries for export About EXPORT Templates The Export Tool uses two types of templates the EXPORT FIELDS template created in Step 2 and the EXPORT template created in Step 3 These templates are variations on standard PRINT templates They are stored in the PRINT TEMPLATE file 4 and are sometimes referred to as PRINT 344 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide templates in the user dialogue Although similar to PRINT templates they do differ in important respects For example you cannot compile either of the Export Tool s templates You can delete these templates as soon as they are used if you wish Also both kinds of templates can be deleted using the Template Edit option on the Utility Functions menu DIUTILITY In addition you can delete an EXPORT FIELDS template by choosing the template within the Select Fields for Export option editing it and putting an at sign E at the NAME prompt Do not delete an EXPORT template before a queued export has been completed How to Import Data The following menu shows the option used to import data MSC
368. st value from field See MAXIMUM for limits of use Examples MINIMUM APPOINTMENT gt MAR 1 1979 APPOINTMENT is a Multiple valued DATE TIME field MINIMUM PATIENT AGE gt 18 Format The syntax of this function is different because the function s name is defined by the user The name is a number followed by an ordinal number suffix nTH fname nTH fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by January 2015 179 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data pome o This function returns the n entry in a file or in a Multiple identified by fname If the second format is used the value of the specified field associated with the nth entry in fname is returned The n entry is determined by the internal entry number the function does not analyze the values of the entries When used with the second format the nth subentry with a non null value is returned 2ND DIAGNOSIS Angina Pectoris the second entry in the DIAGNOSIS Multiple 10TH ADMISSION ADMISSION DATE gt JAN 2 1990 ADMISSION DATE associated with the tenth ADMISSION NEXT Formar NEXT Parameters field is a field s number preceded by a or a field s label from the current file or Multiple This function returns the
369. stination file until you have corrected the problem Here is the warning that you will see when any source field and its corresponding destination field fail one of the validation checks THE DESTINATION FILE DATA DICTIONARY SHOULD BE MODIFIED PRIOR TO ANY MOVEMENT OF EXTRACT DATA At any MAP FIELD NAME TO FILE NAME FIELD prompt entering two question marks yields a list of the selectable fields in the destination file The list gets shorter as fields are selected to ensure that no two extract fields map information to a single field in the destination file 320 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Update Destination File Option 6 of 9 Once you have used the Update Destination File option the extracted data from the source file is moved to the destination file After you enter the name of the EXTRACT template that you wish to use MSC Fileman makes sure the template s mapping information is correct and acceptable and then populates the destination file adding entries as new records MSC Fileman will not however check to see if any of those records to be moved already exist in the destination file Since this two step process can be quite time consuming it can be queued at the DEVICE prompt Here is a sample of the dialogue Select EXTRACT OPTION UPDATE DESTINATION FILE Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 31 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Y
370. stion has HISTORY text that contains the string poverty Also you cannot concatenate WORD PROCESSINC type fields with other values using the concatenation operator Using Functions as Elements in Computed Expressions You can use recognized functions as an element in any COMPUTED field expression A function performs an operation that returns a value These functions are available to all users Functions can also be added by making entries in the FUNCTION file 4 5 If you examine this file you will know all of the functions available to you O REF For a description on how to add functions see the MSC January 2015 135 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Fileman Functions Creating chapter in the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual Some functions require an argument or arguments others are argumentless The arguments of the function can be any element including field name field number preceded with the quoted literal or even other functions The SOUAREROOT function for example would take an argument of 64 and return 8 Thus if the AGE field of a patient has the value 64 the expression SQUAREROOT AGE would equal 8 O REF For information on the syntax and description of the functions exported with MSC Fileman see the MSC Fileman Functions section Where to Use Using Computed Expressions in COMPUTED Fields One important place where you can use a computed expression is in a fie
371. story you want to delete Select OPTION ENTER OR EDIT FILE ENTRIES 396 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide INPUT TO WHAT FILE FILEGRAM HISTORY EDIT WHICH FIELD ALL Enter Select FILEGRAM HISTORY 8 24 1994 11 10 00 DATE TIME AUG 24 1994 11 10 00 SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE THE ENTIRE FILEGRAM HISTORY YES January 2015 397 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Appendix A Advanced Edit Techniques Field Value Stuffing You can make the editing process quicker easier and more accurate by stuffing field values when appropriate The amount of data that needs to be entered from the keyboard can be reduced by providing responses that can be verified by pressing the Enter key or that are automatically put into the file Unvalidated Stuffs 4 If you have programmer access you can define a default that does not go through the INPUT transform by using four slashes If you use this kind of default you must show the internally stored value of the field For example the SEX field has a DATA TYPE field value of SET OF CODES where m stands for MALE and f stands for FEMALE you could define a four slash stuff like this EDIT WHICH FIELD SEX m Variable Stuffs An even more powerful kind of default is the variable default In this mode you specify not a literal value like the word MALE
372. summed field Total count and mean Use for NUMERIC fields only The sum count of non null values and the arithmetic mean of the non null values are printed field Cn Set start column position You can specify the starting column of a field s display If the number n is a positive number the field prints in that column counting from the left margin If it is negative the field starts in that column as subtracted from the right margin If there is not enough room on a line for the field to display properly it is moved to the line below Adding C1 always starts a field s display at the beginning of a line field Dn Round decimal fractions Specify the number of decimal digits of accuracy with a number n If n 0 the number is rounded to a whole number The number n must be gt 0 or 0 field Ln Left justify and truncate To left justify within a field width of n characters follow the L with the number of column positions you want the field to occupy If necessary the data is truncated to fit into this length Since non numeric fields are left justified by default the only effect of L on those fields is truncation This qualifier does not affect DATE TIME valued fields 414 January 2015 Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide field N Suppress If you do not want the same value for a field consecutive printed on con
373. t backward PO oastecpdtuetvsestehdoe estin eret He lives heo M N Relational Navi Oti aia 158 MUS dd Relational Navies ON ideo rea no 158 Relational Navigati n n soia ce ed Oud P irate ntc ea eiie 157 WORD PROCESSING Field Sti pine aset tete ia ore eee ed Advanced Edit Techniques judio 399 VVIRIA EE ACCESS rd IDA iru e toten ho IDA 123 160 274 291 Write Entries to Temporary Storage Option 370 374 376p KA land AD a e seeded des ice ce eee ber Mn Gee oyente ur eue dese ue Ud CCTOSSSIELO PO HCOS ooo Ut uae teeta eee B Adeo 269 XMODEM Nr 341 January 2015 431
374. t enter TBOX to go to the User s Toolbox menu Choose the Edit User Characteristics option from the User s Toolbox menu At the Select TERMINAL TYPE NAME prompt you can usually just accept the default by pressing the Enter key lt Enter gt You are now placed in a ScreenMan form where you can edit your user characteristics Press lt ArrowDown gt until your cursor arrives at the PREFERRED EDITOR prompt At the PREFERRED EDITOR prompt you can choose your Preferred Editor Enter two question marks to get a list of the available editors on your system Choose one as your Preferred Editor and then press the Enter key Enter The Screen Editor is usually a good choice Press lt PF1 gt E to exit the ScreenMan form If you are asked whether to save changes before leaving the form answer YES Your Preferred Editor should now be set to the editor you ve chosen This is the editor that will be used whenever you edit the contents of a WORD PROCESSING field Switching to Another Editor While Editing Selecting your default editor determines which editor is used whenever you edit a WORD PROCESSING field However if you want to temporarily switch to another editor once you have started editing both the Screen Editor and the Line Editor allow you to do this 96 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide In the Screen Editor 1 Press lt PF1 gt A 2
375. t string is a string expression n is an integer representing width of field January 2015 191 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data In the second format n1 is a numeric expression n2 is an integer representing the width of field n3 is the number of decimal places to output with the number In the first format the function returns string right justified within a field that has a width of n If string is longer than n there is no truncation In the second format the function returns n1 right justified in a field that has a width of n2 There will be n3 decimal places to the right of the decimal point NAME 20 gt FMPATIENT 21 12 spaces preceding the S _ J PRESCRIPTION COST 8 2 gt 25 88 3 spaces preceding the 2 SL ENGTH Format L string L string delimiter Parameters string is a string expression delimiter is a character or characters or an expression yielding a character or characters that divides the string into pieces Use In the first format the function returns the number of characters in string In the second format the function returns the number of pieces into which delimiter divides the string If delimiter does not exist within string 1 is returned Examples L PROVIDER gt 11 PROVIDER is FMPROVIDER 5 L PROVIDER gt 2 same PROVIDER P IECE 192 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide
376. t a pointer DD 16033 0 PT 16037 01 was killed Checking FIELDs Checking subfile 16033 04 Checking IX nodes Checking FIELDs Checking subfile 16033 42 Checking FIELDs Returning to subfile 16033 04 Returning to main file January 2015 215 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Checking subfile 16033 01 Checking IX nodes Checking FIELDs Returning to main file In the previous example the check is being run on a single file Correction of erroneous nodes has been requested An incorrect PT node was found and deleted O NOTE Subfiles are inspected too Application developers might use this tool to clean up their files before export Site managers may find the reporting function useful for checking a package s files after installation Erroneous nodes that are found by this option may be remnants of prior versions of the files the current install may not be to blame Find Pointers into a File Option You can identify entries pointing to a file using the Find Pointers into a File Option This option helps you analyze relationships between files and their entries It is accessed from the Data Dictionary Utility menu After selecting the file to be analyzed you have three choices Find all of the entries in other files that point to a particular entry in your file Find all of the entries in other files that point to any entry in your
377. t and you ll be given help about what dates are acceptable for the particular field and what precision of date is needed e g year month day or time Acceptable Formats for Entering Dates JULY 20 2009 or July 20 2009 7 20 09 20 JUL 09 10jul09 10 jul 09 072009 To simplify entering dates you can use shortcuts such as T for today T 1 for yesterday or T 1 for tomorrow Or you can combine T with D for day W for week or M for month T 2D means two days ago T 1W means today plus one week and T 4M means four months from today The year portion of the date can be left off Normally MSC Fileman assumes the current year Sometimes you can input imprecise dates such as JUL 09 or 2009 Abbreviations for Dates Abbreviation Meaning TODAY or Today or Tort Today TODAY 1 or T 1 or t 1 Tomorrow TODAY 7 or T 7 or t 7 One week ago TODAY 3W or T 3W or t 3w Three weeks hence Times in DATE TIME Fields In some DATE TIME fields you can enter a time of day along with the date For example to indicate 4 00 PM on July 20 2009 enter the date in January 2015 59 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data one of the formats shown above followed by an at sign 0 followed by the time For example you might enter APPOINTMENT 20 JUL 09 4PM To be totally unambiguous you can enter time as military time four or six digits no colon hour A
378. t created is deleted Using the caret key for jumping is not allowed for identifier fields in the Enter or Edit File Entries option when adding a new entry If you attempt to use the caret key in a field designated as an identifier in an edit session the entry just created is deleted Since the SSN field in our example is mandatory and an identifier this ensures that every patient in our PATIENT file will have an SSN recorded As mentioned above you could make the AGE AT ONSET subfield an identifier for the multiple DIAGNOSIS field as follows Select UTILITY OPTION IDENTIFIER Select FIELD DIAGNOSIS multiple Select DIAGNOSIS SUB FIELD AGE AT ONSET Want to make AGE AT ONSET an Identifier NO Y Want to display AGE AT ONSET whenever a lookup is done on an entry in the DIAGNOSIS file YES N As a result of this dialogue every time a new DIAGNOSIS for a patient is entered the AGE AT ONSET would be asked The AGE AT ONSET would not however be automatically displayed at subsequent DIAGNOSIS lookups To drop a field s status as an identifier simply return to the Identifier option select the field and answer YES to the question Field is already an Identifier want to delete it NO Y Re Index File Use the Re Index File option DIRDEX when you create a new cross reference on a field that already contains data and you want to re index the file The following dialogue is presented when re
379. t file to another file Using a pointer field from an entry in the current file you can easily retrieve information from the pointed to entry in another file For example suppose you are printing a report from the PATIENT file 2 Further suppose that the PATIENT file has a pointer field called ATTENDING PHYSICIAN field to the DOCTOR file Now what if you wanted to include the phone number of the attending physician for each patient in your report from the PATIENT file The attending physician s phone number is stored in the DOCTOR file not the PATIENT file You can include the attending physician s phone number for each patient in your report by using a simple extended pointer at the PRINT FIELD prompt PRINT FIELD ATTENDING PHYSICIAN PHONE NUMBER You can use simple extended pointers in many places in MSC Fileman including Reports Print Fields Sort Criteria Search Criteria January 2015 147 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data Editing Records edit information in related files not just current file Computed Expressions COMPUTED Fields Within word processing Windows The syntax for simple extended pointers is described below Simple Extended Pointer Syntax Short form With simple extended pointers there must be an existing relationship based on a pointer field from the current file to the file you are interested in In this case you can reference a field in a
380. taken into a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 68 in File 100 FIELD LABEL RELEASE DATE TIME DATA TYPE DATE niri a arr rn E OS ren qr en a rien a dre re ra cM Dr OS 1 EARLIEST DATE MN AU LATEST DATE CAN DATE BE IMPRECISE NO CAN TIME OF DAY BE ENTERED YES CAN SECONDS BE ENTERED YES IS TIME REQUIRED YES IS THIS FIELD MULTIPLE NO MANDATORY NO HELP PROMPT Enter the Date time this order was release4d to the service XECUTABLE HELP COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert anuary 2015 245 J y MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value DATE TIME type fields do not have any required entries You can accept all the default values within the popup window simply by closing the window by pressing the F1 C keys NOTE To delete the entire field enter an at sign at the FIELD LABEL prompt SET OF CODES Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the FLAGGED field 4 61 in the ORDER file 100 has a value of SET OF CODES Select OPTION MODify File Attributes Do you want to use the screen mode version YES Enter MODIFY WHAT FILE ORDER Enter Select FIELD FLAGGED You will then be taken in
381. tatus of your archiving activity is SELECTED The status of an archiving activity can be SELECTED EDITED ARCHIVED TEMPORARY ARCHIVED PERMANENT or PURGED You may identify a file at the ARCHIVE FROM WHAT FILE prompt and get the response that follows There is already an outstanding archiving activity Please finish it or CANCEL it This message means that the file you identified has already been selected January 2015 373 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data for archiving and that archiving activity has not been completed a second one cannot be started yet Since the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file is being shared by both archiving and extract activities the italicized word in the message will say extract if the outstanding activity on the file identified is an extract Add Delete Selected Entries Use the Add Delete Selected Entries option to add entries to or delete them from the archiving activity This is an easy way to clear out unwanted entries or add needed ones before archiving This option uses the Inquire to File Entries option to display the selected entries and then allows you to add or delete an entry If you add or delete an entry to an established archiving activity then the status of the activity will change to EDITED The Add Delete Selected Entries option will not allow you to edit an archiving activity list after the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option has been done If you
382. te 6 22 96 Exam Results XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Pointer Field Patient File Current File DOB 07 03 56 Social Security Marital Status Race Occupation Date Entered Provider Report printed from Patient File PATIENT LIST OCT 1 1996 15 12 PAGE 1 FMPATIENT 10 6 22 96 Suppose you have selected the PATIENT file and you want to list dates of radiology exams for certain patients If the pointer is from the RADIOLOGY EXAM file to the PATIENT file not the other way around you can list the radiology exam dates using a Backward Extended Pointer The POINTER TO A FILE field to the current file from the pointing file must be cross referenced If the POINTER TO A FILE field is located in a Subfile then the whole file must be cross referenced by the pointer To use a Backward Extended Pointer you must make a relational jump from the current file to the file in question enter the name of the file pointing to the current file followed by a colon Once you make the January 2015 153 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data relational jump to the backwards pointer linked file specify which fields elements to access in that file Returning to the situation mentioned above within the RADIOLOGY EXAM file there is a field called EXAMINEE pointing back to our PATIENT file That EXAMINEE pointer field is cross referen
383. ted Fields Y Computed Fields R Record Number IEN B BOTH Computed Fields and Record Number IEN Include COMPUTED fields N Y R B NO B Enter OTH NAME FMPATIENT DATE OF BIRTH NAME FMPATIENT DATE OF BIRTH NAME FMPATIENT DATE OF BIRTH ONE TWO THREE January 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Standard Caption Output Choosing Standard Captioned Output can be very useful it prints out all fields that contain data for each entry in your report Use it is a quick way to select all the fields for each entry in your report Otherwise you need to select each field to print individually from the list of fields available to print in the file Answering YES to use STANDARD CAPTIONED OUTPUT is the fastest way to choose what fields to print Computed Fields When using Standard Captioned Output you can choose from the following at the Include COMPUTED Fields prompt N default NO No record number IEN no Computed Fields Y Computed Fields e R Record Number IEN B BOTH Computed Fields and Record Number IEN The default is to display neither Enter two question marks for detailed help about responding to this prompt Audit Trails If one or more of the fields have been audited the system will display the DISPLAY AUDIT TRAIL prompt If you answer YES then you will see the changes that have been recorded for the various fields in the AUDIT f
384. th the Caret If you fail to notice a typing error until after you ve pressed the Enter key and stored a field you can still correct this error What you need to do is go back to the field where the error occurred You can usually accomplish this by using the jump command This command requires entering a caret January 2015 79 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data along with the name or first few letters of the field to which you wish to jump Instead of moving to the next prompt you jump to the prompt you identified as shown below SSN 000123123 DATE OF BIRTH DATE OF BIRTH To get a list of the fields to which you can jump enter a caret and a question mark at any field prompt You can use the caret to jump both forward and backward in a sequence of fields Exiting with the Caret To exit or opt out of answering any question or prompt enter the caret by itself at the field prompt as in the example below SSN 000123123 Select PATIENT NAME In the previous example the field value 000123123 remains unchanged but you skip the rest of the questions for this record and return to the Select prompt If you enter a caret at the Select prompt you return to the previous prompt and so on Entering the caret by itself to exit a given function is a convention used throughout VISTA applications Exi
385. the Check Fix DD Structure option from the Data Dictionary Utilities submenu You must have READ access to the files being 214 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide analyzed In addition you need DD access for this option to correct erroneous nodes This utility looks at a file s identifiers cross references POINTER TO A FILE VARIABLE POINTER and COMPUTED fields If there are inconsistencies or conflicts between the information in the data dictionary and the structure of the file s global nodes the Check Fix DD Structure option will note them If you want the Check Fix DD Structure option will correct inconsistencies found in the data dictionary The process will not change any file structures it only removes or corrects unnecessary or incorrect DD nodes Data is not affected The dialogue for running this option is simple You specify the file or files you want to check and indicate whether you want to delete incorrect nodes Then the progress of the checking is displayed followed by a report of any discrepancies found or any changes made For example Select DATA DICTIONARY UTILITY OPTION CHECK FIX DD STRUCTURE Check the Data Dictionary START WITH WHAT FILE 16033 GO TO WHAT FILE Enter Remove erroneous nodes NO YES DEVICE HOME Enter DECSERVER Checking file 16033 Checking ID nodes for Q Checking IX nodes Checking PT nodes File 16037 Field 01 is no
386. the INPUT transforms on the destination fields are appropriate for the data you will be extracting O NOTE If you are extracting a Subrecord using the EXTRACT DIAXU entry point and its FILING LEVEL parameter and a value fails the INPUT transform only the extract of the Subrecord will fail Purge Extracted Entries Option 7 of 9 If you have DELETE access to the primary file you can use the Purge Stored Entries option to delete extracted data from the primary file our example is the CHANGE file After you have purged your entries MSC Fileman will update the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file If you attempt to purge an extract activity that lacks the status UPDATED DESTINATION FILE you will encounter the following message Data has NOT YET been moved to the destination file When purging extracted data you will encounter a dialogue much like the one that follows Select EXTRACT OPTION PURGE EXTRACTED ENTRIES Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 Enter CHANGE 08 30 92 UPDATED DESTINATION FILE SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT If the source file has fields from other files pointing to it the Extract Tool tells you The records about to be purged should not be pointed to by other records to maintain database integrity This option will DELETE DATA from both CHANGE and from the ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY file Are you sure you want to continue NO YES January 2015 323 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6
387. the WORD PROCESSING field is uneditable or appears in a display block you can view the contents of the field with an editor However if you edit the text your changes will not be filed in the permanent database even if you tell the editor to save the changes Multiples You can easily spot a Multiple field It usually begins with the word Select as in Select ADDRESS or Select ADMISSION DATE There are two ways Multiples can be displayed on a form The Multiple is linked to a popup subpage which contains the subfields of the Multiple e The Multiple is displayed in a repeating block several subrecords can be displayed simultaneously on a page much like a scrolling list Multiples Linked to Popup Subpages A Multiple field can appear on a page and be linked to a regular or popup subpage When you navigate to the Multiple field select a subrecord and press the Enter key you are taken to the subpage which contains the fields within the Multiple In the following screen capture the Multiple is the field with the caption Select SECONDARY MENU OPTIONS When you enter a secondary menu option at this field you are taken into a popup subpage where you can edit the fields for that particular subrecord Edit an Existing User NAME FMUSER ONE Page 1 of 5 NAME FMUSER ONE INITIAL OF TITLE OIT STAFF NICK NAME One SSN 000111659 DOB DEGREE MAIL CODE DISUSER TERMINATION DATE Termination Reason
388. the field is printed on that line as counted from the top of the page If it is negative it is printed on that line as counted from the bottom When specifying Yn you must account for any page header that is displayed January 2015 417 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Appendix B Sort and Print Qualifiers XXX Insert a literal At the PRINT FIELD prompt enclose a free text literal in quotes The literal is inserted into the body of the report For example the following specifications begin each entry s display with a caption and NAME FIRST PRINT FIELD Patient s name THEN PRINT FIELD NAME OR FIRST PRINT FIELD Patient s name THEN PRINT FIELD NAME X The header for the NAME field is suppressed in both examples 418 January 2015 Index MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Index PROCCSS MMOL NNNM A O TEE 274 ACV ld A A A AAN NE CLOS MOCOS tt AAA a 268 Add Delete Selected Entries Option sss 314p 322 372 374 Advanced Edit Techniques ai od bcd qupd 398 ARCHIVAL ACTIVITY File 307 311pp 323p 369 371 374 378p 381 383 385 ARCHIVE PTE tes het bp a decane nse apes hod to A cu aee ene rage ois File Level ADS en nar tee eo ris vd du eR iib 308 317 jr C l ERs ash octane atid nes lcs de AATE 309 317 AECI O oi 369 Add Delete Selected Entries Option serene 374 AR
389. ting occurs in the same predetermined order in a sequence designed by the developer of the application You enter and the computer stores your responses one at a time And unless you re familiar with a few timesaving scrolling mode techniques you have to step through each prompt in a record before you can finish editing the record Recently developed VISTA applications often use a screen oriented interface i e Screen Mode for editing data However scrolling mode interfaces are still used quite heavily in VISTA applications After reading about a few of the scrolling mode operations discussed in this chapter you should be able to enter and edit data in scrolling mode with a minimum number of keystrokes The Enter Key To enter data in scrolling mode you primarily enter data or commands at a prompt on your terminal screen After typing a command or data at your terminal keyboard you must send your response from your terminal to the computer Pressing the Enter or Return key on your keyboard abbreviated January 2015 71 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data as Enter in examples sends all of your typed input to the computer for action or storage If you type a response but fail to press the Enter key the computer waits it won t do anything until you tell it you ve finished entering your response Pressing the Enter key also tells the computer when you ve decided to enter n
390. ting with the Caret When the user is doing a lookup to the file MSC Fileman may search many indexes looking for a value that matches the users input This can be time consuming If the user wants to get out of the lookup before MSC Fileman has completed the search the user can enter at any prompt 80 January 2015 Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Mandatory Required Fields In some cases a field is mandatory and you must enter a value if one isn t already there in other words a null response i e pressing the Enter key without making an entry is not valid When you use the caret or press the Enter key without entering data in one or more fields in the entry your terminal beeps and prompts you again to enter information If you don t fill in all required fields in a record it is considered incomplete and won t be stored unless you fill in the required fields This protects the database from records containing so little information that they are useless Enter the requested information If you still need to exit before you can provide all required information you should abort your edit and start over later You can usually exit out of the data editing sequence by answering any of the prompts with a caret ca Spacebar Recall MSC Fileman can recall your most recent response to a prompt This feature is called Spacebar Recall and employs the Spacebar lt Spaceb
391. tion KILL logic or KILL condition is being executed Aira Value in KILL Value in SET Logic SET y Logic KILL Condition Condition X1 order Old value Old value Xa ones The variables X X1 and X2 always equal X 1 X1 1 and X2 1 respectively If an order number in the cross reference refers to the 01 field X1 order is set to null when the SET logic and SET condition are executed during record creation Similarly X2 order is set to null when the KILL logic or condition are executed during record deletion January 2015 269 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 5 Defining Data Key Support A regular New Style index can be used as the Uniqueness Index for a key MSC Fileman ensures that all fields in a Uniqueness Index have values are not null and that those values taken collectively are unique across all records in the file O REF For more information on keys and how to create them see the Key Definition section Edit a New Style Cross reference To edit a New Style cross reference identify the file or subfile you wish to edit MSC Fileman will display the cross references on the file and offer you the choices of Edit Delete or Create Select OPTION UTILITY FUNCTIONS Select Utility Functions Option CROSS REFERENCE A FIELD OR FILE What type of cross reference Traditional or New Traditional NEW MODIFY WHAT FILE TEST Select Subfile lt Enter gt Current Indexes on file 16026
392. tional queries For example suppose you want to print all patients who are older than their attending physicians A field in the PATIENT file called ATTENDING PHYSICIAN points to the DOCTOR file Given a field PT AGE in the PATIENT file and a field DR AGE in the DOCTOR file you can use the Print File Entries option and then enter the information that follows OUTPUT FROM WHAT FILE PATIENT SORT BY NAME PT AGE gt ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DR AGE WITHIN PT AGE gt ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DR AGE SORT BY lt Enter gt FIRST PRINT FIELD NAME Here the simple extended pointer ATTENDING PHYSICIAN DR AGE is used to make a comparison between values in fields in two different files COMPUTED Field Example Suppose the PATIENT file has an ATTENDING PHYSICIAN field that points to the DOCTOR file The DOCTOR file in turn has a field called SPECIALTY If you want to create a COMPUTED field within the PATIENT January 2015 149 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data file data dictionary that is equivalent to the SPECIALTY field in the DOCTOR file you can define a COMPUTED field as COMPUTED FIELD EXPRESSION ATTENDING PHYSICIAN SPECIALTY The file does not have to be specified in this case since there is a direct link between the two files through the pointer field This is an example of the short form of the simple extended pointer syntax An equivalent computed expression which explicitly ide
393. to a Screenman form where you can edit the properties of the field as shown below Field 61 in File 100 FIELD LABEL FLAGGED DATA TYPE SET aaa a ee CLE 1 CODE MM WILL STAND FOR NO CODE 1 WILL STAND FOR YES AUDIT CODE WILL STAND FOR R CODE WILL STAND FOR DEL CODE WILL STAND FOR WR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR DESC CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR CODE WILL STAND FOR 246 January 2015 Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide HE CODE WILL STAND FOR cation XECUTL 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 J COMMAND Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert In Screen Mode whenever the DATA TYPE field is editable a popup window appears containing editable attributes of the field that are pertinent to its specific DATA TYPE field value SET OF CODES type fields require input of all the allowable Internal values i e CODE prompt and their External equivalents i e WILL STAND FOR prompt Using the lt ArrowUp gt and lt ArrowDown gt keys makes it easy to edit the codes It is permissible to leave a blank row but every Internal Code i e CODE on the left must have a corresponding External Code WILL STAND FOR on the right and vice versa FREE TEXT Field In the following example the DATA TYPE field for the REASON FOR FLAG field 2 6
394. to completion such that the selected entries are printed and can thus be stored in the DIBT SORT TEMPLATE global If you plan to keep a hard copy of the printed entries for future reference design your PRINT template to facilitate review You do not need to print all of the fields values that will be archived but you may want to include those that in combination will uniquely identify the entry Save the PRINT template for future use when archiving When the archived entries are written to temporary storage the corresponding original entry disappears from the user s view A new node subscripted with 9 is added to the original entry so that it will be bypassed by the usual MSC Fileman calls If data to be archived is contained in a Multiple field then the entire entry must be archived You cannot archive a subentry by itself A FILEGRAM type template is the only template type allowed in the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option You cannot have more than one archiving activity on a file at a time Data selected for archiving can be permanently saved to any sequential storage media for example SDP a VMS file magnetic tape or a removable disk pack Depending on the number of entries involved be prepared for the search the Select Entries to Archive option and write the Write Entries to Temporary Storage option processes to be time consuming January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide
395. tries from one file to another to compare and or merge two entries in a single file or to compare file data dictionaries and entries between two UCIs For example you may need to combine data from two different entries into one of the two This could happen in a patient database when the same patient has been inadvertently entered twice with the name spelled slightly differently CAUTION Once you have merged file entries the merging cannot be undone Care must be taken that data is not mistakenly lost Transfer File Entries Option The Transfer File Entries option can be used for several purposes You can use it to Merge two entries in the same file Transfer one or more records from one file to another file Copy a data dictionary into a new file However the Compare Merge File Entries option described in Section should usually be used to merge entries in the same file it is specifically designed for that task You must have READ access for the file you are transferring from and 290 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide WRITE access for the file you are transferring to If you are deleting entries after the transfer you need delete access as well Transferring Data Within the Same File You can use the Transfer File Entries option to merge two entries that are in the same file To do this 1 Identify the input and output file as the same 2 Identify the two entries Data v
396. tries to be selected If no further restrictions are required simply accept the defaults provided at the SORT BY and START WITH prompts 10 During the print phase which is indicated by the PRINT FIELD prompt MSC Fileman gathers the entries specified in the search and sort phases and adds the internal entry numbers of the selected entries to the SEARCH template Although specifying print fields is not required the print process must be run to completion Simply press the Enter key at the PRINT FIELD prompt or specify actual fields to print a report of identifying information for the extracted records In the sample dialogue that follows notice the sequence in which the search sort and print prompts appear EXTRACT FROM WHAT FILE CHANGE A SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD 01 lt Enter gt NO A CONDITION LESS THAN A LESS THAN 900 B SEARCH FOR CHANGE FIELD Enter IF A Enter NO LESS THAN 900 STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE ZZTEST TEMPLATE January 2015 313 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data Are you adding ZZTEST TEMPLATE as a new SORT TEMPLATE No Y SORT BY VERSION START WITH VERSION FIRST Enter WITHIN VERSION SORT BY Enter FIRST PRINT FIELD 01 Enter NO THEN PRINT FIELD VERSION THEN PRINT FIELD PROGRAMMER THEN PRINT FIELD Enter HEADING CHANGE EXTRACT SEARCH Replace Enter DEVICE Enter The resulting output lo
397. u can permanently change your default text terminator by changing it in your user characteristics as described in the Kernel manuals Programmer Edit Edit Lines with M Commands The Y Programmer Edit option invoked by entering the letter Y is only available to users with programmer s access You can enter a line of M code that line by line reads in the current line in variable X and returns the transformed line in variable Y You can specify the range of lines to be transformed by the M code you enter For example to blank out all lines containing the words Top Secret you could enter the following M code EDIT Option Y The text is in X and returned in Y Enter MUMPS xecute string to do transformation I X Top Secret S Y Transfer Text from Another WORD PROCESSING Field The Transfer Lines From Another Document option lets you copy text from some other WORD PROCESSING field into your current field You need to specify on which line of the current field to place the incoming text and identify the source of the text To identify the source of the text you need to use extended pointer syntax which is described in the Relational Navigation chapter of the MSC Fileman Advanced User Manual The syntax lets you specify the particular field of a specific entry in a specific file Briefly the syntax can be in one of the following two forms lt expression gt lt file gt lt field gt OR January 2015 119
398. uary 2015 Part 1 Reading Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide COMPOSER NOV 15 2012 09 36 BIRTHDATE ERA BAROQUE BACH JOHANN SEBASTIAN MARCH 31 1685 CORELLI ARCANGELO FEBRUARY 17 1653 HANDEL GEORGE FRIDERIC FEBRUARY 23 1685 PACHELBEL JOHANN AUGUST 1653 PURCELL HENRY SEPTEMBER 1659 SCARLATTI ALESSANDRO MAY 2 1660 SCARLATTI DOMENICO OCTOBER 26 1685 TELEMANN GEORG PHILIPP MARCH 14 1681 VIVALDI ANTONIO MARCH 4 1678 ERA CLASSICAL BACH CARL PHILIPP EMANUAL MARCH 8 1714 BACH JOHANN CHRISTIAN SEPTEMBER 5 1735 BOCCHERINI LUIGI FEBRUARY 19 1743 GLUCK CHRISTOPH WILLIBALD JULY 2 1714 HAYDN JOSEPH MARCH 31 1732 MOZART WOLFGANG AMADEUS JANUARY 27 1756 Col 1 lt PF1 gt H help lt PF1 gt E exit Line 22 of 300 Screen The Browser Screen Let s begin by taking a quick look at the Browser screen As you can see it has a lot in common with the word processing Screen Editor Browser Features The Browser enables you to scroll back and forth through your data a feature that is somewhat hit and miss in the traditional roll and scroll environment Other features include copy and paste into a different document and the ability to search for a specific text string The Browser s features are described in more detail below Navigating As with Screenman applications and the Screen Editor navigation in the January 2015 51 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data Browser is hand
399. uation of the value associated with the first test that evaluates as true i e not equal to zero Any number of test value pairs can be used however one of the tests must evaluate as true To assure that one test will always evaluate as true the last test is usually the literal 1 S SIX FMPROVIDER Ph D M D He is a medical doctor 1 He is not a medical doctor gt He is not a medical doctor S OCCURRENCES gt 3 Chronic Condition OCCUR RENCES gt 0 Non Chronic Condition 1 No Occurrences Recorded gt Chronic Condition Here the contents of the OCCURRENCES field is being tested If the first test 23 is true as in this example the result of the second test 20 is not relevant Eme e 77000 i system variable returns the number of bytes of free space available for use Its meaning varies with the M implementation X 194 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Rma p 000 system variable returns the current X coordinate column location of the cursor or print head If the application that moved the cursor did not update the value of X the value of X will not be reliable system variable returns the current Y coordinate row location of the cursor Like X its reliability depends on the controlling application January 2015 195 Part 5 Defining Data Part 5 Defining Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Data Dictionary Utiliti
400. uting Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Simple Pointer to a WORD PROCESSING Field Simple Pointer to a Multiple Backward Pointer You cannot use extended pointer syntax that can evaluate to a Multiline value at MSC Fileman s SORT BY and SEARCH FOR FIELD prompts Some of the ways in which you car use extended pointers that evaluate to a Multiline value are As the definition of a COMPUTED field Within word processing Windows so one document can call another document to print inside it For input to word processing data elements so you can use the Enter or Edit File Entries option to stuff one document into another As the name of a transfer document in the Line Editor s Transfer option As a Print Field specification in the Print File Entries option In an INPUT template when a multi valued field is being edited WORD PROCESSING Field WORD PROCESSING field names or field numbers preceded with a are allowed as elements in extended pointer expressions For example in the PATIENT file the HISTORY field is in the DIAGNOSIS Multiple You can define this computed expression B 12 Deficiency IN DIAGNOSIS FILE HISTORY This Multiline computed expression would signify the WORD PROCESSING HISTORY field text associated with a patient s B 12 Deficiency DIAGNOSIS A lookup is done on the DIAGNOSIS Multiple using B 12 Deficiency as the lookup value If the patient does not have that DIAGNOSIS or no HIST
401. w File You can use the Transfer File Entries option to create a new file To do this 1 At the INPUT TO WHAT FILE prompt enter the name of a nonexistent file 2 If you have programmer access you will be prompted for the global location for the new file 3 When you specify the file to transfer from you can request that the data dictionary of that file be copied as the data dictionary for your new file Here is an example of using the Transfer File Entries option to create a new file January 2015 295 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data INPUT TO WHAT FILE SCHOLAR COPY Are you adding SCHOLAR COPY as a new FILE No Y FILE NUMBER 16031 Enter INTERNAL GLOBAL REFERENCE DIZ 16031 Enter SORRY I M WORKING AS FAST AS I CAN A FreeText NAME Field 01 has been created TRANSFER FROM FILE SCHOLAR DO YOU WANT TO TRANSFER THE SCHOLAR DATA DICTIONARY INTO YOUR NEW FILE YES NOTE You are asked the global reference question only if you have programmer access Answering YES copies or clones the data definitions of the old file Then if the old file has had any templates created you will be asked DO YOU WANT TO COPY SCHOLAR TEMPLATES INTO YOUR NEW FILE Once you have created a new file with identical field and template descriptions you can transfer entries into it This is a method of copying a file Compare Merge File Entries Option The
402. wed by a caption to jump to a COMMAND NEXT Press lt F1 gt H for help Insert A corresponding line of data to be imported for a record containing data for both the top level record and its subentries would look like FMPATIENT 01 JAN 95 SC 24 JUN 95 NSC 14 AUG 95 SC 21 JUL 96 NSC NOTE You must file the same number of subentries in each record you import Completeness of Subfile Entries New subentries need to be added to every Subfile on a path to the lowest level Subfiles Your data must include values for the 01 field and all the 352 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide required identifiers for every Subfile as well as for the top level of the file You can add more than one subentry in a particular Subfile However you are restricted to the same set of fields for every entry in each Subfile Importing from VMS Files When importing from a data file that s been transferred to a VMS based computer system a problem can occur if once transferred the data file does not get a maximum record length stored in its file header This can happen when a DOS file is moved to a VMS system by some protocols When the maximum record length is unknown VMS uses a default maximum size of 510 If the length of a data record in the source file is larger than the maximum size an error results The solution is to run the VMS CONVERT utility on the Host file This utility adds the ma
403. which case simply Y or N upper or lowercase is acceptable the prompt may end with a question mark rather than by a colon ARE YOU SURE Getting Online Help at Any Prompt Enter or If you are not sure how to answer a prompt help is always available Just enter one question mark to get brief help or two question marks to get more detailed online help Help Value Description Entering a single question mark at a prompt gets a single line of help January 2015 73 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Entering two question marks at a prompt gets more detailed help a description of what values are acceptable and or a list of choices appropriate to the prompt where you entered the question marks Incorrect Responses MSC Fileman checks each answer to a prompt immediately after you enter it If you answer a prompt incorrectly MSC Fileman beeps and displays two spaces and two question marks You may be given an explanation of what was incorrect Then you re given a chance to respond to the prompt again Partial Responses When you are choosing one of a set of responses you can save keystrokes by not typing the full response Type in only the first letter of first few letters representing the response that you desire If the characters you enter uniquely identify one of the possible acceptable responses MSC Filema
404. wish to switch January 2015 109 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 2 Entering Updating and Deleting Data Recognizing the Line Editor When you edit a WORD PROCESSING field it s easy to see if MSC Fileman chooses the Line Editor as your editor If the Line Editor is used the last nine lines of text if there are that many are displayed on the screen with numbered prompts at the start of each line Also after the text is listed you are prompted with EDIT Option The EDIT Option prompt is where you can enter each Line Editor command to work with the text For example HISTORY 1 gt Owing to poverty in early youth patient seems not to 2 gt have had proper diet Since achieving economic success 3 gt his diet has been adequate but traces of original 4 gt deficiency remain 5 gt EDIT Option How to Enter Text in the Line Editor If no text exists yet in a WORD PROCESSING field that you re about to edit you ll see the field name followed by 1 gt This is the Line Editor s prompt for entering word processing text For example Select PATIENT FILE NAME FMPATIENT FOUR Select DIAGNOSIS ANGINA PECTORIS B 12 DEFICIENCY HISTORY 1 gt You can now enter the text for Line 1 and press the Enter key This brings you to a prompt 2 gt for Line 2 and so forth Keep adding lines until you are done then press the Enter key on a blank line to finish your edit as shown below 110
405. within the function This function returns information about the currently logged on user The information comes from the NEW PERSON file 200 W NOTE This function will not work if you are using January 2015 173 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 4 Computing Data p MSC Fileman without a NEW PERSON file in VA 200 File and File Data Functions COUNT Format COUNT fname COUNT fname field Parameters In the first format fname is the name of a file or of a Multiple in your current file In the second format fname is the name of your current file or Multiple field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by in fname This function counts the number of entries in a file or in a Multiple You can count the lines in a word processing field by using the first format with the word processing field name as the fname If the second format is used the number of entries with non null values in field is returned COUNT PATIENT 1349 the number of entries in the PATIENT file COUNT PATIENT PROVIDER gt 1288 number of patients with providers recorded DUPLICATED DUPLICATED field Parameters field is the name of a field or a field number preceded by The field must be a cross referenced field This function when used on any cross referenced field 174 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide will find all duplicates within a giv
406. ximum record information to the file header and everything will work just fine You can see if the maximum record length is stored in a file s header on a VMS system by using the following DCL command DIR filename FULL Foreign Formats FOREIGN FORMAT File Attributes Reference The following fields in the FOREIGN FORMAT File 4 44 correspond to attributes of the formatted data that you wish to export or import FIELD DELIMITER QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS SENDLAST FIELD DELIMITER PROMPT FOR DATA TYPE RECORD DELIMITER January 2015 353 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 6 Moving Data SUBSTITUTE FOR NULL RECORD LENGTH FIXED DATE FORMAT MAXIMUM OUTPUT LENGTH FILE HEADER NEED FOREIGN FIELD NAMES FILE TRAILER When exporting records all fields in this file are used in the export process When importing records only three fields are used in the import process FIELD DELIMITER RECORD LENGTH FIXED QUOTE NON NUMERIC FIELDS In this section each format characteristic is described Some combinations of characteristics are unacceptable these situations are mentioned Also some of the fields allow you to enter M code Export specific variables you can use in this M code are described in the section Variables Available for Programmer Use To set up a FOREIGN FORMAT file 4 44 entry use the Define Foreign File Format option to print out a format use the Print Format Documentation
407. y appears whenever you select an entry that is currently on the extract list ADD this entry appears whenever you select an entry that is not among the items on the list Print Selected Entries Option 3 of 9 To display the list of entries you have selected use the Print Selected Entries option This option uses the standard MSC Fileman interface for printing O REF For guidance on printing entries see the Print How to Print Reports from Files chapter of the MSC Fileman User Manual The example that follows depicts the type of dialogue you will encounter when printing a list of entries to be extracted Select EXTRACT OPTION PRINT SELECTED ENTRIES Select EXTRACT ACTIVITY 3 lt Enter gt CHANGE 08 30 92 EDITED SELECTOR FMEMPLOYEE J EXTRACT Enter a regular Print Template name or fields you wish to see printed on this report of records to be extracted FIRST PRINT FIELD ZZTEST TEMPLATE The output looks like CHANGE EXTRACT ACTIVITY AUG 30 1992 11 09 PAGE 1 NO VERSION PROGRAMMER 101 17 10 FMPROGRAMMER 25 102 17 32 FMPROGRAMMER 25 103 17 35 FMPROGRAMMER 25 316 January 2015 Part 6 Moving Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide 330 17 09 FMPROGRAMMER 30 Modify Destination File Option 4 of 9 You can use either the Modify File Attributes option or the Modify Destination File option when you are ready to create the destination file that will receive your
408. y Destination File For each extract field in the source file a corresponding field in the destination file must exist Certain DATA TYPE field values can optionally be resolved to external form before moving the data to the destination file For example data extracted from a DATA TYPE field of POINTER TO A FILE can be moved to a FREE TEXT type field in the destination file if external form of data is moved or such data can be moved to a NUMERIC type field if the internal value is moved e REF For more information see the Mapping Information section The destination file uses a file level attribute called ARCHIVE FILE The following is a description of this flag 5 YES This is an archive file and users cannot modify or delete the data or the data dictionary Any data dictionary changes may invalidate the archived data 6 NO or null There are no restrictions on the file If you need to update an archive file s data dictionary you must convert the old data to the new data dictionary format Updates to an archive file will be allowed only through the extract option Update Destination File option or through the programmer entry point EXTRACT DIAXU REF For more information on the Extract Tool API EXTRACT DIAXU see the MSC Fileman Programmer Manual Only Regular KWIC and Soundex type cross references are recommended for archive files No other types of cross references should be created If you are building
409. you use only string as a argument the first character is returned If you specify one n the character in that position in the string is returned If you specify n1 and n2 a string starting at n1 and ending at n2 is returned Examples E NAME 3 7 gt ith A NAME is FMPATIENT 21 E NAME 2 gt m E NAME gt S F IND Format F string target F string target n Parameters string is a string expression target is the character s or an expression yielding the character s to be searched for nis a positive integer or an expression yielding a positive integer Use This function returns the character position in string following the target If n is specified as a third argument the search for target is begun after character position n If target is not found 0 is returned Examples SF FMPATIENT 21 gt 7 SF NAME 7 gt 0 NAME has value of FMPATIENT 21 SHLOROLOG 190 January 2015 Part 4 Computing Data MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Eme o0 system variable returns the date and time in internal M format The format is number of days since December 31 1840 followed by a comma followed by the number of seconds since midnight H gt 55032 48780 Te system variable returns the current device It may return the operating system s designation of the current device JIOB JIUSTIFY Format J string n J n1 n2 n3 Parameters In the first forma
410. your search results the list of entries selected as a result of both the search and the sort order This is because SEARCH templates store both your search criteria and also the list of entries that is found in your search SEARCH templates are stored in the SORT TEMPLATE file 4 401 Creating SEARCH Templates The place to save your search criteria and results in a SEARCH template is right after you specify your search conditions At this point you are prompted STORE RESULTS OF SEARCH IN TEMPLATE You can create a template at this prompt Because SEARCH templates are stored in the same file as SORT templates the SORT TEMPLATE file 4 401 you can t give a SEARCH template the same name as a SORT template To avoid creating a SEARCH template just press the Enter key at this prompt Usually only the creator of a SEARCH template can use it Reusing Search Criteria Stored in a SEARCH Template Whenever you do a search you can reuse the search criteria i e your combined search conditions stored in a SEARCH template To do this enter the bracketed SEARCH template name at the first SEARCH FOR FIELD prompt A SEARCH FOR FIELD RESEARCH 1 January 2015 45 MSC Fileman 22 2 User Reference Guide Part 1 Reading Data A new search will be performed with the recalled search criteria Reusing Search Results in Another Search Whenever you do a search you can recall the results of a previous search th

User Reference Guide - MSC Fileman 22.2 Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents